Pipe Talk Instruction Manual Rev 1 Single Sided

F
All Rights Reserved. U.S. Copyright No. TX 5-367-631
WORLDS LARGEST EXCEL

PIPE ESTIMATING PROGRAM
IPEtalk
CC 2001
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
PIPEtalk INDUSTRIAL ESTIMATING SYSTEM
Third Edition
SINGLE SIDED PAGE PDF VERSION
JAMES M. MURPHY
INSTRUCTION
INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR A FULLY FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION DRIVEN INDUSTRIAL
PIPE ESTIMATING EXCEL SPREADSHEET PROGRAM. THE VBA MACRO PROGRAM CONTAINS
HUNDREDS OF SPECIFICATIONS, THOUSANDS OF UNIT MAN-
AN-HOURS AND MATERIAL
PRICES.
PRICES. IN EXCEL,
EXCEL, THE PROGRAM INCLUDES AN EXTRA WORK ORDER FORM AND CREATES
ESTIMATE FILES WITH REPORTS. YOU MUST HAVE EXCEL 2007 OR NEWER.
NEWER.
THIS PROGRAM
PROGRAM IS NOT FOR RESIDENTAL OR COMMERCIAL PLUMBING.
PLUMBING.
This Program is Not Voice Activated
Made in the U.S.A.

IPEtalk
CC 2001
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Third Edition
Revised 02/24/2014
By JAMES M. MURPHY
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Software Copyright 2001 by James M. Murphy
All rights reserved. No part of this book shall be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without written permission from the publisher. The method of estimating using SEEK
CODES as listed in this book is a copyrighted portion of this book and PIPEtalk. SEEK
CODES are not to be transferred to any other program or used as a search agent. The
formulas used in PIPEtalk are also protected by copyright and are not to be transferred or
reverse engineered. Although every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this
book, the author and publisher assume no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is
any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of information contained herein
and in the PIPEtalk spreadsheets. The author and publisher specifically disclaim any
responsibility for any liability, loss, or risk, personal or otherwise, which is incurred as a
consequence, directly or indirectly, of the use and application of any of the contents of this
book or the PIPEtalk spreadsheets. For information, write the author at James M. Murphy,
915 Gibbs Street, Bastrop, LA. 71220 or email at pipetalk@hotmail.com or
pipetalk@yahoo.com. Visit our store site at http://store.yahoo.com/pipetalk/ to order
additional copies and to find out what is new.
PIPEtalk
TAKEOFF PIPE AS FAST AS YOU CAN TALK!!
WORLDS LARGEST EXCEL PIPE ESTIMATING PROGRAM
Are Protected by Copyright.
Published 2008 By James M. Murphy, 915 Gibbs Street, Bastrop, LA. 71220 U.S.A.
pipetalk@hotmail.com http://store.yahoo.com/pipetalk/
PROUDLY MADE IN THE U.S.A.
ISBN 0-9726933-1-9
59999>
9 780972 693318
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
A very special thanks to the Hamm family at BERG Mechanical Inc. in Shreveport,
LA. for allowing the author the experience of long hours of hard work while
employed by their great company. Good honest people are hard to find. Keep your
integrity and pride-dont change BERG!
Through life you have your up and downs. You will find construction to be a tough
business. I have had my encounters and learned lessons which I sometimes prefer to
forget. For those un-forgettable memories, I would like to thank the following
organizations;
Thank you goes to the School Of Construction at Northeast University in

Monroe, LA. I wanted to thank the heartless teacher that gave me that
single high B that destroyed the 4.0 average in my major. Further,
when I wanted to donate the program free to their students, I was
snubbed by the School of Construction!
Thank you NEPCO (Part of ENRON then) for showing me how they
publish very creative cost reports. I was not there long before I asked to
be laid-off from your organization! Those reports are better shred than
read! Did you get arrested, finally? The German bonding company
sure was interested in why those numbers looked so strange. Why didnt
you read the ethics guide you gave me? Da?
Un-forgettable memories like these should be shared.
This book is in memory of Williams Meadows Hamm Jr. whose business ethics
served as a guide and role model for all mechanical contractors to follow.
May he rest in peace.
PIPEtalk
INDUSTRIAL ESTIMATING SYSTEM
Contents at a Glance
What is New 1
Introduction 3
Important Quick Start Information. 10
Disclaimer and Terms 18
Chapter 1. The S (Setup) Tab..... 19

1. Set Up (SU) PIPEtalk .... 20
2. File Control For Specifications and Materials 37
3. Specifications Listing. 42
4. Specifications Parts Validation List. 45
5. The Specification (SP) 47
Chapter 2. The ENTRY Tab and Estimate Files. 54

6. Takeoff Entry Screen and Estimate Files. 55
7. Entry Screen Memory Storage Area 137
8. Estimate Output Storage Area, Lists and Files 139
9. Templates. 148
10. Extra Work Orders. 162
Chapter 3. HELP .. 166

11. The HELP Index Panel 167
12. Help Instructions By Subject.. 168
Chapter 4. The Estimate File... 177

13. Estimate File and Reports.... 178
Chapter 5. The U (Universal) Tab.. 195

14. The Universal Sheet Arrangement 196
Chapter 6. The C (Carbon Steel) Tab. 206

15. The Carbon Steel Sheet Arrangement. 207
Chapter 7. The A (Alloy/Other) Tab.. 216

16. The Alloy Sheet Arrangement.. 217
Chapter 8. The P (Pricing) Tab.. 226
17. The Item Class Multipliers... 227
18. The Material Price List. 234
Chapter 9. Sample Practice Estimate.... 240

19. Sample Estimates .... 241
Chapter 10. E2P6 (Excel to Primavera)..................... 275

20. Methods Explained.. 276
21. Excel Import File.... 279
22. Primavera Importing..... 299
Chapter 11. Complete Estimator 319

23. General Instruction.. 320
Chapter 12. Codes and Craft Resources.................... 332

24. Report Codes.. 333
25. Reserved Seek Codes. 335
26. Concrete Seek Code Structure.. 336
27. Concrete Seek Code Shape Types. 337
28. Concrete Seek Code Detail Items.. 339
29. Pipe Fitting Seek Code Formats 342
30. Valve Seek Code Formats.. 344
31. Piping Connection Seek Code Formats 346
32. Hanger Seek Code Formats.. 347
33. Instrument Seek Code Formats 349
34. Special Seek Code Formats... 351
35. Crews And Craft Resources.. 352
36. Material and Labor Cost Code Accounts 353
About The Author 368
Registration Card 369
Index. 370
PIPEtalk 915 GIBBS STREET BASTROP, LA. 71220 pipetalk@yahoo.com

All Rights Reserved. U.S. Copyright No. TX 5-367-631
http://store.yahoo.com/pipetalk
915 GIBBS STREET BASTROP, LA. 71220 pipetalk@hotmail.com http://store.yahoo.com/pipetalk
WHAT IS NEW
On the upper left corner of the S tab is a date. On that date, the program will stop working. A
new KEY is required to use the program after the date shown. When the key is updated, upon
calculation, the date will disappear.
E2P6 is an Excel file that will import your PIPEtalk estimates directly into Primavera, building
pre-assembled mini schedules which can be modified by the user for each line of the Excel estimate
data. Based on adjustable predetermined labor percents, the bar duration is automatically adjusted
using the estimates man-hours. The program will also add your estimates major material resources
to the schedule activity.
PIPEtalks expanded capabilities are constantly evolving. It has been thirteen years since
PIPEtalk 1.0 was sold on the internet. We would like to thank those that purchased our product. We
have had few calls for support. It is assumed that the major reason is this instruction manual. We
have tried to cover all aspects of the program. Program improvements accumulate and revisions are
constantly needed to this book.
The Entry Screen has received many small improvements. See the Entry Screen Chapter for
improvement descriptions. The most recent improvements were two added buttons while deleting two
buttons. One will pop-up a panel that provides the file totals and the other a panel showing the crew
and the hours of each discipline. We have added some pricing from the Trade Service web site in an
effort to get current prices. Some valves now have CS, 304, and 316 codes. One primary
improvement cannot be seen; that is to reprogram the VBA language to interface with newest Excel
2013 VBA changes. We hope these improvements show our dedication to making PIPEtalk a useful
tool at a low cost. Thank you for your continued support!
James M. Murphy
PIPEtalk Publisher
February 22, 2014
PIPEtalk INSTRUCTION MANUAL -2-
ACTUAL COMMENT FROM A USER

I recently attended the AACE International Annual Meeting in Las Vegas. While
there I was the high bidder in the silent auction for Pipetalk. Honestly I was not
expecting much. However, I am very interested in Excel cost models and I figured
I could at least pick up a few ideas by looking at how you set things up.
I have to say that I was totally overwhelmed, I have never seen anything like it.
This is a very impressive effort and I am extremely glad that I got a copy, and
have already recommended it to others.
MY RESPONSE TO A USER
A major oil company estimator suggested to his management in Dallas that
PIPEtalk be used in place of Icarus. I told them not to do that, Icarus is the right
tool for early stages of design. I want to sell PIPEtalk but only when it can help,
not harm. Other programs have their place. PIPEtalk can replace pipe estimating
programs, but it is not ready to take on design/cost programs James M. Murphy
INTRODUCTION
Why would anyone spend years working late at night and weekends to create a monster pipe
estimating program? I would guess it would be an introvert with a slight case of insanity? A blind
man can see that the fancy estimate programs on the market are too expensive and difficult to use.
The industry needed a high powered estimating tool that everyone could afford and use. There was a
need for a shorthand method to speak to one another and to expedite note taking in the field. PIPEtalk
is the result of years of estimating experience and aggravation in an attempt to build the best, largest
low cost pipe estimating software. PIPEtalk is the right way to march into the future of industrial pipe
estimating for the common man. Here is the story of the origination of this handy tool.
The majority of the specification driven pipe estimating programs cost above the $8000 price
range. The company I was employed with did not have the resources to purchase these expensive
programs. We needed at least eight copies of the program to expand our company. To see what it
would do, we decided to purchase three copies of a nationally recognized estimating program. That
program was a piece of junk. It was so unstable that I was forced to abandon it. [I have learned of
another company that also spend a lot of money in 2008 and they too were unable to use the MC you
know who program.] The owners of my company were angry at me because I would not use it. I was
angry at MC you know who because it simply would not work! I had to get the pipe estimates out--
but how? I needed a program that was easy to use and CHEAP (In-expenselike $0). I had no
budget to work with. I had no help. They, my boss and company management, had high expectations
with all the money they had given you know who. I was the Industrial Estimating Department and
was expected to estimate 20 Million a year with an estimating program that would not run! My anger
then still drives me today.
As you can see, there was a clear challenge to improvise and quick. I set out with a plan to
build a spreadsheet that I could use to estimate with. Something that was simple to understand and
use. My background as an estimator and experience with two other major brands of spreadsheets
provided a foundation for me to build onLotus and Quattro-Pro. Today the de-facto standard is
Excel by Microsoft.
I had never used Excel before, but it was similar to the other two spreadsheet programs. The early
versions of Excel allowed me to use my old Lotus keystrokes and I had a rough program running in a
few short weeks. Then Excel slammed the door and stopped supporting the Lotus Macros! I had to
start over while trying to estimate full time. The use of Visual Basic for Applications was out of the
question. I had no formal training for Visual Basic or Visual Basic for the Excel Application. To
learn advanced spreadsheet use and VBA would be too much in the time I could allow. A mountain
cant be climbed in one leap. With no choice, I was forced to learn as I went and do detail hard-dollar
estimates full time. My days were very long and are even now. With that challenge to face, I
proceeded to construct the estimating program. My background as an experienced scheduler allowed
me to plan out the steps I needed to construct such a large undertaking with the manpower of one.
Thinking thru the estimate process and then designing a program that addresses those steps were major
tasks.
I have estimated pipe for 27 years and know what I want and need. I saw programs that did
pipe but only a few estimated pipe well. All required a lot of money and time to setup. Some required
special digitizers and were full of drop-down screens. The professional programmers love their drop-
downs. I hate drop-downs. They waste my time. They should only be used for verification or when
space is limited on the desktop. They should be used when the selections are many and to help the
user make the right selection. I wanted a program that I can put the data in as fast as I can talk. It had
to be able to get the information from the drawing to the computer in a very simple way. The entry
method had to be as simple as talking to the computer. The pipe estimating industry needed a new
language to allow you to type in the estimate quickly. It needed SEEK CODES that could find (seek)
the information stored. The part you entered repeatedly had to be short/simple. Yet, the code had to
be complex to find the exact item you were seeking.
The fastest method of entry for the data was chosen. To communicate quickly, you use
abbreviations for the pipe fittings and pieces that makeup pipe takeoff. I researched and practiced
listing the pipe estimate parts and giving them names. I created a list that can be used someday to talk
to the computer, thus the name PIPEtalk. That time will come as the software gets better and the
computers get faster. You can speak now, but is designed to do mostly word entry, the current
software thinks everything is text. The programs are not ready for the words to mean numbers and
actions. Someday you will be able to say the numbers and the code and they will be entered by the
computer. The new touch screens are now available and you can use that entry method if you wish.
This program's SEEK CODES are the beginning of a new pipe shorthand language between the
computer and the estimator. This is a language that should be learned by all pipe estimators. These
abbreviations can be used to take notes in the field and could be pasted into the sheet when you return.
When I get the engineers takeoff, I first code it with SEEK CODES. The days of writing the full word
for 45 or 90 degree elbow has ended. You now indicate the specification and enter 45, 90, T for
a tee, RC for a concentric reducer.
Today you key the SEEK CODE into the estimate. Because it is short, it takes very little time
to make the necessary entry. Punch the following into the estimate-- P, 90, 45, T, TR, RC, RE, F,
BG1 and you just entered a lot of information in a few short moments. You can use the new
ASSISTANT button to do it even faster and not have to learn the SEEK CODE! Of course, at the top
of the takeoff Entry Screen you have to enter the specification you want the piping to be based on.
You do have the ability to over-ride the global specification you entered with a new one for any line
item that is not of that global specification. These are called spec over-rides. The specification will
define exactly what you mean when you type the abbreviation. The specification knows what kind of
pipe you want and converts P to P2 or P4, which in turn creates the estimate entry of joint of
pipe at 20 LF/40 LF joints as defined by the specification. The item will come with the right
manpower and cost from the database in the program. When you enter F it puts the correct type of
flange for you based on one of the specifications you have selected from the takeoff screen. There are
121 items defined by each specification which you build and they are broken into four sizes. You
control which sizes are grouped together. An example might be that you group .5 to 2 as the first
group and 2.5 through 10 as the next group. The 2,280 specifications that are therefore broken
down into 121 parts and four sizes per part. Or (4 size breaks x 121 items x 60 specs x 64,000 spec
files=) 1,858,560,000 possible items that are defined by the specifications that you control. All are
found for you by the program as you enter the specification numbers, sizes, SEEK CODES and the
quantities. Plus there are many thousands of items that are not specification related and can be
selected in the same screen as you enter the takeoff. Insulation and painting is now included as a non-
spec item. As you can see, PIPEtalk is powerful! With very little practice, you will be able to enter
the data as fast as you can talk. Using Southern slang: "Bet your expensive fancy programs an't any
faster!"
Every good thing has a bad side. A spreadsheet is limited to how big it can be and still run
acceptably. In Excel 2003, the file was about 133 megs. On low powered computers (<1600 MHz) it
will bog down at about 100 megs with 256 meg of ram logged on to a corporate network. I have had
to unload the E-mail and Fax and the virus protection to run on an older computer. With todays
computers, you will have none of these problems. While constructing PIPEtalk and doing estimates, I
have run the worksheet as large as 160 megs. It will run at a large size, do not be alarmed. However,
using the new Excel 2007, 20010, and 2013 the files are a lot smaller but the data is much larger
internally. With the advent of faster computers, the speed of the program has increased noticeably. I
run PIPEtalk in Excel 2007 on a low cost Gateway 1.6 GHz Dual-Core laptop with 4 meg of ram. I
also run it in Excel 2013 with an i7 Core chip and Windows 7.
You can do over 3,000 lines of take-off per project with that type computer. PIPEtalk can handle
10,000 rows of estimate data. As you can see, the more power the better when a spreadsheet is that
large. Calculating becomes an issue---it is the slowest part of the programs operation and remains
OFF until needed. (F9 to Calc) When you load the program, it will setup the correct criteria for you.
Microsoft has issues, it will tell you that it could not do this or that when you open the program. I have
programed it so these problems do not show up, however, THEY keep changing Visual Basic and
creating more issues for a programmer. Let me know if you get any errors. Another Microsoft
problem is related to your monitor. If you open Excel on one screen and move it to another it may
start changing the sizes of the macro buttons and font! The opening screen includes the first
calculation and setups. BE SURE TO APPROVE MACROS RUNNING BEFORE OPENING THE
PROGRAM.
The IS Department told me--you have maxed out what Excel can do. Perhaps they are right. I
am still looking at ways to do the same thing with a smaller file structure. Currently PIPEtalk can off-
load the materials you do not need and reload them with the touch of a button. The unused
specifications are handled the same way--off loaded until you need them. I am also considering tying
the spreadsheet to a database. However, not everyone has a database program. Everyone does have a
spreadsheet! This spreadsheet method allows for your field to estimate extra work orders very fast.
They don't have to wait for the home office to do the estimate. This frees up resources in the home
office and provides instant response to the client. The home office gives the field the file for the
project with prices and rates loaded. This method gives instant control of the numbers and consistency
between the home office and the field in the eyes of the client/owner. I do assume that you are at least
an average user of Excel. In version 4.0 and above, you did not have to load PIPEtalk in the My
Documents. It can be placed at any location on C drive as long as you tell the setup screen where it
will be located and revise the shortcut on the desktop. An Icon loads on installation to take you to the
program location--use it please. The Instruction (PDF) book is loaded, if you press a link at the top of
the Setup tab.
In version 7.0, the titles and file controls for the specification, estimate and material files were moved
to a file called TITLES. The TLES file is discussed in Chapters 1-4 (Specification Files) and 2-8
(Estimate Files)
It has taken years and thousands of hours of time to build this spreadsheet program. Every
entry was typed by the same person, me. Every entry unit man-hour was developed/averaged from
many sources by the same person, me. There are errors I'm sure and the data entry is never going to
be 100% complete. I have located errors in all versions and have corrected them when found.
Because the macros are still being added and the fact that they are very complex, I am sure more errors
will be found. I will upgrade any version FREE--check the net site for information (pipetalk.com). I
do not do this to make money as many of you have found out through the years. I simply do it for
revenge and the anger I still feel toward MC you know who.
You should check your first few estimates to see if they get the numbers you expect. Look over the
data created to see if the specification got the expected type of pipe materials. I know they will
provide you realistic man-hours to build your project but you alone must make the final decision. You
have the ability to adjust the units with multipliers that are decided in the setup screen and
automatically added via the height settings you enter. These adjustments are very easy to use and are
now user adjustable. Some adjustments have been added to allow you to do more detail adjustments
of a material type. For example, you can adjust the spool handing and hanger steel manpower
separately on the setup screen.
The man-power units used in PIPEtalk are averages of many sources. No one source was used to
determine what the unit should be. The averages were taken from many published sources as well as
private companys unit man-power. Some companies use special units to obtain their estimates. As
example, BE&K. I highly suggest that you do not use their pipe units because you do not know what
is contained in the unit. They are a lot like spaghetti sauce and are captured in five (Was four) groups
that you do not have access to the definition of. If the units appear to be the same as other
publications, it will be caused by more than one reference having the same exact unit. As they say, if
it takes one hour to do something, then it takes one hour. It is what it isno company can own reality.
When preparing an estimate from P&IDs and GAs you may have to allow for a fitting allowance. You
must change the density of the fittings as the pipe size changes and if they are in the process area or in
the rack. I have seen some companies use 25 fittings per 100 LF and not change the fitting density.
That is totally wrong. As pipe gets larger, the fittings almost always get less per 100 LF. Conoco-
Phillips has a density chart for petrochemical plants and you may review their density inside the
Templates for 150 PSI, 300 PSI and 600 PSI. The pipe template for 150# now has a condition
template. The condition drawing is a sketch of five conditions (Was four).
I have compared the expensive Icarus program and believe that PIPEtalk can create the same level of
estimate quality for pipe, concrete and steel. An Employee from Shell Oil suggested that PIPEtalk be
used to replace Icarus. Icarus is a well-developed program to be used when you know little about a
project and does a great job. The quality of the Icarus estimate is related, as with many programs, to
the operators skills. PIPEtalk cannot compete with such a program and I do not try too. They have
many experts working on their program, I have only one
Reluctantly, some units are my best guess and others are averages after reviewing all the sources I can
find. Because they are averages of so many sources, they do not belong to any one company. If the
units look like they may be from a particular source, read on/compare and you will see the units do not
follow any particular source. Even averaged, some sources will simply agree on what the unit should
be. No reference is made to any one source, nor is any one source the right way to build the units. I
have placed reference numbers on some units to allow the program to find and adjust the materials.
Adding so many items to the file pushes the limit of VBA to the edge. I will soon not be able to add
any more data due to the size of the file and the limits of VBA. Everything has limits, even Excel. I
have switched to Excel 2007 format to allow for more items. One major feature is the ability to index
the unit price of an item and increase that index for two additional material types! Because SS has
taken an accelerated path for pricing, I have included the ability to bump the indexer for those
materials. To make this work, each item must have a date of posting when posted on the U, C and A
tabs. The indexer will look at the posting date, look on the setup tab and go to a chart and revise the
old price into todays dollars and adjust the ISO values too. It is not perfect, yet on a Saturday night
and you have a deadline, it is better than no cost number.
The 2007 Excel format has over 104,000 rows and many columns wide. I was wondering what I was
going to do when I reached the 2003 max. I am getting close to the prior maximum number of rows.
With Excel 2007, now I know, Microsoft has provided the answer. The faster computers may make
calculation a non-issue soon.
*Microsoft Excel 2003/2007/2010/2013 Versions - This file is not a separate program but a "Microsoft Excel" spreadsheet TEMPLATE.
It is not saved as a TEMPLATE, but rather as a standard spreadsheet. The individual cells are not protected to allow for the flexibility
and possible customization by you. PIPEtalk does pipe using specifications and in addition; steel and concrete estimating by entering
the correct civil SEEK CODES. A copyright has been granted; therefore, you cannot copy PIPEtalk without the authors permission or
duplicate the "formulas", "methods of operation" and "SEEK CODES" used unless you have paid the fee to use them. You may do that
by requesting a quote from PIPEtalk 915 Gibbs St. Bastrop, La. 71220 pipetalk@hotmail.com http://store.yahoo.com/pipetalk. This
PIPEtalk is designed for an industrial mechanical contractor doing mostly field erected pipe. PIPEtalk will also estimate the shop
fabrication value and keep it separate in the built-in reports.
*Microsoft Excel is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.

No views of the Excel menus are contained in this template instruction book.
Only pictures of the spreadsheet body which the author created is shown in this manual.
PIPEtalk INSTRUCTION MANUAL - 10 -
IMPORTANT QUICK START INFORMATION
To run PIPEtalk close down all unnecessary programs! Do not open up an Excel file that has
calculation turned on. If you do, you may need to wait while it and PIPEtalk calculates. There are
many formulas required to be active and many more that are created only for a short amount of time
by the Macros. DO NOT INTERRUPT A MACROIT MAY CORRUPT THE FILES
FORMULASKEEP A BACKUP COPY JUST IN CASE! If you do interrupt a macro, do not save
the file.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: If you see #REF, you probably have corrupted the formulas on that
row. Enter a zero quantity for the row showing #REF and continue. The row will not be
included in the estimate when it is sent to storage. Optionally: Update the estimate
information inside the ENTRY tab estimate storage to an estimate file, save that estimate file.
Then close the program file without saving it so the problem is not saved. Reopen the
program file and reload your estimate and continue your work.
If you printed the formulas in the tab "E" in four columns on each page, it would take 360 pages just to
print that one sheet/tab. I sent 1 boxes of printed pages for the patent application. The SEEK
CODES are also protected by the copyright. You may print them out for your reference and add to
them as you require. The secret method of PIPEtalk has not been discussed in this book, but is no
longer protected by password! I have no fear that you can reproduce the formulas and method of
operation for your own program--you can give it a try. You may not use the formulas or the SEEK
CODES in any other estimating program as a method of coding to retrieve the item from a list or
database without written permission from James M. Murphy.
The program is provided as a self-extracting INSTALL file which uses a registered copy of
Qsetup to compile. Simply run this executable file. The self-extracting INSTALL program will
create a folder called "C:\PIPEtalk6.0" or 7.0, etc. (AT THIS TIME THE VERSION NUMBER IS
FROZEN AT 7.0 FOR COMPATABILITY OF UPDATES)
IF YOU ALREADY HAVE A COPY OF PIPETALK AND HAVE A FOLDER NAMED

PIPEtalk5.0 or 6.0 YOU DO NOT HAVE TO CHANGE ANY FOLDER NAME BEFORE
INSTALLING 7.0. HOWEVER, IF YOU HAVE A FOLDER CALLED PIPETALK7.0,
RENAME THE PIPEtalk7.0 FOLDER TO SOMETHING ELSE BEFORE INSTALLING THE
7.0 VERSION A SECOND TIME.
The install program will copy all the necessary files to two folders on C drive. Do not rename
the program file or the macros will not run. The download file installs the following files: PIPEtalk
Program, PIPEtalk EST Template, PIPEtalk SPEC Template, MTL 01 through MTL 16 and Template
01 to 08. Also included is PIPEtalk EWO Import Template file , A Spec Parts File, a Price Update file
and a new PIPEtalk Titles file and many others.
To run PIPEtalk, load Excel 2007,2010, or 2013 (All rights reserved-Microsoft Corporation).
PIPEtalk WILL NOT RUN ON EXCEL 95, 98, 2000, 2002, 2003, or any Lotus or Quattro Pro
products! Do not save the PIPEtalk files as Excel 2003 files unless the program names or uses such a
file extension.
The following items will be automatically adjusted when you open PIPEtalk :
Calculation is turned OFF (Use F9 to calculate or press the Calc Buttons)
Auto complete is turned OFF -- Options/Edit
The error-checking is turned OFF-- Options/Error-checking
The itineration is set to less than 50. (The standard 100 is un-necessary)
The file calculates when the program is opened. This removes the first slow calculation.
You will still need to manually set these items:
Set SECURITY to medium. Setting security to HIGH will block all PIPEtalk Macros.
Add-in the "Analysis Tool Pak" and "MS Query" if you have them. (Not required)
Load the C:\My Documents\PIPEtalk\PIPEtalk Program by selecting the Icon on your screen.
You will receive a warning about Macros (Please allow) and it will take a minute or two to loadmay
actually show not-responding but it IS running. A macro will alert you when it has completely
loaded and run a slight delay to allow full loading.
This file does have hundreds of Macros-NONE of them will hurt your computer! They are all
written in Visual Basic for Applications (All rights reserved-Microsoft Corp). VBA will write
temporary files that store protected information. If you have an older version of Windows, you will
need to clean out your temporary files every now and then. When you install PIPEtalk you may need
to setup the specification sets and the estimate groups locations shown on the S tab.
The program will automatically fit your screen on the setup and entry tabs. It is difficult to run
PIPEtalk on a small screen. At least a seventeen inch monitor is recommended. A laptop screen is
well suited to the program, with some eye strain. It was designed using a stock laptop-nothing fancy
to be sure it will work on yours. The idea is to design and run it on the same type of equipment you
might havenot the best equipment, but good enough to do your workfaster is better. I use a
slower AND a fast computer to try to match what my users are using.
The PIPEtalk program spreadsheet has these tabs: "S", "ENTRY", "U", "C", "A" AND "P".
They are described in general terms below and in more detail in the following chapters.
The "S" tab has five parts; the setup, template files description, specification GoTo list,
specification validation list and the 60 specifications that are currently loaded. You can go to these
parts by pressing the GoTo buttons at the top edge of the "S" sheet of by paging down to its location as
shown on the map above. At each one of these three groups you can also get HELP by pressing the
red HELP buttons on the tabs. The programs setup is at the top of the S tab. In this part of the
worksheet, you do all the setups that are required. What you want to do is to offload as much of the
material types as you can to keep the program file size to a minimum. This S tab is discussed in
Chapter 1 of this manual. The Reports that were tab R have been moved to the Estimate Files.
There is no longer any tab called R in the main program file.
The ENTRY tab is where you enter your takeoff. There are three primary screens on this tab.
The top is the Upper Control Panel and below that is the Entry Screen. Below the Entry Screen
is the Estimate Storage Area where the actual results of the takeoff screen are sent for temporary
storage until the information is sent to the estimate file. Use the Arrow Up button to go to the top
and the Arrow Down button to go to the bottom when you are on the ENTRY worksheet. A
discussion of the ENTRY tab is covered in Chapter 2 of this manual.
The left arrow will arrange the screen so you can view more data that is being estimated data, which
will be sent to the estimate storage area. The right arrow will take you to the UPC list of the current
estimate. It helps to solve error issues. If the program cannot find an item, you can look to see what
the program is looking for by pressing the right arrow. If you simply want to modify the item, use the
new FIND UPC button on the Entry tab.
Here a few notes about error checks on the Entry Screen on the ENTRY tab. A few error
messages have been written to help you keep the data correct. One error check is for painting stainless
steel. If your specification selected contains the words 304 or 316 you will get the red error
background at painting. Another paint error would occur if you told PIPEtalk to paint the pipe and to
insulate it. Generally that is not correct. (Perhaps primer is OK) Finally PIPEtalk is looking for items
that are not priced or man powered. At row 126 of the Entry Screen an error message will show if
there is a missing manpower unit or price (if the units are -1). That message will also count the
number of un-priced (-1) items. On the S tab, at the specs, the program is watching to see if you have
changed a spec and will notify you to save the spec file.
The EWO (Extra Work Order) sheet allows for quick extra work order calculation to be created.
You should copy and save the sheet in a separate file after you create the necessary EWO Template
you want to use. Of course you can simply print it for a one time use to submit for approval. You
access the EWO form by pressing the EWO Form button on the lower right of the Entry Control Panel
(Upper part of the Entry Screen) The estimate area should be empty to begin an extra work order.
The current estimate and the hours on the S tab (Upper-right) will be used for the EWO. If there is no
current estimate, then there is no data for the EWO.
In Version 6 we added eight (8) Template files. These are accessed by a button on the Entry
Control Panel. File seven is a special file just for hangers. You may go to the file to make templates
or select the template item, enter the quantity you want and run the Use Template button to have the
program place the template items in the estimate. Each Template file can have 200 templates with 91
items in each template. These files, along with many others, are separate and designed to be
downloaded from the internet site as updates are available or exchanged between users.
SORRY, THE TEMPLATE FILES DO NOT HAVE ISO (Metric) UNITS AT THIS TIME.
New to the S tab, is a find within the spec panel that pops up via shift+. This panel has a list of
spec items you can select to go to. It also allows you to jump up or down one spec.
The "U" tab has the UNIVERSAL ITEMS on it. They are items not selected by using
specifications. These items are used universally by all piping types. Even though they are not
selected by the specifications, you select them as you enter the estimate. You do NOT have to get out
of the entry screen to pick one of the universal items. The program knows which items come from the
specifications and which come from the universal tab (U), C and A tabs. The universal tab has
insulation (Pipe and now equipment), painting (Incd blast), pipe hangers, earthwork, concrete, steel
and equipment units. See the instructions to learn how to estimate with the non-pipe categories such
as concrete. Use the Assistant to help you chose the UPC for the items on the U tab. Not all items on
the U tab are found using the Assistant, but many are. As time allows, more will be added to the
Assistant. Further discussion of `the U tab is covered in Chapter 4 of this manual.
Tab "C" has all the carbon steel pipe and fittings (Bolt & Gaskets /CS /FS /MI). See the list
buttons at the top to jump around to different groups of materials. These material groups can be stored
in MTL files and returned back as needed. See Chapter 5 for a detail discussion of how to add and
modify the C tab. In version 5.0, bolts and gaskets can be assigned a bolt & gasket number and a
macro button can get that set and put it in the specification for you. The list is on the S tab and access
by a button at the top of the S tab. In version 7.0, a new Search button was added to find the materials
on C, A and P tabs.
Tab "A" has stainless, FRP, plastics and alloys. See the list buttons at the top to go to the
different types of materials. These material groups can be stored and returned from the MTL files.
Please note that many of the material types on this tab are off-loaded and stored in material files to
make room for the materials that are used the most. See Chapter 6 for a detail discussion of how to
add to and modify the A tab units.
The "P" tab has many list prices driven by multipliers. Many part numbers are for a company
called McJunkin, but may now be outdated/replaced by new ones. When you make a change that
involves a price or a multiplier, run the Macros to reset the prices to the new multiplier settings. These
multipliers formulas have to be updated by the Macro if you change any multiplier on the P tab.
The Macro to reset the tabs prices to the new settings is run by pressing the tab "P" reset button. The
"P" (Price) sheet has a list price data base from a major pipe supplier and also has civil prices at the
bottom. This sheet is the primary source for material prices. A default secondary price is stored on
the "U", "C" &"A" sheets when PIPEtalk can't find a price on the "P' tab. You do the entry/takeoff
from the ENTRY tab. Sometimes it is difficult to tell where the price you see comes from. To solve
that press the left arrow and it will indicate where the items price came from. See Chapter 7 for a
detail discussion of how to add and modify the P tab.
Many weights of the pipe materials for shipping are still missing. I have entered all the
information I have and will be requesting additional weights from vendors to add the missing data.
Cast iron, MI, galvanized, PVC and CPVC pipe needs more items added. If you have weights for
larger pipe, please send the data to me.
I need to tell you some basic things about what you can and cannot do; Generally-you enter
data at the red on cream colored cells, do not delete / erase by using the space bar, always delete by
using the delete key. The space bar does not delete, it places a text character in the cell. Do NOT
change PIPEtalks file name, rename any sheet or add any worksheet "New Window". You can add
rows on sheets U, C, A and P in order to add units/prices. On the ENTRY tab, do not insert/delete
rows or columns, do not re-name anything (tabs, worksheets or the titles you see), do not put a
blank by using the bar (use the delete key), do not re-format any number. The good news is that
you can step on the formulas below row 146 at the Entry Screen and they will fix themselves when
you run the New Screen button. Keep in mind that the labor crew used in the estimate units must be
on the setup screen in order or the program to use it. NEVER move or insert rows in this fileuse
copy, paste and erase the old one to move it. It might increase the file to a size that is unusable or a
macro may not run correctly! You should check every now and then to make sure that you did not
move the extreme right-bottom too far to the right or too far down. This is a recommendation of
Microsoft. This will make the worksheet unnecessarily large if you do not keep the bottom of the used
area as short as you can. You can check to see where it is by pressing control end or by pressing F5
and choosing special, last cell. You can clear unnecessary data, formats by highlighting the rows or
columns and picking from the menu edit, clear and your choice. The file will not reduce its size until
you save it. (The right end of the worksheet will also not move until the file is saved). Do not follow
the Microsoft recommendation of running the Microsoft Program called xlsclean.exe against this
program. It will increase the size instead of decrease as they claim it would. Do not format any row
or column using the global (entire) row and column numbers. The format method using the rows or
columns will format the entire row or column all the way right or all the way to the bottom. This will
make any spreadsheet larger unnecessarily. I hope this do not do list isnt too much for you to
remember.
You can see a quick list of the SEEK CODES to use by pressing the title of the SEEK CODES.
It is a macro button. You will find a very simple concept being used. Pick a spec or build it or modify
it and tell the Entry screen which one you want to use. Then at the size put the primary size, the SEEK
CODE and the quantity. Then calculate. That's how simple it is. Of course you might need a second
size, a line number, a code, insulation, paint, from, to, and a height also. You can increase the pipe
units by indicating the line is 100% X-rayed on the ENTRY tab. When you build a spec, if you put
100% X-ray in the specification note field first, the ENTRY tab will see it and highlight the 100% X-
ray cell on the ENTRY tab upper panel.
NEVER rename the tabs that are in this file (S, ENTRY, R, U, C, A, P). The formulas are so
long that you will destroy the extreme right (end of) the formulas. Also, some formulas are too long to
copy past row 999. The extra number would destroy the formulas ending portion rendering it useless.
Some formulas are at their maximum size and cannot have anything added, not even one more letter.
How do you use PIPEtalk? You use the Setup Screen (SU) on the "S" tab to tell PIPEtalk how
to handle certain operations during takeoff. Certain items require a specification to define them so that
it can find them on tabs "C" and "A". However, you can override the specification you are running by
selecting an override specification OR by typing the SEEK CODE you want. This makes PIPEtalk
VERY powerful. Universal Items do not require a specification. You enter both types the same way.
PIPEtalk knows where to find the data and if a specification is required. After you enter an estimate
for a pipe line, you press the Macro NEW SCREEN (big red) button and it stores the takeoff below the
entry area and gives you a fresh screen. Press the Down Arrow (Left edge of upper Entry screen)
button to see the takeoff you just sent to the out storage area. Press the Up Arrow (Top) button to go
back to the top where you do the takeoffs. You can use the last takeoff or store two takeoffs and reuse
them. Reports are now created inside the estimate files.
When you finish the estimate, select the ESTIMATE CONTROL button and store your
estimate in the chosen file. Of course, you can always just copy the out information to any file you
want. Be sure you paste values and not formulas when you put the estimate in another file. Selecting
formulas would link the new spreadsheet to PIPEtalk. This program is NOT linked from another file
and that would slow down calculations or stall the program.
Now read on to learn about this new method of estimating pipe. The following chapters
provide a guide to use PIPEtalk. They provide drawings, helpful information and a list of codes to use.
Use the help provided in the program, but read the information in the manual.
Disclaimer and Terms

DISCLAIMER
PIPEtalk is a VERY strong program that is simple to use. However, it is also a very complex
spreadsheet that pushes the limit of what a spreadsheet can do. Because it is so complex, the author
hereby disclaims any and all liability that may arise from the use of PIPEtalk. Estimating is not an
exact science, but one of good and bad judgments made by the estimator. Your management should
review all estimates before submitting them. They are the final responsible person for every estimate
regardless of the method to create the estimate. PIPEtalk cannot be held responsible for a bad
estimate. Possible improper use or failure to use the large number of possible multipliers that
estimator must consider would cause you to develop a poor estimate. You must adjust the units
supplied by your companys experience factors. Only you know those factors/multipliers. PIPEtalk
takes no responsibility for your decision to use the averaged included pre-loaded unit man-hours or
suggested multipliers.
TERMS OF USE
. Each copy of PIPEtalk is registered to either a company or an individual. This license
agreement is for a single user on a single business computer and laptop. In addition, you are
granted permission to load the program on the same single users personal portable laptop
computer and his home computer. This a total of four computers for one user.
REGISTRATION
Registration is no longer required. If you change your email address, please let us know at
pipetalk@yahoo.com
ADDITIONAL PURCHASES
As with all programs, you should pay for each use of the program. You may purchase
additional copies by visiting the store at http://store.yahoo.com/pipetalk or contact us for discounts.
CHAPTER ONE
The S (Setup) Tab

You should take the time to adjust the setup screen on every estimate. All estimates do
not use the same setup information. One client may provide the valves and the next one
will not. You must review the settings to get the required results. These settings must be
done BEFORE you begin the estimate. When in doubt have the program provide the
price. You can always delete the cost later. You can now recalculate the estimate from
within the PIPEtalk program file! In addition, you can copy, delete and add to any
takeoff.
PART ONE
Setting Up (SU) PIPEtalk
4) Who furnishes the materials?
1a) B&G
Sets
1b) Height Multipliers

Sets
2) Update File After Changes

1) Program Paths Defined Here
6) Multipliers on labor mhrs and materials.
7) Error check settings.
8) Multiplier on labor rates.
9) Adjust insulation equivalents.
S TAB SETUP SCREEN

NEVER insert or delete rows or columns in Tab S.
1) Beginning in version 4.0 you can change the location of the program on C drive. Define the entire
path of the PIPEtalk folder location, defining the drive then folders as shown on the setup screen. Do
not list the name of the program file, just the path (Drive & folders). Then move the entire contents
of the PIPEtalk folder, including the sub-folders to the new folder you have listed on the setup tab.
The program will now operate in the new location. Because the program is so large, it will not operate
(access) on a network drive due to speed and size. However, beginning in version 7.0, you can place
many of the data files on your network. In all users program files, you must map the various data
groups to your network drive so all users can access them. The files are not in shared mode, so
changes made by any one person is not made to the source file. The data files are loaded inside the
users program file. You will need to assign one person to control the data files and make necessary
changes and notify the users of those changes.
1a) The Bolt & Gaskets are a problem to program due to the many possibilities. To help organize the
B&G Sets, press the B&G SETS button at the top of the Setup tab. Here you can post your set as
shown below. Calculate and you will see if the set is already built in the data base. If it is not, you
will have to create it or change materials. The B&G area will tell you if the set is available for 150#,
300# or 600#. It will also indicate if there are prices. OKw/P means it is in data base with price.
These sets are used at the spec building macros. The macro at each spec will put the set you choose
into the spec for you, saving you a lot of time. To use this new feature, enter a valid spec set number
(Exa: BG.01) at the top of the spec at the BG: blank and press the button at the left side of the spec.
The macro will get the parts of the spec for the B&G and place it at the B&G specs for you. Valid
would mean that the database does have such a combination in it and can be used for your spec.
SEE THE NEXT PAGE FOR MORE OF THE B&G SET IMAGES
1b) The height adjuster mathematics is now adjustable on the setup tab. The height is shown in the
estimate for each line of takeoff. Here you enter the average height, in feet for NPS or M if ISO,
above or below ground, that you are working at. To go to the height adjustment default settings, press
the button at the top of the Setup (S) tab.
You may only use whole numbers. You may indicate negative numbers to indicate trench work.
PIPEtalk will add a percentage for underground work as well as above grade work. The current default
height multipliers are shown in the chart on the last page of this section.
USE WHOLE NUMBERS, NO FRACTIONS FOR THE HEIGHT
2) After you make changes in the setup tab at PRICE CATALOG VENDOR SETTINGS, you will
need to press this button to have the program change the other tabs in the file with the new setup
information. If you did not change the PRICE CATALOG VENDOR SETTINGS, you do not have to
press this button. (Remember-after you adjust the setups/specs, when you first calculate, it is a root
calculation and will take longer than normal) See Discussion 12 below for information about PRICE
CATALOG VENDOR SETTINGS.
If you did not change the PRICE CATALOG VENDOR SETTINGS, you do not
have to press this button. Making other changes on the Setup tab will not require
that this calculation be made. ONLY use this button if you made changes to any
of these four items above the button.
3) Not Used
4) Decide who will furnish the materials and indicate that by O (Owner) and C (Contractor) next to
these in the Setup Screen as shown;
ON THE SETUP TAB ON THE ENTRY TAB
Later, on the ENTRY tab, during the takeoff, you can change the material supply at column BV to O
(Owner) or C (Contractor) beginning at the 1st line of takeoff (Row 147). At the takeoff line, you
may over-ride the programs selection of C or O by simply typing which supplier you want for that
line of take-off. YOU have the control to over-ride the default setting on the S tab as you do the
takeoff.
5) Not Used
6) The next item on the setup screen are the multipliers. At cell F23 you can enter a multiplier for
spool erection labor. If you want to double handle the spools, double the spool time (Use 2.0). At cell
F24 enter one for hanger steel labor. This multiplier is for hanger steel only (Steel that begins with
H), it does not impact building steelit is hanger steel. The last one in column F is for all CSA
units (Begin with C-). Enter the labor multiplier for CSA in cell F25. In the next column, a multiplier
on labor man-hours for installing hangers is at cell J23. {The "H" is reserved in PIPEtalk as hanger
work. Do not start any new SEEK CODES with "H" unless you are creating an hanger item. Other
reserved letters are discussed at the SEEK codes} You can then bump all the other labor by a separate
multiplier (J24). Caution: J24 will compound all other multipliers. You are allowed to bump pipe
materials (J25) by themselves and then all other pipe fittings/gaskets/valves/etc (J26). You are also
able to adjust the labor multiplier for the takeoff at cell J27 and the Entry Screen on the ENTRY tab at
cell CC140 titled "LBR x ADJUST". Press the title (PRESS--TO VIEW PRODUCTIVITY CHART)
and you will see a list of possible percentages that should be considered for labor adjustments.
J23
F23
7) It is easy to forget about the hangers, spools and pipe testing, so you might want the program to
check for these items before shipping the takeoff to the storage area. At cell J30 at the Setup (SU) on
the "S" tab you can have PIPEtalk check to see if you entered any hangers. However, it does not check
to see if you need a hanger for each size. It only checks to see if a hanger was entered. Usually if you
remember one size you will remember to do all of them. At cell J31 you can have PIPEtalk see if you
remembered to enter the spool erection. Spool handling is needed when you are entering a takeoff that
splits the estimate into two parts-shop and field. You should add spool handling to the estimate to take
care of the time to erect a pre-fabricated pipe piece. You may want to double handle the spools, so
you might want to double the units for spools. You can do that by applying a multiplier at cell F23 on
the setup tab. At cell G30, you may have the program check for pipe testing before being sent to the
storage area. Finally, you need a wild card checker. You decide what you want the program to check
for. At cell F31, enter the SEEK code you want the program to check for. At cell G31, enter Y to
check or N not to check.
8) You may wish to add a multiplier on the labor rates to cover indirects. You can enter the direct
labor cost in the crew/labor rate area and then adjust them with a global multiplier. Perhaps this would
be used for regions of the country due to the cost of living in different areas.
9) PIPEtalks insulation equivalents have been set to the standards of the National Insulation
Association. If you must change them, do so in the setup screen. After making your change, run the
Macro to Update Tabs "C" and "A" which is the button at the Insulation title. Tab "U" will not be
updated due to the large number of types of item's for PIPEtalk to determine the value of. Each item in
the Universal Tab requires many special formulas to calculate the value and therefore human
intervention to determine the right value. When the item is built on the "U" Tab, enter the square foot
and the equivalents that you want on Tab "U". Notice that PIPEtalk increased the diameter (SF) when
the line is heat traced. Enter the multiplier (1.20=20% increase) you want here in the setup. This
increase will be done by PIPEtalk when you enter your takeoff after you have indicated it is traced.
12) Price catalog vendor settings setup.
13) Material price adders.
14) Split field from shop labor.

22) Crew names.
15) Auto count welds.
23) Labor rates.

25) Productivity Chart
17) Special setup-Boltups.
18) Special setup-Spools LF or Each.
19) Special setup-Hanger Calculation.
20) Special setup-Spool weights.
24) Shop rate.

21) Save Timer (Below These
Rates)
16) NPS or ISO
S TAB SETUP SCREEN

10) Not Used

11) Not Used
12) The next group on the setup screen is the vendor settings. You can select domestic or import at
cell N11. If you select domestic, the computer will try to get a price for domestic materials from the
data base (Tab "P"). If it can't locate one, it will get an import. If that fails, it will use the default price
established on the "U", "C" and "A" tabs at column numbers 17, 18, 19 and 20. If PIPEtalk cant find
one, it will post a -1 to let you know it could not locate a price. If the price is a $0, it is not considered
an error. Zero is a valid price. Only a negative one (-1) unit price is an error. At cell N12 you should
enter where the large bore pipe begins so that the pricing responsibility can be determined. At N13
you select which set of multipliers to use to price the list prices in the data base on tab "P". They are,
1, 2 and 3 at the top of sheet "P". More about tab "P" later. I have been asked to add the ability to
force the default price to be used instead of the other possibilities. So, if you place a Y at cell N14
on the S tab, the program will force the use of the default price. If there is no default price, you
might get a -1.
13) The following feature should be used for NPS and should not be used for ISO at this time. One of
the most difficult task for any pipe program to do is to locate an item and based on its weight adjust
the unit price. PIPEtalk is able to do this. This is especially useful for vendor Stainless Steel surtax
charges. Type the key word at N17 (One word) that PIPEtalk is to search on and how much to add by
the pound at N18. Of course you must have all the weights entered for this to work properly. Not all
items have weights at this time. Not only can PIPEtalk make an adjustment by the pound it can also
add a multiplier to the unit price based on a key word. Enter the key word at cell N19 and the
multiplier at N20. Any item that has the key word in it will be adjusted, so pick the word carefully.
Set these to something that is unusual and not a word until you need them to be used. I have set it to
XXX because there is no word that has this combination in it and thus nothing is adjusted accidentally.
14) A method to handle pipe spools is included in PIPEtalk. In the setup screen (SU) on Sheet "S" at
N23 you can determine if you want to include small bore pipe in the shop fabrication man-hours. The
small and large bore o-lets will be included with the large bore shop fabrication regardless of the
setting at N23. At N24 and N25 you can split work between the field and shop. Many ways exist to do
the split between the field and shop. The activities are coded as field (F) only, shop(S) only and some
are coded to allow both (B). The split is pre-determined by these codes (F,S,B) at column 28 on tabs
"U", "C" and "A". The ENTRY tab calculation will split the manpower into two stacks as defined by
the tab setup (N23, N24, N25) and the codes (F, S, B). You should discount the field estimate units to
convert them to the shop by entering a discount at cell N26 in the setup screen on tab "S". (Then F9)
Enter a shop rate at cell U34 on the setup screen (SU) to be multiplied by the shop (Col CE) man-
hours to calculate shop labor cost (Col CH) on the ENTRY tab. Turn spool weights to "N" (Cell J33)
to stop double dipping of weights if you are also taking off pipe materials.
15) In order to allow you to use different man-hour units you can turn off the auto-count feature for
welds at N29. You pre-set the weld count for fittings, valves, in-lines, etc. When you takeoff that
item, it will automatically include the welds with the total weld count for that size. However, it does
not count the secondary size as the secondary size but as the primary size weld. This is normally not
an issue. If your units are designed for you to keep up with the weld man-power and enter them
separately, you would not want PIPEtalk to count them for you. Pick "N" if you want to count them
yourself. If you are running the man-hours with the welds included put "Y". If you use an alternate
method and your units do not include the welding in the fittings or pipe, pick "N" and count the welds
AND add manpower for them.
16) Two sets of man-hour units can be used in PIPEtalk. At this time one is used for NPS and one for
ISO (Metric). The setup screen allows for you to switch between these two. At cell N30 you can pick
1 or 2. One is the current loaded set of NPS manpower units. If you change this setup item, you will
need to press the button called Build NPS or ISO to load ISO units. This calculation will take a lot
of timesee below:
Remember the units loaded contain the welds with them but PIPEtalk can be adjusted for you to enter
welds separately if you enter pipe, fittings and valve handling units and then field welds separately. It
would require that the pipe stop counting welds and that the weld quantity for fittings be stopped.
17) At cell N32 on the setup screen you can adjust the way PIPEtalk accumulates the bolt up count.
Bolt and Gaskets (Material-no labor) are counted as a bolt up quantity. If you allow a bolt up (Labor
only-no Material) to also be counted, the count would be accidentally double counted. This count is
shown on the reports inside the estimate files at P01 (bolt ups). If you do not want the labor only bolt
ups to be counted, enter a "N" (Do not add the two together to get the count on the report) Spools will
require bolt ups with man-power and counting bolt up (Labor only-no Material) turned on.
18) Pipe spools can be shown as each or/and in linear feet. The setup screen at sheet "S" at cell N33
allows you to create the spools as LF or EA. You enter each spool as LF and PIPEtalk either leaves it
as LF or changes it to ONE each depending on the setup. Either way, the man-hours remain the same.
The setup determines how the calculation shows the second quantity. PIPEtalk also adjusts the unit
man-hours to compensate for various lengths of the spool. As the spool gets longer the unit man-hours
per foot will decrease slightly. Place "EA" at N33 if you want the second quantity to be in EA and
"LF" for linear feet.
19) In order for PIPEtalk to count the linear feet of pipe correctly, it needs to know how to handle the
LF of pipe and LF of spools. Do you want the two added together or just use the LF of pipe only to
calculate the hangers and display the report? This all depends on if you are fabricating the pipe
yourself or purchasing it from someone else fabricated. If you have the PIPEtalk split the estimate into
field and shop, you would not want the LF of pipe and the LF of spools to be added together (Select P
at cell N34 at the setup on tab "S"). You would only one, not both to tell you how many LF of piping
you have. However; if you purchase the large bore pre-fabricated from others and therefore have
spool LF for large bore and pipe LF for small bore you would want both to be added together to get
the total LF of piping(Select SP at cell N34 at the setup on tab "S"). Then you have to enter all large
bore then as spools to be sure you get all the footage (Even the straight rack pipe)
20) If you want the approximate spool weights to be added to weights put a Y. You would want to
do that if you are estimating only spools and not any raw pipe. If you want ONLY the raw pipe
material weights to be used and do not add the spool weights to the raw materials put the letter N.
N would be the normal setting for pipe without spools.
21) You can be reminded to save your file by entering the number of minutes between changes. The
file must be saved one time and calculated intermittently before the reminder will work.
23a) Craft Labor rates
23b) Craft total hours
22a) Crew names.
22b) Crew total hours
22a) Crew names used by the unit man-hours provided in this program use are defined here. You
should not change these crew names unless you change the main data base, the E3P6 file and the
Primavera resource file. You might want to change the crew names to match your programs crew
names. You can do this, but you have to change many items in many files. Changing the crew names
would allow you to paste directly into your estimate spreadsheet to be calculated along with your other
data.
You can reconfigure the crews by using your own crew names before you import/paste/post the
estimate into your estimate program. CP, CW, CV, CB, CC, IL, L, O, M, I, P, EI, BH, D, CONC, RE
and B are the primary crews used in the data base. These are also used inside the Complete Estimator.
You can do a search/replace command in column 29 on tabs "U","C" and "A" and put your own crew
names. Be sure to change the crew name at the crew on the setup sheet in column "Q" to match.
There are also 21 variable crew names that you can create as you need to. You should not change the
blue colored crew names unless you change them on the other tabs, inside the EWO form and the
Complete Estimator file.
22b) The total Crew hours are shown above the Crew name. The hours are extracted to the Extra
Work Order Document from these cells, so do not modify them.
23a) Labor rates are entered here. Wage rates are added as a feature to give you an idea of the labor
value. PIPEtalk was not designed to be THE estimate file, but to provide data that is applied /
supplied to the estimate file. Therefore, you will not find any reference to indirects or construction
rental equipment requirements. The new cost report has a place for you to create some indirects if you
are in a hurry and do not have time to build your estimate in your normal estimate form. You would
normally take the man-hours and material cost that are created and enter them into your estimate
program. (See item 11 of this chapter to see how you can add a single multiplier to allow for
indirects.) For budget cost estimates, you should always verify the material cost unless time will not
allow. PIPEtalk is an excellent way to build budgets or calculate extra work orders quickly. Use the
supplied Complete Estimator to build the estimate or your own estimate form. The Complete
Estimator spreadsheet will allow you to paste the PIPEtalk estimate files value into it, extract the data
and do an entire estimate. Other trades and indirects can also be estimated in that file. (See Chapter
12 for instructions for the PIPEtalk Complete Estimator)
24) Enter the rate you want to use for the labor shop rate. Usually it is from $65 to $75. (12/28/2008)
25) Press this button to view a productivity chart and an important message about multipliers.
Failure to make these adjustments would cause you to loose a lot of money on a project. The final
decision to use these adjustments or one that is of your choosing is purely YOUR decision. This is
the information shown on the productivity panel:
PIPEtalk takes no responsibility for your decision to use our suggested numbers which are
multipliers or the pre-loaded unit man-hours. Estimating requires a sense of situations and
opportunities, much like a gambler. I can give you the deck of cards but cannot play the hand.
PART TWO
File Control For Specifications and Materials

SPECIFICATIONS
33) GoTo Spec Files

(Opens the TITLES File) 34) Save This Specification
35) Open Current Specification File
33) This button will take you to the TITLES file which controls all the specification and material files.
34) If you modify the specification you are working with (You usually do), you should send a copy of
the modified spec to the storage file by pressing the STORE specification buttons. You can see which
one you are running at the top of the specs.
CAUTION: If you do not SAVE your newest modified specifications to the storage file, the next
time you get the specification, you will get the old specs because you failed to save the newest
changes. You must SAVE a copy of the modified specification for it to be available when you
are ready to retrieve it from the separate storage file. The program will review the information
and might indicate that the information has changed and you should save the filesee image.
It might be good to create a backup of the spec storage files, just in case you accidentally destroy a set
of specs. To do that, simply copy all the spec files and place them into another folder.
35) You may GOTO the specification storage by pressing the OPEN button at the appropriate
specification and modify it. No lookups to build the specs are available in the separate SP files,
which means you could accidentally create a spec component that does not exist. It is better to build
the specifications inside of the main program where you can use validation, then save it.
36f) Delete the Spec

36a) Update Titles File
36g) Save & Close TITLES

36b) Open & Update Titles
36h) Rename The Spec File

36c) Load The Spec Into Program
36j) Current Spec 36i) Copy The Spec File

36d) Create The Spec File File
36k) Sort The Spec File List

36e) Open The Spec Template
File
SPEC FILE CONTROL SCREEN
(TITLES FILE -- TAB SPEC)
NEVER insert or delete rows or columns in this file.
36a) This macro button updates just the titles in the highlighted spec file.
36b) Updates the titles and leaves the highlighted spec file open.
36c) Press this macro to load the highlighted spec file. The program will provide a message that tells
you to save the current spec before loading another.
36d) You can have 65,000 spec files. You use this spec to create a spec file form the spec template.
36e) This button opens the spec template file.
36f) This button deletes the highlighted spec file.
36g) When you have completed using the TITLES file, press this button to save and close it.
36h) Select the spec file you want to rename at ENTER OLD file NAME, right of the rename button.
Then enter a new file name under ENTER NEW FILE NAME. Press the rename button. The
program will look to see if you are using the OLD spec file inside the program and if the NEW
spec file name is being used in the TITLES file.
36i) Copy works the same as rename. Select the spec file you want to copy at ENTER OLD file
NAME, right of the copy button. Then enter a new file name under ENTER NEW FILE NAME.
Press the copy button. The program will look to see if the NEW spec file name is being used.
(36j) This cell indicates which spec file is currently loaded in the program file.
(36k) You can sort the spec tab information by using the S buttons or use the Excel filter buttons.
(Material files are the only files that should NEVER be sorted.)
MATERIALS
37a) Jump to C or A 37e) Save & Close TITLES
37b) Open The Material File 37f) Rename The Material File 37i) Material Program
Reference Location
File
37c) Load The Material Into Program 37g) Copy The Material File
37d) Open The Material Template 37h) Create The Material File
File
MATERIAL FILE CONTROL SCREEN

(TITLES FILE -- MATL TAB)
DO NOT SORT, ADD OR DELETE INSIDE THE MTL TAB
37a) The TITLES MATL tab contains 40 files. 20 files are used on C tab and 20 files are used on A
tab. These buttons allow you to jump quickly to either group.
37b) Highlight the file you want to open and press this button. Opening a file does not load it into the
program.
37c) Use this button to load the highlighted file into the program file. The macro will look inside the
program file and update/post the status list inside the TITLES MATL tab before proceeding.
37d) Use this button to open the materials template file. This file is used to build a material file for the
first time.
37e) When you have completed using the TITLES file, press this button to save and close it.
37f) Select the material file you want to rename at ENTER OLD file NAME, right of the rename
button. Then enter a new file name under ENTER NEW FILE NAME. Press the rename button. The
program will look to see if you are using the OLD spec file inside the program and if the NEW
spec file name is being used in the TITLES file.
37g) Copy works the same as rename, except you MUST select a material reference location inside the
program. They are listed as
MTL01A thru MTL20A as is
shown in column 8 below:
Select the spec file you want to
copy at ENTER OLD file
NAME, right of the copy
button. Then enter a new file
name under ENTER NEW
FILE NAME. Enter a
reference locationCs for C
tab and As for A tab. Press
the copy button. The program
will look to see if the NEW material file name is being used. If not, it will build a copy of the file
you selected for the location inside the program file you chose. I highly suggest you keep backup
copies in another folder in case you make an error and step on a file you really wanted to keep.
37h) You can create a file for any empty location. Empty locations are indicated by Enter a file name
and create it. You use the same steps to create as you do copy, except there is no OLD file name.
Enter a new file name and the reference location. Press the Create button.
37i) If you look at the C and A tabs inside the program, you will find 20 groups in each. You can see
the groups by the (Left to right) color bands, with the last (bottom) being black. Never delete any of
the bands. Each group can be controlled inside the TITLES filecreated, renamed, loaded and
unloaded. You cannot delete any material files you create.
PART THREE
Specification Listing
40a) Press to Go To B&G Set 40b) Press to Build ISO Spec Size
List
40) Press to Go To (3)
41a/b) Calculate Buttons 43) SP File Name Running 44) View

Wall Chart
45) Group Your Material Types

53) View
Alloy Adds
46) Client Group
50) Service Possibilities For This Spec

47) Go To Spec Button
51) Pipe Schedule LB/SB

48) Spec Name On Spec Header
49) Spec Description 52) Basic Pipe Spec Information
42) See More of the Specs
SPECIFICATION LISTING SCREEN

40) At the top of the specifications is three buttons that go to the Estimate list, Material files and Parts
list.
40a) Press to go to the bolt and gasket set list.
40b) After you modify any of the specs, you may have changed to the NPS sizes. In your haste, you
may forget to change the ISO (metric) size to match the NPS one. Press this button to have the
program look at the NPS value and post a formula to create the ISO size value.
41a) Press this button to calculate this tab only.
41b) Press this button to calculate this entire worksheet.
42) This button will roll the screen down so you can see the bottom of the spec list.
43) You will be able to see which Specification Group you have running by looking here.
44) There are so many sizes of pipe with many schedules and walls. I can be a real task to decide
which schedule is which wall thickness. Press the View Wall button to see the wall thickness chart.
This is handy to determine which specification you want to use.
45) You can organize your specs if you wish too. At column "E" you can enter CS, 304, 316 FRP,
PVC, MI, P11, P22, P91, SDR or any alloy you want. Keep it short and consistent. Dont call it 304
and 304L. This allows you to locate the specifications that are for that type of material at a glance.
46) In column "F" put a short name for the client. This allows you to find that clients specification.
Be consistent to keep the information organized into a few groups.
47) Press the blue GOTO SP) buttons on the left side, to go to the specifications you
want to look at or change. You must go to the specification to change it.
48) At the top of the specifications is a summary of the specifications. This allows you to review the
60 pipe specifications at a glance. These columns are formulas-do not enter data here. The first
column contains the specification name. This is the name you will enter in the Enter Screen when you
do the estimate. You enter specification names after you go to it by using the blue go to button. Do
not enter the specification name at this screen.
49) The next column is the description of the specification. This is provided to give you a quick
glance of the specification. Sometimes this is all you need to see to remember which specification you
wanted. You enter the specification description/name after you go to it by using the blue go to button.
Do not enter the specification description at this screen.
50) Then there is a list of possible service uses for this specification. These would be entered when
you define the specification. You enter specification services after you go to it by using the blue go to
button. Do not enter the specification services at this screen (It is a calculation here). If you change
the column widths, be sure to return the column to the original width. You could use Excels undo
after you see what you wanted to know.
51) The final specification report column shows more information about the small bore and large bore
piping connections , pipe, ASTM, pressures and flanges. The font is small to allow at a glance as
much information as can be shown in the limited space. You enter specification information about
small and large bore after you go to it by using the blue go to button. Do not enter this specification
information at this screen.
52) The final specification report column shows more basic information about the spec. The font is
also small to allow as much information as can be shown in the limited space. This information is
generated by a formula. Do not enter any information here.
53) Press this button to view alloy adds. This information is also available from the ENTRY tab.
PART FOUR
Specification Parts Validation List
52) Parts List Storage
53) Parts Validation Groupings
SPECIFICATION PARTS VALIDATION SCREEN

NEVER insert or delete rows or columns in the Parts List, always use
copy and paste to make room to add an item. Then save the list.
52) Because you can share files, it is possible that another user has added spec parts to his file and
which you do not have. These three buttons allow you to save your current set of spec parts and
retrieve that set. Plus, you can use a parts list that has been sent to you by another user. The second
set, which was sent to you by another, has a different file name that your original spec parts list file.
53) Below the Specification Listing is the Specification Parts Validation List. It is used to create the
specifications and act as a validation list. While building your specification this validation makes sure
that you have used only an item from the approved list. This provides consistency that is required for
all data bases. Each specification is developed by choosing the correct parts for each pipe fitting. You
can add to this list. It is up to you to determine if the added item is a valid itemin other words, from
the tabs C and A, no verification will be used to check if you have used a valid item. Validations
can only be done on the tab that contains the validation list. (Note: The U tab is not spec driven and
requires no spec part validation.) Always pick from this list to build your specifications and refer to it
when you add estimate unit items on the A and C tabs. The specification also acts as conversion
filter. The item in the specification must match the item in the A or C tabs. This list helps assure
that you always pick from the same list. I guarantees that you call it the same thing each time you
name it. Each specification is developed by choosing the correct parts from this list for each pipe
fitting. Below this screen are the actual specifications.
This screen has the following Parts Validation Groupings; Universal, Description, Defaults,
SEEK CODES, Size Groups, From This Size, To This Size, Material, Schedule/Schedule & Coating,
Connection, Mfg/Gasket, ASTM, Grade/Bolts, Pressure, Lining and Hanger Spacing. Because of their
broad-brush nature, you will need to add to the gaskets and bolting as required. There are many
products used for gaskets. You will also have to add lining information when you need it.
The parts list begins on row 653 and ends on row 854. Never add or delete rows to the setup
tab. This give you 200 rows to describe the possibilities. The ASTM column is currently at row 761.
You should have ample space to add any items needed.
PART FIVE
The Specification (SP)
See Discussion 1a
54a) GoTo Top of S Tab and Spec List Buttons
54b) These are duplication buttons
57) Note That Shows Up On Entry Screen
58) Groups 1>4 Size Breaks
55) Clients Name 56) Specification Services
63) Specification-Material
54c) Specification 64) Specification-Schedule

Name
67) Specification-ASTM
65) Specification-Connection
68) Specification-Grade
66) Specification-Method Of Mfg
69) Specification-Pressure
59) Description of Spec Item Type 70) Now used for ISO Pipe Size
60) Default Seek Code to Be Typed In The Entry Screen Takeoff
71) Hanger Pipe Size

61) Seek Code to Be Used By The Program At Default Entry
62) Program Generated Group Size Breaks For 72) Hanger Spacing
Item
THE SPECIFICATION SCREEN
A popup helps you locate items inside each spec and move up one and down
one spec group. Use the GOTO button and the press shift+ to open the Search
spec panel. Select the item to find in the spec and press the orange bar or press
SELECT THEN PRESS TO FIND. You can press the curved arrow to jump to
the spec top . You can also jump up or down one complete spec.
You may copy one complete spec to another by simply pressing buttons. You
can modify them by doing the following: In general you enter data at the red on
cream font areas. The black on light gray are titles or formulas. Most formulas
are using absolutes in them and are ONLY valid for this specification at that row
and column. NEVER copy the black on light gray formulas to another row
or column or to another specification and NEVER add any rows inside the
specs. Finally, because there is an automatic spec writer, do not change the
order of the spec items!!!!! Now that I have told you what not to do, what can
you do to copy a specification to make repetitive work easier? The red on
cream are designed to be copied from one specification to another and from one
item to another within a specification. Feel free to copy the red and cream on
top of a dark gray cell-it is ok to do that. You may also copy a dark gray empty
cell on top of a red on cream cell. There are no formulas in either. You may
also copy the VALUES of the red on cream data and the dark gray unused cells
from one specification to the other. You must keep the columns the exact same,
but not necessarily the row the same. At this time-all specifications have the
same number of rows and items in them. This makes it easy to copy a working
specification to a non-working specification. (The specification storage files know the number of
rows. NEVER add or delete a row on the setup tab.) For example, this coping ability helps when
you want to copy a specification for gaskets and bolts from one pressure to another and from one
specification to another one. Just highlight the information and paste it straight into the next item
group in that specification or into another specification. Be sure to save your revisions to the storage
file you are using for your specification. The specification MUST match the specification data for the
part in the A or C data bases in order for the program to find it when you estimate. If even one
part is different, it will not be able to find it. Do not change the cell formats from their settings
anywhere. As you enter the SEEK CODE on the ENTRY tab the specification created here
determines what item from the "C" and "A" tabs that is required to match it. Everything is based on
the information within the specification you use. When a part you want is definitely in the data base
and the program cannot find it--double check the specifications. The specifications do not match
100% of the time when the program cant find the item. The database must match the specification for
it to work with no differences in the two.
54a) The vertical turquoise bar will take you to the top of the setup tab. The vertical tan bar will take
you to the top of the specification list. Both bars run all the way down the left side of the
specifications.
54b) These two buttons are new to version 4.1. [The B&G button has also been addedsee
discussion 1a.] There purpose is to duplicate the fitting and pipe spec information to many items to
remove repeated entries. First, enter the typical type of fitting information for this specification at the
22 elbow. Then press the button adjacent to that fitting. The macro will copy the spec information for
the 22 elbow to many fittings and return to the 45 degree bend, three radius entry location. After the
fitting macro runs, setup the type of pipe for the 45 degree, three bend fitting (This is a pipe related
item) and press the button adjacent to it. The macro will copy the information for that pipe item
(45B3) to other pipe related items and stop at the first item you need to manually begin adjusting.
These macros do not setup all the flanges. However, you should determine what your default type
flanges will be. Simply enter a type of flange to the right of the F, F1, F3, F6, F15 and F25. Example:
Left is F, to the right is FWN1. On the ENTRY screen, when you use an F for a SEEK code, the
program will know that means FWN1 (Weld neck 150#). Do not enter any details to the right for the
default flanges. The program will see the type of flange and write the spec details for you.
54c) The specification name is entered here. You are free to name it your clients specifications name.
It will populate the specification when you calculate. Do not calculate until you make all the changes
you want. The calculations at the level of the program is very slow. This calculation to update the
specification is at the lowest of the itineration of the math and is the root of the program. Excel will
have to go back to its lowest level to do this calculation because the mathematics builds on the setups
and specifications calculations.
55) Enter the clients name here.
56) Enter the possible service usage of this specification here. It will show up on the specification
summary report list.
57) You may enter a note that will show up on the takeoff screen at the ENTRY tab here. It might
remind you that 100% x-ray is required and provide you an opportunity to adjust the multipliers. If
you enter 100% as the very first item in the note, on the ENTRY tab, the 100% X-ray choice will light
up to help remind you that you should enter Y to add a percent to the labor units.
58) PIPEtalk breaks the piping specification into four size groups. (Columns M>R). This generally
takes care of 95% of all pipe specifications. PIPEtalk does not do 1/8 size pipe/tubing. To have
added more spec size breaks, would have made the program too large to run. Group 1 is the size
beginning with 0 to the first small bore break, then the next size break, etc. When you calculate, it
will populate the entire specification with the information. You must enter the NPS and the ISO size
ranges. The NPS is in columns O & P. The metric (ISO) sizes are in column Q & R. Use the pipe
sizes shown at the hangers to determine the value of the sizes to use for the ISOs (Col V). In lieu of
having to enter the ISO sizes, use the button at the top of the spec list to build the ISO sizes.
59) The description of the specification item is provided so you can tell what the SEEK CODE is.
You should not have to modify this description except when you add an item. At the bottom of each
specification there are a few spares that can be used to add fittings to the specification. When you add
one, modify the spare description.
60) Certain pipe fitting SEEK CODES are considered to be defaults. An example of a default item
would be a flange. The default SEEK CODE is "F" and would be shown in column "F". However, it
could be defined as FWN1 in column "G". You could then define a weld neck flange in the
specifications columns to be a weld neck flange per each size break. When you enter "F" in the
estimate, PIPEtalk looks for the specification and finds that "F" as defined for "FWN1". PIPEtalk gets
the information for the correct flange from the specifications, "C" and "A" tabs and places the
information on the ENTRY tab at the row where the "F" was entered at the takeoff line. The
specifications acts as a door to get to the correct part. Just like a filter that you have control over.
Other programs group the fittings into groups. I prefer to list every item to be defined. You always
get what you expect that way. Check the SEEK CODE list to see which SEEK CODES are default
items.
61) As explained at No 60 above. Enter the SEEK CODE you want the program to find when you
enter the default SEEK CODE.
62) When you entered the size breaks and calculated to populate the size break, this is where they
show up in the specification.
63) You enter the specification materials that you select from the drop down in this cell. ALL
selections will have an entry in this column. It is a required field.
64) Enter the pipe or fitting schedule here. Not all pipe sizes are an exact schedule. Odd-ball (Non-
standard) wall thickness do not show in PIPEtalk. Only standard sizes are in the program. Fittings
with multiple schedules (One end schedule 40 and the other schedule 80) cannot be estimated as
multiple schedules except with a note field. You should select the schedule that provides the higher
man-hours of the two possible choices.
65) Enter the type of connection of the fitting or pipe.
66) Enter the type of manufacturing of the pipe.
67) Now enter the ASTM number if required. Look at the entries already in the specification. If the
item used the ASTM number, you will probably need it again.
68) Enter the grade of the material for the fittings and piping. The grade is an important element of
the specifications.
69) Enter the pressure rating of the flange or gasket set.
70) This column is now used for the ISO pipe size, related to hanger spacing. If you adjust the hanger
spacing for ISO, you will need to change the NPS.
71) Each specification also defines the hanger spacing for each size of pipe that uses that specification.
You can define the hanger spacing at the top of each specification at the right side. The pipe sizes are
already entered. Do not change the sizes. If you have a size that is not shown, do not add it. This
field should not be edited. (If you adjust the hanger spacing for NPS, you will need to change the ISO
hanger spacing.)
72) You may change the spacing of the hangers to match the clients requires. Remember that stainless
steel and carbon steel with gases and fluids have different center spacing for hangers. Pay attention to
the materials that will flow through the pipe. PIPEtalk will keep track of the quantities of the pipe
hangers that are required as you do a takeoff. The spacing you indicate is used to track the number of
hangers you may need. PIPEtalk will put the quantity it counted when you enter the hanger SEEK
CODE during entry.
REMEMBER TO SAVE THE CHANGES YOU MADE TO THE SPECIFICATIONS BY
SENDING IT TO THE SPECIFICATION STORAGE FILE. PIPEtalk CANNOT RETRIEVE

THE CHANGES IN THE SEPARATE SPEC STORAGE FILES UNLESS THE USER SAVES
THE SPEC FILE.
WARNING: MACROS CANNOT BE UNDONE BY EXCEL.
You should backup all files into a PIPEtalk/Backup Files folder in case you
damage your files. You MUST enter the key BEFORE making a backup!!!!
CHAPTER TWO
The ENTRY tab
The ENTRY tab is where you spend most of your time doing the estimate. After the setups are
taken care of, you will get down to business of entering one pipe line after another. The hours
are usually long. You need the ease of PIPEtalk to reduce the stress of the fast paced entries. I
have used a team approach before. One person calls out the data and another enters it.
PART SIX
Takeoff Entry Screen

1) Help
16) Go To Takeoff Bottom 6) Current Specification Running
15) Go To Top 5) New ButtonsAdd, Copy, Delete & Recalculate
19) Go To Memories 3a&b) Calculate to Update This Tab

2) Seek Code Help
17) Paste From Storage
4a&b) Calculate & Post
10) Crew Info
12) Change To Value and Undo

14) New Screen
7) Erase Current Screen
11) Pipe
18) Sticky, Calculate Tab, Paste Value Schedule/Thickness
8) Clear Storage Area
and Other Information
Charts
9) Calc Quick View
Row
ENTRY SCREEN
NEVER insert or delete rows or columns in Tab ENTRY.
The Entry Screen appears at first glance to be too busy--it is a very busy screen. The recent
added panels, with some of the macros grouped, reduce the amount of buttons on this screen. To
further reduce the information, we added buttons to hide the Total File, Current Takeoff and Prior
Takeoff information. Display what you need, when you need it. This is what it looks like when you
hide Current Takeoff and Prior Takeoff information:
This screen provides information about your current takeoff and the total takeoff contained in
the file. Our discussion will start at the bottom, where the tire meets the road. We enter the actual
takeoff here. You always enter on the red on cream cells. The area to the right of the red on cream is
the calculated area. You can however, step on the formulas for the unit man-hours and materials---the
formulas will rebuild when you press the big red button for a fresh screen. To the left is the
specification that is driving that line of takeoff (STD WT). It can also be typed over with any valid
(File must be loaded) specification name. In other words, you can change each row of takeoff to a
different specification number if desired. If you get #VALUE, the program cannot find the item you
requested. You may have entered the SEEK code indirectly or the item is not in the database.
Above the takeoff area is the information about the current pipe line you are taking off . Then
you have a series of Macro buttons. Above the Macro button row is the specification, estimate and
note information. Continuing up the screen, you have the area where you enter your current pipe line
takeoff information (Code, line number, drawings). Then you can view the information about the
last pipe line takeoff you did. Above that is the quick analyst of the current takeoff and then further up
is the whole files summary information which includes the takeoff storage area not shown in this
picture. Finally at the very top area is information about the setups, specification file name and some
help buttons. This provides you a general layout of the current and upper Entry Screen.
Now lets discuss the screen in detail, starting at the top left corner. There will be five of the
Takeoff Screen shots discussed in this book, so continue to the next after we have discussed the first
one.
Do not sort or modify the takeoff in PIPEtalk while in the entry screen tab. Do all your sorting
in a separate sheet using the values from the takeoff. Never copy the formulas to another tab or file
links would be created. Of course you can do this yourself with the sorted data in another file you
create. Excel is an excellent program to handle special sorts that you need -- just do the sorting
outside of PIPEtalk. Now lets discuss the first item of the Entry Screen, the HELP button which is
now located on the upper left corner.
A Fit-View Button is located below the HELP button and will fit the screen to your computer. If you
try to adjust the screen to another setting, the program will occasionally check and change it back to
the design setting. Therefore, you should press the button if needed, but do not try to change the
screen to something different. The program will reset the screen when it opens.
There is now an indicator that tells you if you are running National Pipe (NPS) or Metric (ISO). On
the right of the center title, the project name appears. A new feature is a warning that you should save
the file. The setup screen has the timer that you can set to the minutes you desire. When the time has
expired, the cells will change color to dark pink. In addition, the screen indicated how much time has
expired. If you use the Save button, the timer will clear and start over. If you use MS file save button,
the formula will clear the time after the first calculation.
1) There is a HELP button that will take you to the HELP for this screen. Pressing this button will
activate a Macro and show you the help panel.
2) Press this button to see a list of SEEK CODES by groups. The groups are fittings, hangers, valves,
instruments, connections, specials concrete and earthwork. Select the tab that is the subject you are
looking for. You will learn the SEEK CODES in a short time. It is handy to have a list of the SEEK
CODES when you are doing the estimate. See Chapter 9 for structures of the SEEK CODES. You
also have a worksheet called PIPEtalk SEEK CODES that can be printed out.
3a&b) Calc Tab--Press this to re-calculate only the Entry tab.

Calc Tab &PostPress this to re-calculate only the Entry tab and to post the hanger quantity,
insulation quantity, paint quantity and hydro testing to the current takeoff items you have
entered. If the formula has not been removed at the quantity, this will get the information and
post it to the quantity of these items. Calculating the Entry tab and posting takes longer than
just re-calculation. The program has to break a circular reference to accomplish this for you.
4a&b) Calc File--Press to re-calculate the entire file. The re-calculate of the whole file is longer than
calculating just the tab.
Calc File & PostPress to re-calculate the entire file and to post the hanger quantity,
insulation quantity, paint quantity and hydro testing to the current takeoff items you have
entered. If the formula has not been removed at the quantity, this will get the information and
post it to the quantity of these items. Calculating the entire file and posting takes longer than
just re-calculation of the Entry tab. The program has to break a circular reference to
accomplish this for you.
5) Buttons on the ENTRY tabadd, copy, delete and recalculate:
You may also access some of these new functions at the estimate takeoff storage area:
ADD--There are times when you realize that you forgot to include an important piece of information
when you processed a takeoff. Now, using the new add button, you can have the program add the item
for you. Do the estimate for the items you want to add, do not bother with describing the item in the
header, or entering the drawing information. The original information will be re-used. When you
have done the items that you need to have added, press the ADD button and provide the takeoff
number that you want the item to be added to. Then press the macro button on the ADD panel.
CPY(&Replace)--Copy or replace is another new feature that can help you re-use a takeoff that is in
the storage area or replace one with a current takeoff. To use the copy feature, press the copy button
(CPY) and the Copy/Replace panel (Image follows) will be shown. Remember, any current estimate
you are doing will be replaced by the copy command. The copy command is best used first, then you
can add to it or modify as required. This is similar to using memory 1 or 2, except the formulas on the
left are gone, leaving only values.
The Replace command, takes the current estimate and replaces the one you indicate to replace. You
can press the delete button o the Copy/Replace panel to open the delete panel.
DEL--The delete panel has two actions. It can delete an entire takeoff or just one row. To delete an
entire takeoff, enter the takeoff number to delete and press the DELETE Takeoff button. To delete a
row, enter the spreadsheet row number and press the button. At this time, only one row at a time can
be deleted. If you do not wish to enter the row to delete, place your cursor on the row in the storage
area that you want deleted and the program will select the row number for you, then delete it.
6) This area of the Entry Screen indicates the description of the specification file group which is
currently been chosen by you and is running to find the estimate labor and material.
7) This button will only erase the current screens takeoff. If for some reason you have decided that the
takeoff is not needed, just press this button to remove it. It does NOT remove any take-off in the
estimate take-off storage area. Use this to finish an EWO and begin another. EWOs are created from
the active takeoff, which this will erase/refresh for you.
8) If you want to work on another estimate, close and save the estimate you are running by using the
Estimate button. The estimate file control button will store the estimate in the estimate file and erase
the storage area. You can use this button to erase the estimate storage area while you are learning how
to use the program. The macro will give a warning before it erases.just in case you pressed the
wrong button. The current take-off screen will not be modified or erased.
9) Place your cursor on the takeoff item you want to calculate and press to calculate just that row of
information to view the take-off item. Other rows are not calculated. This does update the upper part
of the take-off screen.
10) As you are doing the estimate, you certainly would like to monitor the total hours. You also
would like to see how many hours per craft type. Press the button on the ENTRY tab to see the
breakdown:
11) There are so many sizes of pipe with many schedules and walls. I can be a real task to decide
which schedule is which wall thickness. The Reference button is handy to determine which
specification you want to use.
There are more items to consider than just pipe walls. One of the items is JIS-ASTM specifications.
These are located as two buttons on the REFERENCE panel---page one and two.
Another piece of information you should have handy is the ASTM charts for different pipe materials.
These are available by pressing the ASTM button. The button contains three tabs to help you with
CS/Alloy, SS and Alum/Nickel. It is located next the JIS-ASTM buttons.
When information is limited, you can get the engineer to provide you a list of pipe lines broken down
into difficulties or better known as conditions. When given this information a reasonable budget
estimate can be achieved. Press the condition book button on the references button (REF) to view the
conditions. The templates have the conditions included within template file four (4) at number 98.
The conditions can be printed from the image contained here or from a file located in the program
folder.
The Pipe Wall Information is necessary for accurate decisions about manpower and material
purchases. Stress relief is normally required for pipe greater than .50 wall -- so dont forget that entry.
(SEEK CODE for stress is = SR)
In reference to the above chart and some assembly charts, from an employee of NASA:
I am currently writing a Cost Estimating Desk Reference.
that I am giving to NASA. I would like to request the use of a limited
amount of data extracted from Pipetalk, for example your fittings and
valves per 100' chart, and your Commercial Pipe Sizes and Wall Thickness
chart. This document will not be sold, and I will not receive any
remuneration from it, but it is desperately needed. You and Pipetalk
will be listed as the source of the information. Any other data like
this that you could contribute would also be welcomed.
Of course, I released the needed data to him. I can understand that the data maybe of some use. I
have also added another for your use. I have placed an sketch that might help you estimate steam
tracing components. This will be replaced with another more detailed drawing and information in the
future.
12) The Convert Formula to Text button will convert a formula in the takeoff area to a value. To use it,
place the cursor on the cell to convert and press the button with the mouse. This is handy to convert
the description formula to a value so it can be modified or simply viewed. Modifying the items
description will not change anything else. The program will still find the prices and manpower based
on sizes and SEEK CODES even if you change the description. Press the Undo Convert button to
return the value back to the original formula. The Undo Convert will only change the last converted
formula. However, you can simply paste a formula over the text to return it to the original formula.
Formulas are in columns the one below is the same as the one aboveso you can copy to fix a
problem. The formula to a columns left and right is NOT the same formula. Each column has a
different formula, so copy them from the same column.
However, there is another description being created that is used for material purchasing
printout. The material purchase description does not contain any modification or note you add to the
descriptions. This is done to provide a minimum of groups. If you create a new item every time a
note was added, there would be too many. One exception is the MISCF (miscellaneous field item).
The material purchase description is modified when it sees that SEEK CODE. You can also force the
note field into the material purchasing column by placing an asterisk * in front of the note. It will then
be included in the purchasing description. You can use the Assistant to enter notes. Select the
assistant and the Special tab.
13) Not used

14) After you have completed a pipe line takeoff and are ready for the next takeoff, press the New
Screen & Store Takeoff button. This button sends he information you took off to the storage area and
gives you a fresh screen and formulas in which to estimate with. It also stores the takeoff in the
current takeoff memory area so it can be used again later. Then enter the next pipe line, reentering the
line number, drawings, from, to, insulation, etc....or if the current settings are correct don't change
them. However, if you have turned on the error checks for hangers, spools and test on the setup
screen, you might get a message that they are missing when you run the New Screen & Store
Takeoff button. Remember, if you don't want these checks to be done by PIPEtalk; turn them off on
the setup screen. In the newest version, you can now have the program look for a SEEK Code that
you define. In the excerpt below, the program is looking for S-GBOLTP. If it does not see it when
you ask for a new screen, you will get a message.
15) The red up arrow button provides a quick way to jump to the top and reset the screen of the takeoff
screen. If you ever accidentally clear the window split, just press the up arrow to setup the top of the
takeoff screen. If you lose the split on the ENTRY tab, you can press control-home to go to cell A1.
There is a micro at cell A! on the ENTRY tab that will re-set the ENTRY tab screen.
16) The red down arrow Macro button on the Takeoff Screen will take you to where the takeoffs are
stored. The left turn arrow takes you to the last takeoff left edge. There are Macro buttons in the
takeoff area (See Below) that will return your screen to the takeoff format when you wish to return.
The big one takes you back to the top of the ENTRY tab. The large one to the right, takes you to the
left edge of the takeoff storage area.
17) You can now paste a block of information from storage. If you attempt to do a normal copy and
then use the macro to go back to the top of the ENTRY tab, the macro will clear your copy. To solve
this problem, use the COPY TO CURRENT ESTIMATE button above the estimate takeoff storage
area. This provides a fast way to select an old estimate to be reused.
Highlight the area to copy, then press the button. The screen will switch back to the top. There, you
can place your cursor where you want the information pasted and then push the button there called
Paste Storage Copy. This macro will copy the data you selected in the storage area to the place you
have selected. Select the upper top left corner position before pressing the Paste Storage Memory
Copy button.
18) Sticky notes are used in the real world all the time. An electronic version of them can provide a
quick place to put the things you use often, but simply cannot remember. The Sticky notes is activated
by pressing the small blue button shown below:
Or, when you are in the takeoff storage area, press the button that says STICKY:
The Sticky note panel has a blue and a pink area. The blue is for one item with an included
description area. The pink is for a series of items, without a description. When you press the blue
button the left side is pasted into the estimate at the next line. When you press a pink one, the first
item to the left is pasted into the next row, then the next one is pasted into the next row and so on. If a
cell is empty in the stick, the cell is skipped. (A blank is NOT entered into the current takeoff).
To put the information into the sticky not, just place your cursor on the item to copy and then place
your cursor at the cell on the Sticky where you want the information pasted. Then double click to load
it into the cell. If you want to delete something, just select a blank cell on the entry tab and select the
cell you want to be empty and double click the Stick panel. It will create an empty cell on the Sticky.
The instructions are located on the Sticky panel to help you understand the method when you are in a
hurry.
19) Press this Macro button to go to the memory storage [MEMS] area. Here you can see the
information stored in the memories. After deciding which memory you want, press the left arrow
button to return to the takeoff. From the Entry Screen you decide which memory to use in the
estimate. (See subject numbers 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28 and 133 ) You can always select Use Prior
from the ENTRY SCREEN without selecting the Memory button. You may also view the memory of
your computer by pressing the EXCEL Total Memory, EXCEL Free Memory and EXCEL Used
Memory buttons if you are receiving any error messages from Excel.
NEW (Does Not

Work for Excel 2007):
VIEW THE MEMORY ON
YOUR COMPUTER
HERE
26) Create Copy Buffer
20) Return to ENTRY SCREEN 24) Get / Use Memory #2

25) Goto Takeoff
Storage Area
23) Store Memory #2
21) Store Memory #1
22) Get / Use Memory #1
MEMORY SCREEN (Also see Discussion 133)

20) Will return you to the ENTRY SCREEN.
21) Select which memory you want to use and press the appropriate memory button. This button will
store the current takeoff into the MEM-1 storage location.
22) This button will get MEM-1 and replace the current takeoff screen. The button size has been
increased so that you will not accidentally press the wrong one. Store memory buttons are smaller on
purpose. Note that you can also go to the bottom where the takeoffs are stored and find a line or lines
that looks like what you want. Copy them using the new copy button (See prior discussion 17).
23) Select which memory you want to use and press the appropriate memory button. This button will
store the current takeoff into the MEM-2 storage location.
24) This button will get MEM-2 and replace the current takeoff screen. Note that you can also go to
the bottom where the takeoffs are stored and find a line or lines that looks like what you want. Copy
them using the new copy button (See prior discussion 17).
25) GoTo Takeoff Storage area.
26) Sometimes the items in memory contain pieces/parts that you want to use in the current estimate.
Pressing the memory buttons would have the program put the whole thing into the current takeoff
area. To get a smaller part. Highlight the area you want to use and press this button. It will assign a
range name to the area you want and take you back to the entry area. In the current takeoff, place your
cursor in the top left corner of where you want the information pasted. Then press the Paste
Storage/Memory Storage Copy. The macro will put a copy of the information there for you.
30) WBS Codes

30) Hide/UnHide Views
41) Hanger, Welds, Insul & Paint List/Qty
27) Use Prior Takeoff

33) Estimates
35) Assistant
29) Create EWO
31) Size Panel
ENTRY SCREEN
NEVER insert or delete rows or columns in the ENTRY tab.
27) The USE PRIOR Macro button will retrieve you last takeoff and paste the entry area (Red on
Cream) into this Takeoff Screen. A lot of takeoffs are similar and the last takeoff can be modified
slightly for the current takeoff. This button is used often when doing like spool sheets.
28) This button will take you to the Estimate Storage Area which is below the takeoff area.
29) Press Create EWO to open the EWO file See Chapter 2 Section 10 for a further discussion.
30) WBS codes are an important part of estimating. They break your estimate down into the parts that
are required for your bid documents or for your schedule. The WBS codes in PIPEtalk are divided
into two parts. One part is the default set of WBS codes and the other is the set of WBS codes you
will use for the current estimate. Below you see two columns. The left side is the default codes. The
right ones are used for the current estimate. Some companies have a set of codes they use all the time.
They would place those codes into the default--left side. To use them in the current estimate, you
would press the dark green button to transfer them to the right side. If you need to modify them for
the estimate you are doing, you would modify them on the right side. The left side of default codes
would not be bothered. To use a code in the estimate, place your cursor on the code (right
columnred font) or the codes description and press the light green button. The macro will place a
copy of the code into the upper part of the ENTRY tab. If you wish to return without using a code,
just press the dark blue bar on the right edge. The code list is also in a pull-down on the Entry tab.
Press to reset the WBS

codes (on right) that
will be used to code the
takeoff, back to the
default codes.
Press to send the selected

code to the current takeoff.
Exa: If you place your
cursor on 1000 and press
this button, it will show up in
the top of the screen.
31) The Size Panel can be used to enter you pipe size and quantities if you prefer it. Size x Size title to
display the panel.

32) Lists PanelPress these buttons to Goto one of these lists.
32e) Show Spec List
32d) Goto Spec Files
32a) Goto Code List
32b) Goto Estimate Files
32g) View The Current

Takeoffs Information
32c) WBS Default List 32f) Goto Material Files
32a) Go to the Code List for the current estimate.
32b) Open the TITLES file to view/modify the estimate files.
32c) Go to the WBS Default list.
32d) Open the TITLES file to view/modify the specification files.
32e) The Show Spec List button and Spec button provides a list of the Specifications with a
description next to the left of the specification name. This list is helpful to make a decision of the
correct specification to use and now includes the spec set information, all four sets are shown.
32f) Open the TITLES file to view/modify the material files.
32g) View the current takeoffs information. This will provide you an all in one view of the current
takeoffs information. A new added macro button will now take you to pipe information, by size, for
pipe length, hangers, welds, insulation and painting. This helps you derive stress relief information.
Any item, more than zero, will light up in yellow so you can see it easily. The quantity is based on the
takeoff settings and the specification you are using. The information will look like the one on the next
page. When you finish the review, just press one of the big blue buttons to return to the ENTRY
SCREEN. The units of measure on the following chart/list will change when NPS is changed to ISO
on the Setup tab.
33) Estimates PanelThis panel controls what happens to the estimate file you loaded.
33a) Shows the

Selected Estimate Title
33b) Open/Goto Est

File
33c) Get/Use Estimate
33d) Update the Estimate File
33e) Update Estimate File and

Empty the Takeoff Storage Area in
the Main File
33f) Reuse This Line
33a) This window shows which estimate number and title that is loaded into PIPEtalk. All actions
you select will be done to this estimate file in the current estimate group. If the one shown is not the
correct estimate, do not run any of these macro buttons. Instead, select the big blue button, shown in
the image above (PRESS To Select Another Estimate) and select the correct estimate to load from
the Titles file. If you use the wrong estimate, the program will update/destroy the wrong estimate, so
be careful to run these macros against the correct file.
33b) The GoTo estimate file macro simply opens the selected estimate file for you. You can view the
estimate or save it to another file name to be incorporate into your estimate or as a backup. Never re-
name the template files name by saving it as another name and expect the program to use it.
Always use the Titles file to copy, rename and delete files.
33c) If the estimate shown is the correct one. Press this button to get the chosen estimate. This macro
will re-load the entire estimate files information into the ENTRY tabs Storage Area below the
current takeoff. It also loads the WBS Code List for this project so you can select from that list as you
add to the estimate. Now you can add more takeoffs to the prior takeoff of this estimate. In addition,
it loads the number of the last row of takeoff you did. You can change the takeoff rows number by
pressing the Reset button as shown below:
33d) Update Estimate File transfers the data (text/value), as it is, to the estimate file shown at the
top of the panel. The estimate file does not remain open after this macro runs. The information in the
ENTRY SCREEN Storage Area (Your current estimate) REPLACES the information in the separate
estimate file. After you have done your estimate or added to the current loaded estimate, run this
button to save all the takeoff to its separate estimate file. This macro does not unload the estimate
inside PIPEtalk, it just puts the original and added information into the separate estimate file. This
macro also places the current WBS Code List inside the Estimate File. When the estimate is re-loaded
in the future, the codes are used to rebuilt the codes inside the program file.
33e) By pressing this button, you copy the entire ENTRY SCREEN Storage Area to the selected
estimate file AND removes the information in the PIPEtalk storage area. This allows you to then
select another project to work on or finalizes the one you were working on. If you have been working
on an estimate but need to work on another, run the Replace/Remove button to save the estimate to
the chosen estimate file and removing the information. Be sure that the estimate that is shown in the
list is the one you want to store the information into. After removing the estimate, press the blue
button and select the estimate you want to work on. When loading the next estimate file, the program
will ask you if you want to load the files contents or just post the files name. If you just posted the
next estimates file name you will need to run the Get/Use Est macro button to load the estimates
data. If the estimate is new, you do not need to load any estimate information from the estimates file.
If you have data still in the storage area (you forgot to unload the estimate), the macro will see it and
warn you that there is an estimate still loaded. When you off load an estimate, as the prior macro did,
this macro places the WBS Code List inside the Estimate File. When the estimate is re-loaded back,
the codes are reused to build the codes inside the program file.
33f) If you open the estimate file you would find the following on the estimate tab:
Select the line you want to re-use

in the current estimate. The
macro will post the information on
the ENTRY worksheet.
ESTIMATE TAB'S MACRO BUTTONS
There are seven macros on the estimate tab (See Chapter 4 for discussion about the Estimate File).
These macros will calculate, interface with the scheduling module, change windows, clear the
estimate, save, close and post data from and to the file.
CALCULATEbecause calculation is turned off, it is handy to have a calculation button. The other
tabs in the file also have a calculate button.
CHANGE WINDOWSThis macro simply allows you to jump back to the main file.
SAVE/CLOSE---Use the buttons instead of just closing the file. The buttons do more than just save or
close. They are posting information to and from the program file, so please use them.
CLEARWhen you press this button the first 10,000 rows are erased. There are times when you
want to clear the file without having to send another estimate to remove the older estimate. If you do
not want to keep the estimate, erasing it to keep from accidentally using the old data might be a good
idea. The estimate list is not cleared until you open the file from the estimate list.
REUSE--The RE-USE THIS LINE IN ESTIMATE button at the top of the file will perform the
function as described by the label. In order for the function (as of this writing) to operate you must
place your cursor in the AI column in the first (top) Line Number as shown in the next image.
Then press the RE-USE THIS LINE IN ESTIMATE button. Before doing that, you need to know that
the current estimate in the main program file (top) takeoff area will be erased before the takeoff is
transferred. In other words, if you have a takeoff started, operation of this macro will clear it. This
macro does not add, it OVER WRITES your current estimate. It does not erase any of the takeoff
data in the takeoff storage area in the main program file. I repeat, the storage area of the ENTRY tab,
below the current takeoff, is not effected by this macro.
This is the instruction shown inside, at the top of the estimate file:
To re-use the line, open PIPEtalk & this file and place your cursor on the line name you want to re-
use. The line name is in column "AI" and is preceded by dashed lines. After you place your cursor in
column AI, press RE-USE THIS LINE IN ESTIMATE button.
When this macro runs it will post the original ENTRY Screen line information including the height,
paint, insulation, shop fabrication setting, from, to, line number and code. This macro will not post the
WBS code of account listing from the estimate file to the program file. You will have to load the
estimate before using the RE-USE THIS LINE IN ESTIMATE button if you want to reuse the old
WBS codes . If you have already done that, the codes will be in the list inside the main file. The
settings on the setup (S) tab will not be adjusted nor will the multiplier at cell CC140 (Was BR134
in older versions) on the ENTRY tab. You may need to adjust these settings if required for your new
takeoff lines. Be sure to also set 100% X-ray settings in cell CD140, if necessary.
SCHEDULE INTERFACEThis subject is covered in Chapter 10.
34) The next few pages are dedicated to a discussion of the Assistant. It is designed to assist you in
selection of the SEEK CODES and provide further guidance of which type of quantities should be
entered. On computers with limited shared memory you might get an Error from Microsoftsee
image below. This occurs due to the number of variables the macro is creating in preparation to use
the macro. Generally, just hit OK and the macro will run fine. You can press the MEMORY button
and then press the Excel buttons on the right side of the Memory Panel to see the remaining memory
of your computer.
First thing, be sure to have your cursor on the next empty row, below row 147, of your takeoff before
pressing any of the macros to place the information into your takeoff. The program will try to warn
you if your cursor is in the wrong place. Then, open the Assistant. You will see this panel first:
As you can see, the first tab is for PIPE. There are also a list of NPS sizes across the bottom. At this
time of this writing, ISO sizes have not been added on this panel. The sizes can be selected/pressed to
enter the number where ever your cursor is located. You do not have to use them to make an entry.
They cannot be used to enter from one panel to another panelonly enters sizes from the panel to the
estimate takeoff area. They will show up at the bottom of all the various tabs, except separately
opened Equipment panels, when they are selected. The red X in the bottom left corner will close this
panel and most of the other panels opened by any button on this panel. The normal red X in the upper
right corner, only closes this panel. A few panels opened by buttons on this panel will remain open
and you will need to close them as you finish with them. (Some are designed that way)
The pipe groups are across the bottom, above the sizes. The first Pipe button will make an entry using
the default pipe type selected by the specification you are running. A separate quantity panel may
open to ask you the size and quantitythis all depends on the group you are running. The type of
panel that opens for sizes and quantities will vary, depending on the subject of the entry.
The next button will enter pipe that is sold in 20 foot lengths. Then 40 and 10 foot lengths. The
shorter purchased lengths, the more welds. Buttons for Demolition, Stress Relief, Spools and Testing
are in the same row as the pipe. You can then press the spool button to enter a spool piece that is the
same size and length as the pipe you just entered. Finally, you can enter spools by entering a size and
up to eight different lengths and press the Create Above Spools button. You can do two sizes at one
time. There are some standard length nipples on the upper left side. Press the button and it will as you
the diameter. The program will code it and place the length in the estimate. A calculate button has
been added to the Assistant because the calculation macros are covered by the Assistant panel.
.
This tab is for the basic fittings. Press the fitting you want, a separate panel will open asking the sizes
and quantity. The o-lets and couplings are at the upper right side. Some specs will not have the high
pressure o-lets. You also have the ability to enter a quantity and select the type of fitting using a pull-
down list, similar to the pipe alternate takeoff method used on the prior tab. The next panel is for the
flanges.
On this panel you can enter the basic type of flanges. A separate panel will open and collect the size
and quantity. The buttons that say Blind and WN will select the flange that the current spec defines
it might be any pressuredepends on your spec. The Orifice flange generally needs a reference to an
instrument number. The quantity panel for it will include a request for the additional information.
Press the flange button, enter the data and press the button on the size panel that opens to complete the
takeoff item. Then press the BG (Bolt & Gasket) if needed. The button to the right of the 150#
flanges are for the 150# gaskets, etc for other pressures. The connections, bolts/gaskets and bolt-ups
are contained on the next panel.
THE MANPOWER FOR THE FLANGE INCLUDES THE WELD AND BOLTUP TIME.
First, notice the multiplier warning at the top left. This tab is designed to handle ADDITIONAL
welds that involve spools, tie-ins and special cases. The manpower to make welds for the fittings and
valves are included with those items. You generally do not have to add more welds, except for tie-ins.
However, this tab will allow you to add them if they are needed. The additional time to make bolt-ups
is obtained by selecting a bolt-up, which is for labor only. The bolt & gasket sets contain materials
only.
Note: The projects defaults was deleted in Version 6.0.
On the set-up screen you can decide which insulation, coating, hangers, stress relief and testing. Then
you can reuse them in the estimate without having to search for their SEEK CODE. If you forget to
turn on the calculation for insulation, you will receive an error.
You will also receive an error for paint. However, paint will offer to turn the paint on (Y) for you and
continue with the macro.
This panel will have all the special items that do not fit into other categories. It is not complete at this
time. If you need special items added, email me to add them. The notes are all that are on this tab in
this issue. If the note field on all line items at column BW in the current takeoff is not what you need,
then one of these two notes maybe what you prefer. As time permits, other items will be added to this
panel.
This tab contains the valves. Each style of valve has an additional tab. After the ASSISTANT enters
the valve on the Current Estimate, add a C, 4, or 6 to the end to see if the valve has been broken down
into three distinct valve bodies. (Exa: VB1FC ) This is the Ball valve tab:
This is the Butterfly valve tab:

The Check Valve tab:
The Control valve tab:

The Diaphragm valve tab:
The Gate valve tab:

The Globe valve tab:
The Plug valve tab:

Needle valve tab:
Valve Accessories tab contains limited data, but will also be expanded in future issues:
The final valve tab covers a few special valves:

The Instrument tab had to be divided into two parts. This is part one:
This is part two of the instrumentation tab:

The pipe support tab has five parts and is populated with a few hangers. The upper is black hangers
and the lower is galvanized. The reference number are Grinnell. This is the Ring tab:
This is the Clevis tab:

This is the U-bolt hanger tab:
The clamp hanger tab:

At this time, the last hanger tab contains assemblies. As data is loaded into the Assistant, the smaller
hanger parts such as welding plates, rods and bolts will be added. These items are already in the
current database inside the U tab. You can also open the Grinnell hanger book from here. On some
computers, this does not work.
There are a few shoes:

The structural steel tab also has many parts. Each one of the shapes will open another quantity panel
from which you can choose the exact shape and finish you want. You will need to select if the steel
will be used as building steel or for hangers. Then if it is galvanized, painted or stainless. What is the
difference? The building steel has lower unit-hours than the hanger erection.
Version 4.1 added the ability to calculate an additional bolts/connection or bolt allowance using a
percent you set. These two macros should be run after you have completed the takeoff of all the steel.
Do the steel takeoff, then run these so it can find the total steel. (.10 = 10%)
There is a list of items that need to be added to the steel Assistant. They are shown on the right side.
SEEK codes for cutting steel, welding, drilling/bolting need to be added. However, the program has
reached an Excel limit. When a work around can be obtained, these items will have their own button
or panel. Until then, simply enter them by directly typing them into the SEEK code column.
Some items are used more than others, thus the quantity panels may have more room to make the entry
than others. For example the BL quantity panel only has room for one entry per selected size. The
panel stays open after you send the data to the estimate takeoff area to allow you to make another size
selection. The bar joist were recently added (Pink Background).
The WF (W) panel has room for nine entries for each size you select and send to the takeoff:
Other shapes allow you additional space too:

The earthwork tab is divided into seven tabs. The first one is for the site work:
The second earthwork tab is for the excavation:

The third earthwork tab is for backfill:
The fourth earthwork tab is for compaction:

The fourth earthwork tab is for trenching:
The fifth earthwork tab is for hauling:

The final earthwork tab is for purchase of fill materials:

The concrete tab on the Assistant has many shapes to pick from. The program will enter the shape
code and show you anther panel to pick the concrete parts from. These are the shapes:
SEE NEXT PAGE FOR CONCRETE PARTS

These are the concrete parts to choose from and a sample of one of the quantity panels that
come up for the parts:
You will see this quantity panel for calculating concrete quantities. It is used for calculating cubic
footage or meters.
The rebar quantity entry panel provides rebar information and a place to enter the quantity. Because
the rebar is divided into two sizes, it is important to enter the correct size range when using the form
below. If you selected the rebar <1, enter only that size range. Of course, if you selected bars >1
enter the larger bars at that time. Try to keep them separated due to manpower and unit prices.
New in 4.1 was a separate file that is opened from this panel. It helps you calculate large slabs.
The equipment panel will launch other panels for different types of equipment. Some equipment will
be added in future revisions.
The first item listed on the equipment list is the bag-house.

The next group is the blowers.
The boilers follow on two panels.
If you select the Cyclone from the list, you would see a dropdown---this is similar to other dropdowns.
When you pick one of the cyclone parts you would get this panel to enter you quantity into. Press
ENTER & STAY OPEN if you want to keep the same quantity or keep use of the notes you added to
be put into the estimate. Pick ENTER & CLOSE to make one entry and close the quantity panel.
Each button of the Assistant brings a new group of equipment. Some equipment has prices, some do
not. All the ones loaded on the Assistant have manpower. There are still other types of equipment to
be loaded. An active effort to remove unnecessary macro buttons from the program should bring
programming access to allow more to be added to the equipment.
35) Not used

36) Not used
37) Not used
38) Not used
39) Not used
40) Not used
41) Not used
42) Not Used
43) Not Used
CONTINUE TO THE NEXT PICTURE OF THE TAKEOFF ENTRY SCREEN

49) Takeoff Insulation Info

58) Prior Takeoff Info
44) Line Number
50) Takeoff Heat Trace
Info
45) Drawing Number & Rev 51) Takeoff Paint Info
52) Average Height
48) Shop Fabrication? 56) Specification Info
47) To Here 55) NA

53) Specification Name
57) Line Information

ENTRY SCREEN
46) From Here
44) At cell BS140 you would enter the line number. It is good to be consistent in the way you enter
this. The lines numbers play a key roll in bids and you should play special attention to how they are
spaced in this cell. The line numbers will show on each line of takeoff.
45) A drawing number with a revision number is entered at cell BT140. It is important from a good
estimating standpoint to always enter the revision number. Simply enter R# at the end of the drawing
number. The drawing number will show on each line of takeoff.
46,47) If you are doing a takeoff for an engineering company or from P&ID's you will need a record
of the "From" and "To" of the line. These are entered at cells BU140 and BW140. You should always
mark off the line from the P&ID furnished to assure yourself the scope has been covered. The line
location From and To will show on each line of takeoff.
48) Decide if you wish to divide the estimate into field and shop labor/material groups. Use only "N"
and "Y" here to indicate if the pipe will be shop fabricated and that you want to calculate the shops
man-hours in addition to the field hours. Use N to indicate-No Shop work.
49) You enter information about insulation here. The insulation information usually is shown in the
line number. Set insulation to "N" when there is none. PIPEtalk will calculate the square footage for
you or M2 if ISO is running. You may submit this information to the insulator for his use. He will
still be responsible for his own calculations. However, this feature is useful if you have to prepare a
quick accurate budget number for insulation. Insulation thickness requirements come from the Clients
Specifications or scope of work.
FEATURE: PIPEtalk can adjust the external area based on the thickness of the insulation AND if it is
heat traced. Enter the thickness using this format #.# as a number. Heat trace should be set to "N"
when there is none for the insulation calculation to work correctly.
50) Heat tracing information are usually in the line number. Set both to "N" when there is none.
Decide a short name for the style of heat tracing such as ET1, ET2 or ST and enter it here. The
heat trace detail requirements come from the Clients Specifications or scope of work. It is important
to set the line to at least Y if there will be heat tracing. Insulation is required to heat trace. PIPEtalk
uses this information to calculate the jacket diameter. You may get an error message if you do not
inter insulation after indicating a need for heat trace.
51) Painting can be tracked. The painting information is usually shown in the line number. Set paint
to "N" when there is none to be estimated. Enter Y here so you can have PIPEtalk calculate an
approximate square footage (or M2 if ISO) to be given to the painter or to provide information you
will use to calculate cost. The painting information may come from the Clients Specifications or
written scope of work. You will get an error remark at paint if you indicate to paint stainless steel
pipe. See 31) to see how to auto-calculate & post the paint quantity.
52) The height adjuster mathematics is now adjustable on the setup tab. The height is shown in the
estimate for each line of takeoff. Here you enter the average height, in feet for NPS or M if ISO,
above or below ground, that you are working at. To go to the height adjustment default settings, press
the button at the top of the Setup (S) tab.
You may indicate negative numbers to indicate trench work. PIPEtalk will add a percentage for
underground work as well as above grade work. The current default height multipliers are shown in
the chart on the last page of this section. USE WHOLE NUMBERS, NO FRACTIONS FOR THE
HEIGHTS.
53) At cell BS141 you see the spec that is currently running. If you want the program to call the spec
another name then enter an override name to the right of the spec that is running. Both spec names
will show up in the estimatethe spec running and the over-ride spec name.
54) Not Used

55) Not Used
56) At cell BX141 you will see a short description of the specification you selected.
57) This row shows the current takeoff pipe line information at a glance. In addition, it provides the
quantity of the pipe lines you have taken off on the left edge of this line of information.
58) This row shows the last/prior pipe line takeoff information.
Default Height Adjustments used in PIPEtalk

(This Chart Can Now Be Adjusted By The User On The Setup Tab)
Pipe Labor Pipe Labor Pipe Labor Pipe Labor Pipe Labor
Height Adjust% Height Adjust% Height Adjust% Height Adjust% Height Adjust%
-27 1.1 4 1 33 1.063 62 1.092 91 1.121

-26 1.1 5 1 34 1.064 63 1.093 92 1.122
-25 1.1 6 1 35 1.065 64 1.094 93 1.123
-24 1.1 7 1 36 1.066 65 1.095 94 1.124
-23 1.1 8 1 37 1.067 66 1.096 95 1.125
-22 1.1 9 1 38 1.068 67 1.097 96 1.126
-21 1.1 10 1 39 1.069 68 1.098 97 1.127
-20 1.1 11 1 40 1.07 69 1.099 98 1.128
-19 1.12 12 1 41 1.071 70 1.1 99 1.129
-17 1.109 13 1 42 1.072 71 1.101 100 1.13
-16 1.108 14 1 43 1.073 72 1.102 101 1.131
-15 1.107 15 1 44 1.074 73 1.103 102 1.132
-14 1.106 16 1.01 45 1.075 74 1.104 103 1.133
-13 1.105 17 1.02 46 1.076 75 1.105 104 1.134
-12 1.104 18 1.03 47 1.077 76 1.106 105 1.135
-11 1.103 19 1.04 48 1.078 77 1.107 106 1.136
-10 1.102 20 1.05 49 1.079 78 1.108 107 1.137
-9 1.101 21 1.051 50 1.08 79 1.109 108 1.138
-8 1.1 22 1.052 51 1.081 80 1.11 109 1.139
-7 1.075 23 1.053 52 1.082 81 1.111 110 1.14
-6 1.05 24 1.054 53 1.083 82 1.112 111 1.141
-5 1.025 25 1.055 54 1.084 83 1.113 112 1.142
-4 1 26 1.056 55 1.085 84 1.114 113 1.143
-3 1 27 1.057 56 1.086 85 1.115 114 1.144
-2 1 28 1.058 57 1.087 86 1.116 115 1.145
-1 1 29 1.059 58 1.088 87 1.117 116 1.146
0 1 30 1.06 59 1.089 88 1.118 117 1.147
1 1 31 1.061 60 1.09 89 1.119 118 1.148
2 1 32 1.062 61 1.091 90 1.12 119 1.149
120 1.15

66) Calculated Quantity 67) Unit Of Measure 78) Labor Takeoff Multiplier
60) Size 1 and 2 68) Crew Name 76) Total Cost
59) Specifications 69) Field Unit 75) Shop Labor Cost

Man-hour
61) SEEK CODE 74) Material Cost
70) Unit Material

62) Quantity
63) Contractor or Owner
71) Field Man-hour

73) Field Labor Cost
65) Description -1 72) Shop/Sub Man-hour
77) Takeoff Entry Area 64) Takeoff Line Note -1 Means No Unit Material Price in Data
Base
ENTRY SCREEN
NOTE: All the weights have not been entered into the database yet. Therefore, the weights will be
light until they have all been posted. This is especially true of the larger sizes.
59) At this point you are ready to make your first entry. By now, you have already setup the
specification you wish to use. Press the Select Specification button and this panel will appear:
Select the specification you want to use and press the Select The Spec button. Wait for the macro to
stop calculating. If you want the program to call the spec another name, type your preferred name in
the space right of the spec on the ENTER tab. Many times you may be using the Generic Specs and
have modified them slightly in order to match some new clients specification. Run the spec you
modified and give it an over-ride name to show up in the estimate. Your selection on the setup screen
will determine how the program handles the Over-ride name typed in. See Chapter 1 for a discussion
of how the Setup setting changes how the program handles the name shown in the estimate.
This would be a good time to check the spec, if you have just wrote (built) it. TEMPLATE FILE 1,
item 1 is a check you can use for the spec. It will give you a list of items for the program to see if it
has the items in the data base as you have defined them in the spec. Do not expect them to all be in
the database, this check list is very long and a lot of them may not be available. The idea is to know
where the spec needs more work or the database needs items added. The check spec list will run slow,
be patient.
A shot of the list of items used for the test is shown next:
60) You need to decide which line to takeoff first. You enter the pipe nominal size here. Use
decimals only-never use fractions for pipe sizes in PIPEtalk. For inch=.25 inch, use .25. The
smallest size is .25 diameter pipe. The largest is 70 inches. Five inch diameter is included. Enter the
sizes of the first line you chose in the column called Inch x Inch, Size x Size. It is better to takeoff
from larger to smaller size pipe. Enter the primary size first and any secondary size next in column
BS. The secondary size does not repeat, so you must enter secondary sizes every time you want one.
If you fail to enter the secondary size, PIPEtalk may show an error that indicates a problem to the right
in the description column. In addition to providing an error at the items description, PIPEtalk will at
the second size area of the Takeoff Entry Screen change color to indicate you need the secondary size.
Secondary sizes are always needed by reducers, swages, reducing tees, reducing 90s, nipples, o-lets
"on size", etc. It is also used for bolt lengths and for some hangers that required a second criterion to
locate it. See the spring can hangers to see an example of how the second size is used to locate them.
Review your data base of parts to see what has secondary sizes so you will be familiar with them.
From a logical stand point it is best to enter your reducer between size changes to assure you that you
have it in the estimate. I also generally enter my hangers and structural steel next to last in the current
takeoff Entry Screen. The last thing I do in the estimate is concrete and earthwork. The method of
order applies only if you are estimating from good construction drawings. If all you have are P&IDs
your approach is two step, do the P&IDs first then get the General Arrangements to get 90,s, 45s,
hangers, pipe support concrete, miscellaneous steel drain/vent assemblies, straight pipe length and
mark where I need the Instrument Air, Service Water or Service Air locations. If you dont have at
least a General Arrangement or have done one of these before (History)-Send the package back and no
quote. Of course all of this depends on your ability. From P&IDs you will takeoff the
valves/flanges/gaskets, instruments, o-lets, special notes (Like IA may be needed), reducers and tees
61) You enter the SEEK CODE in column BT. It does not automatically duplicate itself to the next
cell row. PIPEtalk uses the empty cells in column BT to determine some of the calculations. Leave it
empty if you are not using it. Do not enter a blank with the tab bar. The Tab bar creates a tic mark
that is NOT an empty cell. Never use the tab bar to delete anything with. What is a SEEK CODE? A
SEEK CODE goes in the data base and is combined with a lot of other parts to seek out the
information item when you enter the short SEEK CODE. If you enter the wrong SEEK CODE, you
will get the wrong part. The basic SEEK CODES are listed at the rear of this manual. The list is also
stored in another printable file. The Assistant will select the correct SEEK CODE or you can also see
the SEEK CODES by selecting the title above the entry area of the SEEK CODES (The title). You
would enter a 90 at the SEEK CODE at column BT if you wanted a 90 elbow. To show how one letter
changes the meaning; 90S is a short radius elbow and 90R is a reducing 90.
62) Enter the quantity you desire in the first quantity column shown. PIPEtalk also has a second
quantity field you see in the Entry Screen. The first quantities (Left Qty) are entered one time by you
for each row of takeoff if you want the quantity to be other than (1) one. The program will enter (1)
one for you at each pipe fitting you entered. To clarify, PIPEtalk has a both left & right quantities.
The right one is created by the program based on information in the databases (U,A,C). For
example, you may have entered a quantity of "linear feet" on the left and the program responded with
steel "pounds" in the right quantity column. This allows for you to count both "linear feet" and
"tons/pounds" to analysis the estimate. All quantities on the left are entered in each, linear feet (M),
square feet (M2) or cubic feet. Do not enter cubic yards (M3) or square yards. PIPEtalk knows to
convert the entry in a pre-determined way. It uses three "types" of formulas called number 1, 2 or 3.
Type 1 passes the quantity straight thru but will convert the steel to pounds in the second quantity
field. The type 2 will convert the CF you enter to CY. Type 3 converts the SF you enter to SY or M
to M2. These are established in column 26 on tabs "U", "C" and "A". If you fail to enter a formula
type it will default to "1". (PIPEtalk will not convert metric at this time)
When PIPEtalk sees that it has pipe entered, it looks to see if you have hangers entered and calculates
them. To use the hanger quantities that PIPEtalk has calculated enter at the SEEK CODE a "H" then
the finish (G=galv, P=painted, Blank=black) then the Grinnell number you want. The formulas will
calculate the number of hangers for you and put them in the estimate in the left quantity. Seek codes
starting with "H" are reserved for hangers. Grinnell figure numbers are used as a reference for pricing
and labor. There are also some hanger assemblies that are not in the assembly module. To use one of
them simply enter the hanger you want and put an "A" after the H, HG or HP. Check the help screen
for the list or see the print out to find which ones have been built. Hangers are entered per size of pipe
you have. Fitting and valve lengths are not included in the calculation for footage.
NEW QUANTITY FEATURE: If you enter a valve and then you enter a flange "F" or a bolt and
gasket set "BG" the program will enter two of them for each valve. If you enter two valves, it will
show four flanges and four bolt & gasket sets. This saves time and reduces errors! This only works
for the first two entries after the valve and if you enter the information in the right order.
63) At Column "BV" PIPEtalk will automatically enter "O" or "C" based on the setup screen.
Remember that "O" stands for Owner provided. Anything with the "O" at column "BV" will not
show up in the list to go out for pricing. It is blocked from the list to be priced. Items marked as a "C"
for Contractor supplied and that are not pure labor functions will show up in the list to be priced (They
have materials in the unit). The purely labor units are tagged as "L" in column 27 on the "U", "C" and
"A" tabs. When PIPEtalk sees the "L" it will not show up in the pricing description. You can over-
ride PIPEtalks automatic selection by just typing an "O" or "C" in column "BV". Remember that if
you reuse this item from memory that the formula has been over-ridden at this column and will remain
as you typed it
64) The note field will add your comments to the estimate takeoff line, but not to the purchasing
description you dont normally see on the Entry Screen. If you place a * in front of the note, the note
will then show up in the material description that goes to the purchasing department. You may also use
the NOTE, NOTE1, NOTE2 seek codes to leave a note. The NOTE seek code has no manpower or
material unit prices. You can change the NOTE1&2 to read what you want at the top of sheet "U".
Other seek codes that allows for a miscellaneous entry are MISCF (Misc. Field) and MISCS (Misc.
Shop). Enter information in the note column and it will put it in the description - you can type over
the unit MH and Cost to create your own units. A negative number in the materials column indicates
that you have no price available. When that shows up, you need to create a price in the data base.
New to the program is the ability to push field work into the shop and take the discount while doing
so. Here is a screen shot of some items that are field and some shop:
Now enter the S! in the note field (left side) and watch the hours move from field to shop:
A $0.00 is a valid price; it will not be flagged as an error by PIPEtalk. The

invalid price is a -1 (negative one). The negative one indicates a price is missing.
65) The description field is a calculated field. As you make your entries you may over-write the cells
at the units and descriptions. The formula can be repaired/replaced with the formula below it in the
Entry Screen if you accidentally "step" on the formula. You can also use the Excel undo feature to
change your mind when you step-on/over-ride a formula. This will not work for any Macro that has
already executed. You cannot undo a Macro button command. Remember you can place your
cursor on the description formula and press the CONVERT TO TEXT" button to change the
description from a formula to text. This allows you to see the whole descriptions words. You can
undo this by pressing the UNDO TEXT CONVERT button as shown below.
a) Tab Calculate and Post
b) Sticky SEEK Codes
c) Adders
d) Paste Values
e) Repeater
f) Calculate Tab
a) Calculate the tab and post quantities that require a circular reference calculation. As an
example, paint SF and Insulation SF create a circular reference when they are in the same total
columns.
b) This opens the Sticky Panel for you. See subject 18 for more information.
c) The Adders are new. Select one of the items on the list of frequently used SEEK codes:
d) Paste values does as it sounds, copy and place your cursor where you want it and press the
button.
e) The Repeater is also a new macro. From the last SEEK code in the current takeoff, place your
cursor under or on the SEEK code you want to copy. The Repeater will copy the item below:
f) Calculate tab will recalculate the tab for you.
66) This is the calculated quantity field PIPEtalk creates. It is calculated from the quantity you entered
at subject 62 of Part 7 of the manual. You may type over the amount calculated by PIPEtalk to
change the value if you wish. PIPEtalk will rebuild the formula later, after you get a new screen. The
conversion from your entry quantity typed to this second quantity is decided from the calculation code
pre-coded in the unit man-hour tabsU, C and A. An example might be that you enter 10 (lf) and
the second field shows up as 100 lb.
67) This is the calculated unit of measure PIPEtalk creates. Do NOT type over the unit of measure
unless the item is from the miscellaneous SEEK CODES; MISCF (Field) and MISCS (Shop).
68) This is the calculated crew name PIPEtalk gets from the setup screen and the unit man-hour tabs.
You may type over the crew name as long as the crew name you use is in the crew list in the setup
screen. PIPEtalk will rebuild the formula when you get a new screen.
69) This is the calculated field unit man-hour location PIPEtalk creates. You may type over the
amount calculated PIPEtalk by to change the value if you wish. PIPEtalk will rebuild the formula
when you get a new screen.
70) This is the calculated unit material price PIPEtalk creates. You may type over the amount
calculated by PIPEtalk to change the value if you wish. PIPEtalk will rebuild the formula when you
get a new screen. Because there is two possible sources of a unit price, a logical priority had to be
programmed. Priority one is either import or domestic, then prices from the P tab, than prices from
the default prices on U, C and A tbs. Unless, the setup requests that the default prices be first and P
tab prices be last. See how simple that is?
71) This is where PIPEtalk creates the calculated field man-hours. You may type over the amount
shown to change the value if you wish. However, it would be better to adjust the field unit man-hour
until you get the man-hours you want. Adjusting the unit man-hour keeps the wage rate correct. Dont
worry, PIPEtalk will rebuild the formula when you get a new screen.
72) This is the calculated shop man-hour PIPEtalk creates. Shop unit man-hours are not shown on the
entry screen due to screen space. You may type over the amount calculated by PIPEtalk to change the
value if you wish. PIPEtalk will rebuild the formula when you get a new screen.
73) This is the calculated field labor cost PIPEtalk creates You should change the field labor unit man-
hour and not adjust this field directly. After adjusting the field labor unit man-hour, calculate to see
the new field labor cost. However, you may type over the amount calculated by PIPEtalk to change
the value if you wish. PIPEtalk will rebuild the formula when you get a new screen.
74) This is the calculated material cost PIPEtalk creates. You should change the material unit cost and
not adjust this field directly. After adjusting the material unit price, calculate to see the new material
cost. However, you may type over the amount calculated by PIPEtalk to change the value if you wish.
PIPEtalk will rebuild the formula when you get a new screen.
75) This is the calculated shop labor cost PIPEtalk creates. It would be better if you did not type over
this field. Change the shop man-hour field at subject 72 (above) of the manual instead, to get the
desired shop labor cost you want to see. After adjusting the material unit price, calculate to see the
new shop labor cost. If the shop labor is running too low, change the setup wage rate on the setup
screen on tab S at cell U49. Because of space limitation, the subcontractor rate is not shown.
76) This is the calculated total cost field PIPEtalk creates. It would be better if you did not type over
this field.
77) This is the takeoff entry area. This is the primary area that you enter quantities, SEEK CODES
and notes. It is the area referred to as the red on cream entry area. The secondary entry area is to the
right of this primary area. The secondary area is calculated by PIPEtalk.
78) If you need a larger multiplier for the Entry Screen takeoff than what the height adjustment is
doing for you, then adjust the Multipliers beginning at cell J23 on the Setup Screen or enter a
multiplier at cell CC140 titled "Labor x Adjust". You may also simply over-ride the unit man-hour.
(More on that below) You can also see the multiplier that PIPEtalk is suggesting for your height
adjustment at cell CC140. You can now adjust the height multipliers. Press the GoTo HEIGHT
MULTI on the top of the S tab.
CONTINUE TO THE NEXT PICTURE OF THE SETUP SCREEN

90) Current Shop MH 104) Current

86) Current CY
Field Labor 106) Current Total
87) Current Rebar LB
Cost
89) Current Field MH
91) Field MH/LF 88) Current Spool EA
81) Current
100) Total Pipe MH/LF
85) Current LF Concrete MH
100b)
Current
MHs
92) Shop
105) Current
MH/LF
79) Earthwork MH Shop Labor
Cost
80) Current Steel LB 94) Auto Count?

103) Current
Material Cost
93) Current Weld
Information
102) Current Spool LF
82) Current Insulation Equivalents
95) Current Pipe MH
101) Current Gallons
83) Current Structural Steel MH 96) Current Paint SF

99) Current TL MH/LF
84) Current Insulation SF

97) Current Equipment MH
98) Concrete MH/CY
ENTRY SCREEN
79) This cell shows the current takeoffs earthwork man-hours that were accumulated from the current
takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab ENTRY.
80) The current takeoffs structural steel weight in pounds that were calculated from the current
takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab ENTRY is indicated here. These are based on the values from the
unit data base in tab U.
81) This cell shows the current takeoffs concrete man-hours that were accumulated from the current
82) The current takeoffs insulation equivalents in linear distance that were calculated from the current
takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab ENTRY is indicated here based on the Setup Screens values.
83) This cell shows the current takeoffs structural steel man-hours that were accumulated from the
current takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab ENTRY.
84) The current takeoffs insulation square feet that were calculated from the current takeoffs Entry
Screen on the tab ENTRY is indicated here. These are based on the values from the unit data base
in tabs C and A.
85) The current takeoffs pipe length that were calculated from the current takeoffs Entry Screen on
the tab ENTRY is indicated here. The quantity does not include the fittings or valves. This is the
raw length of pipe only.
86) The current takeoffs total quantity of concrete calculated from the current takeoffs Entry Screen
on the tab ENTRY is indicated here. The normal cost of the miscellaneous concrete you takeoff for
piping footings and supports should have a very high man-hour per quantity UOM. When you do
concrete estimating; dont forget to include chamfer, grout, roughen, bonding agents and embedded
metals. The Assistant is a great help when you are doing the concrete and other C.S.A items.
87) The current takeoffs total rebar weight in pounds for concrete calculated from the current
takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab ENTRY is indicated here. When you do rebar estimating, dont
forget to include dowels, rebar chairs, anchor bolts, expansion bolts and embedded metals.
88) The current takeoffs total spools as each calculated from the current takeoffs Entry Screen on
the tab ENTRY is indicated here. Normally spools are either shown as linear feet or each. When
you ask how many spools are there? You need to be able to answer that question. Estimators have
preferences due to their labor cost history files. Each company collects the information a little
different. I have tried to address both methods.
89) This cell shows the current takeoffs field man-hours (All trades) that were accumulated from the
90) This cell shows the current takeoffs all shop man-hours that were accumulated from the current
takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab ENTRY. The amount of shop man-hours is determined by a
mathematical combination of the Setup Screens settings and the unit man-hours on the tabs C and
A. Some items are programmed to be only field and to have no shop component. There are three
basic settings that determine shop or field. The units have a preset indicator of S, F or B on
them. The S means shop only. The F means field only. Therefore the B means both-to be split
by the Setup Screen settings.
91) This cell shows the current takeoffs field man-hours divided by the pipe linear footage/meters
that were accumulated from the current takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab ENTRY.
92) This cell shows the current takeoffs shop man-hours divided by the pipe linear footage/meters
that were accumulated from the current takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab ENTRY.
93) PIPEtalk is tracking the number of field welds and shop welds for you. Here PIPEtalk is indicating
the quantity of large bore and small bore field and shop welds. The definition of small was
determined by you on the Setup Screen. Small bore is usually set to be up to either 2 inch or 2.5
inch pipe.
94) This cell indicates whether PIPEtalk is counting the welds or if you have the setting to off and is
not counting.
95) This cell shows the current takeoffs total piping man-hours that were accumulated from the
96) The current takeoffs paint square feet (M2) that were calculated from the current takeoffs Entry
Screen on the tab ENTRY is indicated here. These are based on the values from the unit data base
in tabs U, C and A.
97) This cell shows the current takeoffs equipment man-hours that were accumulated from the current
98) This cell shows the current takeoffs concrete man-hours divided by the quantity of concrete that
were accumulated from the current takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab ENTRY.
99) This cell shows the current takeoffs total shop and field (All) man-hours divided by the pipe
linear footage/meters that were accumulated from the current takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab
ENTRY. NOTE: Remember that the pipe length does not include the fittings and valves. If you
expected the unit man-hour for the pipe to be 2.0 using piping quantity measured through the fittings
and valves, you will need to have a higher number here. The unit you will see in PIPEtalk will need to
be higher because you are dividing by a smaller number. You may need to get a 2.2 using the pipe
only to be the same as a 2.0 when you know the through length.
100) This cell shows the current takeoffs shop and field pipe (Only) man-hours divided by the pipe
linear footage/meters that were accumulated from the current takeoffs Entry Screen on the tab
ENTRY. NOTE: Remember that the pipe footage does not include the fittings and valves. If you
expected the unit man-hour for the pipe to be 2.0 using piping footage measured through the fittings
and valves, you will need to have a higher number here. The unit you will see in PIPEtalk will need to
be higher because you are dividing by a smaller number. You may need to get a 2.2 using the pipe
only to be the same as a 2.0 when you know the through footage.
100b) The current takeoff total man-hours are shown here.
101) The current takeoffs gallons that were calculated from the current takeoffs Entry Screen on the
tab ENTRY is indicated here. This information is handy to determine flush requirements. The cost
of the flush material is not included in the cost of any materials and should be added to the estimates
cost.
102) The current takeoffs total spools in linear feet/meters calculated from the current takeoffs Entry
Screen on the tab ENTRY is indicated here. Spools are shown as linear feet (M) or each.
Estimators have preferences due to their labor project history cost files. Each company collects the
information a little different. I have tried to address both methods. Spools always include the fittings
in the lengths but not the valves.
103) This cell shows the current takeoffs total material cost that was accumulated from the current
104) This cell shows the current takeoffs field labor cost that was accumulated from the current
105) This cell shows the current takeoffs shop labor cost that was accumulated from the current
106) This cell shows the current takeoffs total takeoff cost that was accumulated from the current

121) Total Material Cost 122) Shop Cost
123) Total Cost
111) Total Paint

SF
110) Insulation SF
120) Field Labor Cost

109) Insulation Equivalents
108) Shipping Weight LB 115) Shop MH/LF 119) Total Shop or

Sub MH
107) Shipping Weight TONS 114) Field MH/LF 116) Total MH/LF
118) Total Field

112) Total Weld Count 113) Total Pipe LF 117) Total Gallons MH
ENTRY SCREEN
107) thru 123) are now on hidden rows. The same information is displayed by pressing the View Cur
Est + Storage File Totals button:
107) This cell contains the total shipping weight of the piping in tons as calculated using the weights
in the data base against quantities that was accumulated from the entire PIPEtalk file. These are based
on the values from the unit data base in tab C and A and the quantities you entered during the
takeoffs. The majority of the weights of pipe and fittings have been loaded into PIPEtalk. However,
not all the weights are yet entered into the units stored in U, C and C work sheets. Therefore,
generally the values you get from this screen should be added to. The amount to add is unknown at
this time.
108) This cell contains total the shipping weight of the piping in pounds accumulated from the entire
PIPEtalk file.
109) The insulation equivalents in linear feet (M) that were calculated from the entire PIPEtalk file is
indicated here based on the Setup Screens values you assigned and the quantities you entered during
the takeoffs.
110) The insulation square feet (M2) that were calculated from the entire PIPEtalk file is indicated
here. These are based on the values from the unit data base in tab C and A and the quantities you
entered during the takeoffs.
111) ) The paint square feet (M2) that were calculated from the entire PIPEtalk file is shown here.
These are based on the values from the unit data base in tabs U, C and A and the quantities you
entered during the takeoffs.
112) PIPEtalk is tracking the number of field welds and shop welds for you. Here PIPEtalk is
indicating the quantity of large bore and small bore field and shop welds for the entire file. The
definition of small was determined by you on the Setup Screen. As discussed prior, small bore is
usually set to be up to either 2, 2.5 or 3 inch pipeenter the FIRST large bore size at setup. If you
turned off the counting on the Setup Screen, no count can be shown.
113) The pipe linear feet/meters that were calculated from the entire PIPEtalk file is shown here. The
footage does not include the fittings or valves. This is the raw footage of pipe only.
114) ) This cell shows the field man-hours divided by the pipe linear distance that were accumulated
from the entire PIPEtalk file.
115) This cell shows the shop man-hours divided by the pipe linear distance that were accumulated
from the entire PIPEtalk file.
116) This cell shows the total shop and field (All) man-hours divided by the pipe linear distance that
were accumulated from the entire PIPEtalk file. NOTE: Remember that the pipe length does not
include the fittings and valves. If you expected the unit man-hour for the pipe to be 2.0 using piping
footage measured through the fittings and valves, you will need to have a higher number here. The
unit you will see in PIPEtalk will need to be higher because you are dividing by a smaller number.
You may need to get a 2.2 using the pipe only to be the same as a 2.0 when you know the through
distance.
117) The gallons (L) that were calculated from the entire PIPEtalk file is indicated here. This
information is handy to determine flush requirements. The cost of the flush material is not included in
the cost of any materials and should be added to the estimates cost.
118) This cell shows the field man-hours (All trades) that were accumulated from the entire PIPEtalk
file.
119) This cell shows the shop man-hours that were accumulated from the entire PIPEtalk file.
120) This cell shows the field labor cost that was accumulated from the entire PIPEtalk file.
121) This cell shows the material cost that was accumulated from the entire PIPEtalk file.
122) This cell shows the shop labor cost that was accumulated from the entire PIPEtalk file.
123) This cell shows the total cost that was accumulated from the entire PIPEtalk file.
127) Select From Estimate List

130) Clear Row
131) Clear Ref
132) Find UPC

129) EWO Form
125) View the UPC
128) Paste Value
124) See Left Details
ENTRY SCREEN
124) To view the current takeoff left side , press this left arrow button. This side is normally hidden
until the estimate is completed and shipped to the estimate storage area. The two views below show
the area exposed when you press the left arrow button. MATL PART# (Numbered 24 below) has
been changed to MATL UPC in version 5.0 This provides the ability to re-price items outside of the
main programs takeoff screen.
125) When you are unable to find the item you are looking for in the data base, you might want to
see what UPC the program is going after. Press the right button to see what the UPCs are for the
items you are estimating. You must press the arrow button for the UPC VALUE portion to calculate
and provide the text (value) and no formula. This makes it a lot easier to use to locate the item that the
program is looking for. The item you find may need to have a minor change made to its UPC so the
program can use it. Use the information created to solve problems.
In version 5.0 a new button has been added to allow you to quickly GoTo the UPC item. Place your
cursor on the UPC value and press the GOTO UPC button above it. The macro will decide which tab
it is on and find it for you.
126) Not Used

127) Press the "Press-Select Estimate" button.
SELECTING THE ESTIMATE---If the estimate you want is not shown, then press the button on the
Estimate Panel that says Press to Select Another Estimate. From a list on the newly opened file, select
the file that you desire for the project. The macro will calculate and take you back to the prior panel
which now shows the estimate you chose.
.
GET/USE ESTIMATE FILE--With the correct estimate file shown in the panel and on the Entry tab,
you can open the estimate file to view/modify. If you have not started the estimate, then you do not
have to download any data from the estimate file you have selected to use. Simply close the panel,
now that it shows the estimate file you intend to use. However, if you have done some of the estimate,
load the data into the main program file to add to the estimate. When you estimate, you must bring the
entire estimate back into the main program. When you load the estimate back, it will load your WBS
codes and set your next takeoff reference line number for your next pipe takeoff.
UPDATE/REPLACE THE ESTIMATE--You can update/replace the estimate file with the current
estimate. When you do this the entire estimate must be inside the main pipetalk program. The
information inside the estimate file will be replaced, not added to. The estimate will not be removed
form the main program file.
REPLACE/REMOVE THE ESTIMATEPressing this button will copy the estimate to the estimate
file, save the estimate, clear the data in takeoff storage and be ready for the next estimate.
128) Paste Value will paste the value of whatever you have in the copy buffer. You cannot undo the
paste. However, all formulas in a column are the same, so you can always paste a formula from a row
above or below back to where you need it.
129) EWO Form to open the EWO form. Press this button and you will receive a message:
After you hit OK, the EWO will load with the information from your current estimate (NOT the
information from the Estimate Storage area). The EWO file can be used to create Extra Work Orders
fast, directly from the PIPEtalk main program file. You can design your own form by using formulas
to pull information from PIPEtalks standard EWO form. See the Conoco-Phillips EWO form (Old
now outdated) for a sample of how to link (formula internal to the file) the imported information with
your EWO form. The instructions written inside the EWO file are:
1. Because of the difficulty of exporting, I have automated that task. Please add this file to the
PIPEtalk files. (In the same directory) Just copy it into the PIPEtalk folder. To access this file, run the
macro button found on the ENTRY worksheet header.
2. If you have entered this file by using the macro inside the PIPEtalk Program, the information from
there has already been transferred to this file. Do not have this file open and run the "CREATE EWO
FORM" button in PIPEtalk. That would cause the program to try to open this file two times. Close
this file first, then run the macro. Go to the "USE THIS SHEET FOR YOUR EXTRA" to see the
results of your takeoff.
3. Do your estimate for the extra work in the main PIPEtalk Program file at the ENTRY worksheet
tab. When you are finished, calculate the PIPEtalk Program file. (F9)
4. This form is designed to obtain it's estimate from the upper part of the ENTRY worksheet inside
the PIPEtalk Program information. If you have not started inside that file, close this file and begin
creating your EWO takeoff from within the PIPEtalk Program file. Use the "CREATE EWO FORM"
button on the ENTRY worksheet to export the EWO information and to go to this file.
5. Do not change anything on the "IMPORT FROM PIPEtalk HERE" sheet tab. To do so would
cause the macro to get the wrong information.
6. You may design the "USE THIS SHEET FOR YOUR EXTRA" any way you wish. Just change
the form and formulas to suit your contract. The formulas do not link to PIPEtalk's main file. All data
is inside this file after the macro runs. There are NO links from this file and it can be sent to your
office without requiring any other PIPEtalk file.
7. After modifying the EWO form, save the file as your template. The template file name should
always be "PIPEtalk EWO Import Template". It does not matter if there is cost/data in this template
when you close it as your master. When you do the next one it will change after you run the macro.
Use the macro here to return to PIPEtalk. It only takes you back to the ENTRY SCREEN. Save your
EWO as some other name that references your EWO before returning.
8. Each time you do an extra from PIPEtalk, save the EWO under another name that you know is that
extra. Perhaps something as simple as "EWO 001" or "COR 001". This will always leave the
template to be used for the next EWO.
9. A sample of how to interface your company's EWO form and the information sent from PIPEtalk is
attached. (ConocoPhillips)
10. Email me if you have any questions about these instructions. James M. Murphy
pipetalk@yahoo.com This is a screen shot of the help inside the EWO file:
130) Clears Row will remove the data in a row and calculate that row. If the row contains NA in the
UPC value, the macro may not operate correctly. If it does not clear, simply enter a 0 in the quantity
and it will not show in the takeoff storage area when you run the bid red button and prepare for the
next line of takeoff.
131) Clears Ref and completely rebuilds all the formulas, including the source (template) formulas.
If this macro does not clear the problem, your file may be corrupted.
132) Find UPC will locate the UPC on tabs U, C or A. Place your cursor on the SEEK Code and press
this button to go to the item.
PART SEVEN
Entry Screen Memory Storage Area
137) GOTO Takeoff

Storage Area Button
138) Copy Range

into Memory
134) MEM 1 Storage 135) MEM 2 Storage
136) GOTO Takeoff

Screen Button 133) Last Entry MEM
133) This area of the ENTRY tab is where a copy of the prior takeoff is stored as it was sent to the
Takeoff Storage area. This is where the "GET PRIOR" Macro button retrieves you last takeoff from.
This screen is displayed when you go to the memory storage area after pressing the MEMORY button
on the Entry Screen. Only the information contained in columns BR through BW is stored here. Do
remember, that when you re-use them they replace the entire current takeoff Entry Area (Red on
Cream). The macro does not add to the takeoff, it replaces it. Therefore, get the copy first, then
add/modify it in the Entry Screen after the macro puts it in there. If you make any entries first, they
will be over-written. So, press the GET/USE M1, GET/USE M2 from the MEMORY Panel (Shown
above) or use the PRIOR button and modify them. However, you could simply copy just the part you
want and paste it where you want it. If you have modified the description or anything from columns
BX to CI, the memories will not know. The line number, drawing, etc is also not stored. However,
you can always reuse the information at row 138 which shows the prior lines information. You can
also press the "down arrow" button and reuse any takeoff below by copying it or the one shown at
128) above.
134) This is where the STORE M1 button stores the current takeoff at when you press it. This screen
is displayed when you go to this memory storage area after pressing the MEMORY button on the
Entry Screen. Press "GET/USE M1" in the Entry Screen to re-use this saved information in your
current estimate.
135) This is where the STORE M2 button stores the current takeoff at when you press it. This screen
is displayed when you go to this memory storage area after pressing the MEMORY button on the
Entry Screen. Press "GET/USE M2" in the Entry Screen to re-use this saved information in your
current estimate.
136) This elongated macro button simply takes you back to the Entry Screen. Press.
137) This elongated macro button takes you to the area where the takeoffs are stored. It is the same as
the down arrow button on the Entry Screen. At the takeoff storage area, you can look for takeoffs
similar to what you are going to do. Just copy the information from the size to the note field and paste
it into your takeoff to reuse it. Always remember that the formulas that were in the quantity field will
be just values and will not adjust for hanger counts. Copy an un-used quantity formula back onto the
hanger count you copied if you want the program to re-count the number of hangers for you.
138) This button allows you to highlight a range in one of the memories and save that range as name-
range. When you place your cursor at the top left corner, on the current estimate entry area, you can
press the macro button to paste the range you had highlighted in the mories. This macro builds a name
for the area you have highlighted, then the macro uses that name to
PART EIGHT
8. Estimate Output Storage Area, Lists and Files
247)
246) 244) 235) 229)

241) 238) 232)
236)
245) 243) 242) 240) 239) 233) 231) 230)

237) 234)
A PART ONE (RIGHT)
258) 255) 253)

251)
257) 256) 254) 252) 247)

250)
248)
249)
280)
PART TWO (CENTER)
B A
276)
278) 264) 260)
270)
275) 273) 268) 266) 263) 259)
279) 277) 274) 272) 271) 269) 267) 265) 262) 261)
PART THREE (LEFT) B

At row 326 the area that stores the estimate takeoff begins. This is the area where the New Screen
ships your takeoff too. You can get to this area quickly by pressing the "down arrow" button from the
Takeoff Screen. There will be times that you will want to review this area. You may remove the
window split and do whatever you need to as long as you follow some simple rules. Do NOT insert,
delete or sort rows. Do NOT copy entire rows (highlighting the vertical bar on the right edge of the
worksheet) . Do not copy the formulas to the right (right of column "CI") or to the left (left of column
"AJ") of your data. You CAN change data from "AJ" to "CI", just don't insert or delete rows or
destroy the formulas next to them. The formulas on both sides of the data below row 325 is to control
the reporting information and are required for the Reports to work. If you damage one of the
formulas, most can be repaired by simply copying another next to it. The information in the Estimate
Out Area has no formulas showing in Estimate Output Data. The values of the formulas are stored
here to conserve memory. The formulas used by the program are very large and require a lot of power
to run. By storing only values after the program gets the information you need, allows the file o be
smaller. The illustration used of the Estimate Output Area is divided into three parts. The first is the
extreme right side, then the middle and finally the extreme left side. The Down Arrow Macro will
take you to the extreme right (First view). Each view discusses the items contained within that view.
All items discussed in the Storage Areas are exported to the PIPEtalk estimate files.
Use Illustration Part One (Right) for Discussions 229 Through 246;
229) The total cost of field labor, shop labor and materials for each estimate line of takeoff is listed
in this column. The sum of this column is shown at the top of the Takeoff Screen. You may press the
yellow bar to return to the Takeoff Screen to see the total.
230) The shop labor cost for each estimate line of takeoff is listed in this column. The sum of this
column is shown at the top of the Takeoff Screen. You may press the yellow bar to return to the
Takeoff Screen to see the total.
231) The cost of materials for each estimate line of takeoff is listed in this column. The sum of this
232) The field labor cost for each estimate line of takeoff is listed in this column. The sum of this
233) The shop man-hours for each estimate line of takeoff is listed in this column. The sum of this
234) The field man-hours for each estimate line of takeoff is listed in this column. The sum of this
235) The unit material cost for each estimate line of takeoff is listed in this column.
236) The field unit man-hour for each estimate line of takeoff is listed in this column.
237) The crews name used to determine the wage rate for each estimate line of takeoff is shown in
this column.
238) The unit of measure (U/M) is indicated for the calculated quantity (Not the actual quantity you
entered). The actual quantity you enter in the entry area is recorded on the left side at 143) on the
illustration. The pre-determined Unit of Measure is indicated in the database of units on tabs U,
C and A and then displayed here by PIPEtalk.
239) The calculated quantity (Not the actual quantity you entered) is shown in this column. The
actual quantity you enter in the entry area is recorded on the left side at 143) , however; the pre-
determined conversion units are the ones used for the extensions. The conversion of the actual entry
quantity and the calculated quantity shown here is pre-determined by formulas in the database of units
on tabs U, C and A.
240) This column contains the description of the item PIPEtalk built from the parts it chose from the
data base of units contained in the tabs U, C and A. The units chosen for labor and materials
will match the material described here. This description will also contain your notes at the end. To
see the whole description, place your curser on the descriptions cell and look in the Microsoft edit
row at the top of the screen (If you have that feature turned on).
241) The notes that you entered during your takeoff to be combined with the description is shown.
242) This column indicates who will furnish the materials for the item.
243) The actual quantity you entered will be shown here.
244) The SEEK CODE you entered to locate the item in the data base is shown here.
245) The secondary size is indicated in this column.
246) The primary size is shown in this column.

Use Illustration Part Two (Center) for Discussions 247 Through 258;
247) If you find that you have to make some changes to the estimate have included some formulas at
the top right to assist you. Adjust the quantities (Both of them) and copy the formulas in the columns
they are shown in. Calculate to see the new extended value. Remember to remove the formulas when
you copy the estimate by copying and paste special (Value) r include the formats also by including a
paste special (Format).
248) The height that you used to adjust the multiplier is recorded in this column. This will give you a
feel for the high work verses lower installations.
249) Your indicator to include paint is shown in this column. It will be either N, Y or the paint
specification you wanted to include with the line of takeoff. This is a good place to document the
paint requirements you need as you do the estimate.
250) The heat trace requirement is shown here. ST usually means steam traced and ET usually
indicates electrically traced. There are more than one kind of electrical tracing-so be sure to track
exactly what you need.
251) As you have done for paint and tracing, insulation types and thickness should be documented.
This column indicates the type of insulation and thickness you entered. If you knew the information
when you entered the estimate, your entry should always include the insulation thickness. PIPEtalk
will make adjustments to the formulas based on the insulation thickness.
252) If you indicated that you wanted the work split between the field and shop, this column will
show your decision. Y for yessplit the estimate takeoff. Your choice will appear here.
253) The documentation of the line sources of to and from is essential to estimating, scheduling and
cost control. The pipe lines To information is stored here.
254) The pipe lines From information is stored here.

255) The pipe lines drawing information is stored here. You should always make it a habit to
indicate the revision number when you do the takeoff.
256) The line number of the estimate is shown in this column. It is also included in the takeoff
header that precedes each takeoff in the Estimates Output Storage Area.
257) The bid breakdown should have been planned before you began any takeoff. The bid should be
broke down into groups to met the bid format. You would have entered a code to capture the estimate
into bid groups. That code would show in this column. Do NOT sort inside of the PIPEtalk
worksheet. Copy the estimates value to another worksheet and THEN sort. You may use Excels
filter under data/filter/auto filter to find information. Release the auto filters before running
macros.
258) Descriptions that look easy to read are not the best ones to sort on for purchasing. This column
contains a purchasing description that would make more sense to a purchasing agent and a salesman
for pipe. PIPEtalk rearranges the description so that sorting on this description has more meaning.
Use Illustration Part Three (Left) for Discussions 259 Through 281;
259) The quantity of hangers is shown in this column. It is difficult to count each due to the many
type of materials that make up hangers. PIPEtalk handles this problem by saying that if it attaches
to the pipeeither around it or immediately under it (Shoe)it is counted as one.
260) The various steel shapes weights are shown in this column. They are a part of the shipping
weight.
261) The linear feet of pipe (Not pipe, fittings and valves) is provided in this column.
262) The approximate square feet of painted surface is shown in this column. It is a calculated value
based on the information provided in the units.
263) The approximate square feet of insulation using the thickness provided during the estimate
entry is included at this column.
264) The insulation equivalents in linear feet as calculated based on the setup screens settings.
265) An approximate calculated value of the gallons of fluid needed to fill the pipe one time is
included in this column. You will need to add for the cost of this material and for disposal. Do not
use this number on its face value. Always put a multiplier for the flush. If the system will be tested
by only a air blow, you will not need the fluid. Testing materials should be added for gaskets, etc.
266) This entry tries to capture the shipping weight of the pipe and steel to provide for an unknown
that is difficult to obtain. There are many items that still need the weights added. Use the number
shown with cautionuntil you have added any necessary information.
267) The total number of field and shop welds are shown for a quick allocation of welds to an
individual line of takeoff. The Report generator and the line heading at each takeoff will provide some
additional weld information.
268) The number of shop welds are shown for a quick allocation of welds to an individual line of
takeoff. The Report generator and the line heading at each takeoff will provide some additional weld
information.
269) The number of field welds are shown for a quick allocation of welds to an individual line of
takeoff. The Report generator and the line heading at each takeoff will provide some additional weld
information.
270) The source of the materials date of the price can be displayed here. Domestic or import is
indicated also. This helps make decisions on addition or subtraction of material cost during
negotiations.
271) The catalog part number (UPC) is provided to assist in any last minute updates.
272) The unit man-hour source is shown to assists in any error checking you may have to do.
273) The spool quantities are shown in this column. The type of unit shown depends on the method
you selected. The two methods are either by linier foot or by each.
274) The specification used to do each line of takeoff is shown. What specification is shown will
depend on the settings on the setup screen. The specification shown may be the specification you
were running the takeoff under or it may be the over-ride name you gave the specification.
275) Due to space limitations, the shop unit man-hour was not shown on the Entry Screen. It is
shown here as a matter of record.
276) The field raw man-hour unitbefore any modification by heights or over-rides is shown here
to check for errors if required.
277) The labor multiplier used to adjust the raw man-hour unit is shown as an audit to account for the
changes in the extended units.
278) Was for material cost codes; now used for the schedule interface. I have been employed by five
companies while developing this program and they all have their own codes. This code is now used
by the E3P6 program to determine which schedule C-GEN to use. If you intend to use the Primavera
import capabilities, you should leave this code alone.
279) You may pre-load labor cost code to capture cost for the various types of materials. You should
load your own codes into the data base. You may be able to use a search and replace method. The
code will show in the takeoff at this location. This code is pre-loaded on each unit to provide a
method to summarize the estimate into logical groups for the Report Generator. The sequence order
number of the takeoff shows at this location, too. You may find it an easy way to sort the estimate
into logical groups using the labor code group .
280) Press any of the elongated up arrow bars to return to the ENTRY tab. If you have removed the
screen split, the program will reformat the screen when it returns to the Entry Screen. If you have
Excels filter turned on to search for something, turn it off before running the macro. The macro has
not been written to check for the filter in the on position. The other arrows can move you left right
and up down. The longer the arrow, the further it will move you.
PART NINE
Templates
In the prior version of PIPEtalk, we had assemblies included. Assemblies were limited to small
quantities due to the main file size. In version 2.0, we have solved the problem by having the
assemblies in separate files. They are now called templates because they can be as large as the
current take-off. This section discusses the access and use of the templates. Pressing the TEMPL
button on the ENTRY tab will open the following:
TEMPLATE PANEL
GO TO THE TEMPLATE TITLES ON THE S TAB
05--USE TEMPLATE
04--QUANTITY
01--GOTO
03--TEMPLATE
NAME
PIPE SIZE (Used to
determine spacing)
02--FILE TITLE OR ENTER A
QUANTITY
New in version 6.0 was the template file just for hangers. Select the hanger. You can run one
template and then another in the same takeoff---just keep the total number of items less than 92. There
is a current estimate line counter above ENTER on the upper left of the ENTRY screen. If the takeoff
is more than 91 items, you will get an error. If you exceed 91 items using a template, your takeoff will
not be damaged. How often do you need more than 91 items for one line takeoff? Almost never, if
you takeoff one line at a time as you should do. Just a reminder: Macros cannot be reversed. If you
get the template.you have the templateno undo. However, you can copy the formulas over the
unwanted data and calculate to remove them.
Each template file has 200 templates that you can name. Each one of the 200 templates can have 91
parts (see the following information about the file). You can see each one of the templates you create
by pulling down a list on the Template Panel. The Template information shown on the Template
Panel are: GoTo buttons (01), Use Template Buttons (05), file names (02), which one of the 200
templates inside the template file you have selected (03) and the quantity you want (04) to multiply the
that template by. A discussion of these items follows.
01) If you wish to go to the template file and add or modify a template to that file, just press the GoTo
button on the left of the name of the file where it is stored. PIPEtalk will take you to the file you
selected and open it. Be sure to close it using the macro buttons to close that is inside the Template
File.
02) Each Template file has an assigned name for the macros to locate it. However, you can write a
name or note here so you remember what is inside the Template Files. The PIPEtalk Template Files
are simply named Templates 1 > 8. The name you enter here is not used to re-name the file, just tell
you what group of information you have placed inside the file.
03) As mentioned, each one of the 200 templates can have 91 parts. You can see each one of the
templates you create by pulling down a list here. When you modify or add a template you should run
the macros inside that file. That macro will update the list here. If you do not use the macros
provided, the file will save, close and NOT update the program file. So, use the provided macros to
open and close the Template Files.
04) Each template is created as if the quantity is one (1). By placing a quantity in the cells next to the
Template Files, you will be multiplying that number times the units of the template. Thus, you will
have the quantity of the template (This is the same as a small assembly in version 1.0.0but can now
have many more parts). Any pipe fitting that is calculated as less than one, will become a quantity of
one. As example, if you take a line off at 30 LF and you had a vent valve at .01 each (One every 100
lf) in your template, you will get one each for the vent valve. Even 10 feet would get you a vent valve
added. The least pipe item you will get when it is listed is one. This is not so for civil, and structural
steel. Your resultant for non-pipe will be what ever the calculation is..26 CY of concrete, 1.3 CY of
dirt..
05) This button Uses the Template, calculates it and places it inside the main program file. The
macro will ask if you wish to calculate the entire file of just what you are placing inside it. If you
want to see the takeoff status at the top of the Entry screen correct mathematically, calculate the entire
file. If you want to speed up the process and pick another template or add to it, simply tell it not to
calculate the entire file.
The image that follows is of the Template File number one (1). At the top is a split header. Inside this
header are six (6) header macro buttons. Use these buttonsnot Windows/Excel menus. It is safe to
use Windows/Excel menus---put no program update or calculations will be executed. Make your
entries on the cream and red areas as with other parts of the program.
As with other files and screens, NEVER insert/delete rows or columns or use move.
Temp06) Only Close File Temp07) Save/Close File
Temp11) Calculate File

Temp14) Description
(Calculated field)
Temp10) Down One Template
Temp13) Pull Down Name

(Calculated field) Temp09) Up One Template
Temp12) GoTo Buttons Temp08) Top of File

Temp ##) =Template discussion items.
Temp 06) This header button is used when you just view the file to make a decision or do not want to
save the changes you made. Press it to Close and Return to PIPEtalk. Do not used Windows to close
Template Files. The macros that update PIPEtalk will not be executed and thus PIPEtalk pull-downs
will not be updated. If you want to save your changes use the next button.
Temp 07) Use this header button to close the file and save your changes. You should always use this
macro to save the file and update PIPEtalk .
Temp 08) This header button is a fast way to go to the top of the file. Use it to quickly see the GoTo
buttons.
Temp 09) This header button is a fast way to go to see the template above the one your are viewing.
Use it to go up one template. Example: You are in Template 006 and want to copy Template 005.
Simply press this button which is shown in the header all the time. It will take you up one template.
To GoTo Template 004, press twice (Run macro two times).
Temp 10) This header button is a fast way to go to see the template below the one your are viewing.
Use it to go down one template. Example: You are in Template 006 and want to copy Template 007.
Simply press this button which is shown in the header all the time. It will take you down one
template. To GoTo Template 008, press twice (Run macro two times).
Temp 11) This header button will calculate the Template File.
Temp 12) These buttons are GoTo buttons. Press to go to the template you want to review or
modify.
Temp 13) This is the dropdown name that will be used at the Entry Screen inside the main program.
This a calculated field. Do not edit this. The program will calculate and revise this for you. Make
your entries on the cream and red areas at the individual templates. Use the GoTo buttons to find the
template.
Temp 14) This a calculated field showing an expanded description of the dropdown list name. It
does not show inside the main program. It is for your use inside this file to make decisions. Do not
edit this. The program will calculate and revise this for you. Make your entries on the cream and red
areas at the individual templates. Use the GoTo buttons to find the template.
TEMPLATE FILE 1
TEMPLATE FILE 1 FIRST TEMPLATE
Template one includes vents and drains and steam traps. The TEST SPEC button has been removed
from the Entry Screen and the test is now the first template in this file. You can now build test for
your specs that are tuned to the type of materials. Run the TEST SPEC to see what parts of a
specification is missing. It gets a sample of the pipe parts to see if the materials are inside the data
base.
TEMPLATE FILE 2
Template File Two (2) contains many small pipe support steel arrangements. These were designed by
a major Engineering Estimating Program. Revise them to meet your requirements. The macro buttons
will split the screen for you so you can view your drawings. ALWAYS USE the macro buttons. Do
not create your own window views in this file. This is a good place to see how the program handles
structural steel Seek Codes. More templates found in Template File 2 are shown on the next page.
The GoTo buttons are on the left of the individual templates. Press them to GoTo the template to
modify or view.
TEMPLATE FILE 3
Template File Three (3) provides a few simple basic concrete shapes that are used for pipe supporting.
Review and modify as you desire. Copy one and add more if you wish. We have not split the screen
as we did on the steel when you press the GoTo buttons. Because of the way the way the macros have
to be wrote, it is better here to allow you to add without a screen split. If you wish to view a sketch,
just select the worksheet tab with the sketches on them. As with the steel, this is a good place to see
how PIPEtalk Does Concrete. On the next page is a typical concrete foundation. You can see the
SEEK CODES used and the quantities. The sketch for that foundation is also shown.
TEMPLATE 4 150# SYSTEM (Shown)

TEMPLATE 5 300# SYSTEM (Templates Similar to 150# Except 300# Valves)
TEMPLATE 6 600# SYSTEM (Templates Similar to 150# Except 600# Valves)
For a typical Petro-chem plant, a study has been done. This study determined how many fittings and
valves were in the plant per size of pipe. That information is shown in the Pipe Configurations
shown on the next page. The templates contained in Template File Four (4) are for a 150 pound
systemCarbon steel, 304 Stainless and 316 Stainless valve materials and the Condition Book. A
study was used to create these templates. If you do not know much about a system but must create an
estimate, use these templates. You can also modify the template after it is inside PIPEtalk . If the
template shows a reducer you do not need, just type a zero for the quantity. It will not be in the
resulting estimate storage area when the program moves the current estimate to storage. The valves
for 300 pound systems are in Template Five (5) and for 600 pound, Template Six (6). Review the
following, they are also included inside Template Files 4, 5 and 6.
The type of valve materials are shown on the next page.

PART TEN
Extra Work Order Form
A sample of the Extra Work Order Worksheet Form is shown. The Extra Work Order Worksheet
Form shown in this chapter has been highlighted to show the major areas of this form. The major
areas are; 1) The form header, 2) the change description, 3) the equipment rental, 4) the labor used 5)
the materials and sales tax, 6) the subcontractors list and cost and 7) the schedule impact. These are
then all totaled at the 8) Summary area of the Extra Work Order Worksheet Form. Page two
accumulates the materials that dont have room on the first page. The second page also gives you
room to add miscellaneous materials not from the database.
A file called PIPEtalk EWO Import Template has been provided for your use. Open that file by
pressing the Create EWO button on the Entry Upper Screens lower right corner. Read the simple
instructions on the first page inside the EWO Form file. The template file contains a micro that will
take the values from the EWO form inside PIPEtalks main files Entry Screen current takeoff and
transfer them to the PIPEtalk EWO Import Template. It changes the formulas to values in the import
template for you. This would be difficult due to the merged cells on the EWO form. This also allows
you to email or organize the separate EWO file without having to have the main PIPEtalk file. If you
have adjusted the template, save the new template EWO Form by using the windows File/Save
leave the file name as PIPEtalk EWO Import Template.xls for a template.
The information in PIPEtalk in the estimate storage area on the Entry worksheets bottom, is not
included in the EWO forms import data. Only the current takeoff (active one) is imported.
Dont forget to read your contract for the project. Create an EWO form that addresses the contract
terms. Be careful not to compound percentages. Adjust the PIPEtalk EWO Import Template file to
suit your needs.
Your legal rights may change when you exceed approximately 7% of the value of your original
projects value, you should ask for a project extension in time and cost for overheads. That should be
done in a letter to your client with the Extra Work Order Log showing the values have exceeded 7% of
your contract. Check with your companys cost engineer for guidance for submittals for extras. If
necessary see your corporate lawyer for guidance to legal contract questions. Project Managers are
not lawyers and lawyers are not Project managers---you may need both for the best advice.
The welders have been linked to the welding machine time. If you are using eight packs or similar
equipment, you may want to change the link and title for that equipment. The overtime hours are
subtracted from the total hours. You have to determine how many of the total hours were overtime
and make those entriesthen calculate to determine the regular hours. Set your wage rates to match
your contract values. The equipment rates may also be set in your contract. I cannot emphasize the
importance of reading your contract. Small tool markup may be in your wage rates or calculated as a
percent. Check your taxes and put the correct percentage. Shipping cost should be added in the
second column(right) on page two of the form. Dont forget that expensive air freight you may have
had to do to take care of the problem you encountered.
After the work is done, attach copies of your purchase orders -- if that is required. You may plug in
the actual unit prices to revise your EWO. That would allow your purchase order to match the unit
prices shown. The original EWO request would have PIPEtalk prices. The revised request would have
the actuals. The better EWO in court contains the actual material prices with copies of the purchase
orders. The best is a signed purchase order!
I have been involved in many project settlements. The worse thing you can do is leave the schedule
impact empty. If the extra did impact the critical path, say so now. DO NOT LEAVE THE
SCHEDULE IMPACT BLANK. Leaving the project impact to be discussed at the end of the project
is an error many managers make. The space for schedule impact is on almost all extra work order
formsthere is a reason it is there. Be sure to get the approval signatures required BEFORE you do
the work. Save yourself from the legal expense, get the approval now before you do the work.
We have included the ConcoPhillips EWO form we have created for them inside the EWO Template
file. This should give you an idea of the forms you can create from PIPEtalks macro imported
information.
PAGE ONE OF THE CHANGE ORDER FORM

XYZ FIELD AUTHORIZED CHANGE ORDER
Customer Order No. xxx
Change No. yyy
Client: CLIENT NAME HERE

1) HEADER
02/02/03 Date:
Job No: P-XXXX R0
Job: PROJECT NAME HERE
Line: LINE 1 Drawing: DWG 1
Work Started: 11/01/02 Work Completed: 11/01/02 Sheet: 1 of 2
QTY MATERIAL / PO / INVOICE UNIT PRICE AMOUNT DESCRIPTION OF WORK
8.000% (8% x Labor) Consumable supplies and $60,257.00 $4,820.56
welding material
100 PIPE (20'JT) A106 B CS PE SML S/40 1in Line TEST $1.45 $145.00 Example using specification test button
10
10
90 ELL LONG RADIUS A105 FS SW 3M S/40 1in Line TEST
45 ELL LONG RADIUS A105 FS SW 3M S/40 1in Line TEST
$2.13
$3.07
$21.30
$30.70
2) DESCRIPTION OF WORK
10 TEE A105 FS SW 3M S/40 1in Line TEST $3.18 $31.80
10 TEE REDUCING A105 FS SW 3M S/40 1in x0.75in TEST $6.88 $68.80 EQUIPMENT & TOOLS
10 FLANGE SLIP ON A105 FS SO RF 150# 1in Line TEST $4.02 $40.20 Welding Machines 591.2 @ $6.50 / hour $3,842.80
10 $3.87
B&G SET STUD BLTS A193 GRB7,A194 GR2H HEX NUTS 1/8" COMPRESSED $38.70
RING SPIR WIND FLEX CG CS RING 150# 1in Line TEST @ / hour $0.00
10 REDUCER CONC A105 FS SW 3M S/40 1in x0.75in TEST $3.67 $36.70 @ / day $0.00
10
10
REDUCER ECC A105 FS SW 3M S/40 1in x0.75in TEST
COUPLING FULL A105 FS SW 3M S/40 1in Line TEST
NEED
$1.24
$0.00
$12.40
3) EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS @
@
/ day
/
$0.00
10 NIPPLE A106 B CS THR SML XH 1in x 6in Lg TEST $1.48 $14.80 @ /

10 FIELD BUTT WELD A234 WPB CS BW S/40 1in Line TEST $0.00 $0.00 TOTAL EQUIPMENT & TOOLS 3,842.80
100 PIPE (20'JT) A106 B CS PE SML S/40 2in Line TEST $1.84 $184.00 LABOR
10 90 ELL LONG RADIUS A105 FS SW 3M S/40 2in Line TEST $6.78 $67.80 ST OT CRAFT ST OT
10 45 ELL LONG RADIUS A105 FS SW 3M S/40 2in Line TEST $8.78 $87.80 170.0 1.0 Pipe Foreman @ 41.00 51.00 /hr. 7,021.00
10 TEE A105 FS SW 3M S/40 2in Line TEST $9.44 $94.40 541.8 0.0 Pipefitter @ 40.00 50.00 /hr. 21,672.00
10 TEE REDUCING A105 FS SW 3M S/40 2in x1.5in TEST $19.90 $199.00 590.2 1.0 Pipe Welder @ 40.00 50.00 /hr. 23,658.00
10 FLANGE SLIP ON A105 FS SO RF 150# 2in Line TEST $4.02 $40.20 385.3 0.0 Pipe Helper @ 20.00 30.00 /hr. 7,706.00
10 $7.69
B&G SET STUD BLTS A193 GRB7,A194 GR2H HEX NUTS 1/8" COMPRESSED RING $76.90
SPIR WIND FLEX CG CS 0.0
RING 150#
Carpenter
2in Line
Foreman
TEST @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 REDUCER CONC A105 FS SW 3M S/40 2in x1.5in TEST $7.88 $78.80 0.0 Carpenter @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 REDUCER ECC A105 FS SW 3M S/40 2in x1.5in TEST NEED $0.00 0.0 Carpenter Helper @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 COUPLING FULL A105 FS SW 3M S/40 2in Line TEST $4.20 $42.00 0.0 Ironworker Foreman @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 NIPPLE A106 B CS THR SML XH 2in x 6in Lg TEST $2.54 $25.40 0.0 Ironworker @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 FIELD BUTT WELD A234 WPB CS BW S/40 3in Line TEST $0.00 $0.00 0.0 Ironworker Helper @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
100
10
5) MATERIAL COST
PIPE (20'JT) A53 B CS BE ERW S/40 8in Line TEST
90 ELL LONG RADIUS A234 WPB CS BW S/40 8in Line TEST
$9.22
$31.81
$922.00
$318.10
0.0
0.0
Laborer Foreman
Laborer
@ 40.00
@ 40.00
50.00
50.00
/hr.
/hr.
10 45 ELL LONG RADIUS A234 WPB CS BW S/40 8in Line TEST $22.68 $226.80 0.0 Operators Foreman @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10
10
TEE A234 WPB CS BW S/40 8in Line TEST
TEE REDUCING A234 WPB CS BW S/40 8in x6in TEST
$46.70
$60.79
$467.00
$607.90
0.0
0.0
4) LABOR COST
Operators
Millwright Foreman
@ 40.00
@ 40.00
50.00
50.00
/hr.
/hr.
10 This
FLANGE SLIP ON row now
A105 FS summarizes
SO RF Page two$17.24
150# 8in Line TEST $172.40 0.0 Millwrights @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 of the
B&G SET STUD BLTSEWO form which
A193 GRB7,A194 GR2H HEXhas $30.74
NUTS 1/8" COMPRESSED RING$307.40
SPIR WIND FLEX CG CS 0.0
RING 150# Shop8in Line TEST @ 50.00
Labor 65.00 /hr.
10 REDUCER CONC A234 WPB CS BW S/40 8in x6in TEST $14.63 $146.30 2.0 Prj Manager @ 60.00 75.00 /hr. 120.00
10 additional materials .
REDUCER ECC A234 WPB CS BW S/40 8in x6in TEST $21.20 $212.00 2.0 Q.C. @ 40.00 50.00 /hr. 80.00
10 COUPLING FULL A105 FS SW 3M S/40 3in Line TEST $20.70 $207.00 @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 FIELD BUTT WELD A234 WPB CS BW S/40 8in Line TEST $0.00 $0.00 Total Man-hours are @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 CS S/40 SPOOL HANDLING 1.00in Line LGTH=10LF $0.05 $0.50 @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 CS S/40 SPOOL HANDLING 6.00in Line LGTH=10LF $0.15 $1.50 now shown here.@ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 FLANGE BLIND A105 FS RF 150# 1in Line TEST $4.94 $49.40 @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
10 FLANGE BLIND A105 FS RF 150# 6in Line TEST $13.44 $134.40 @ 40.00 50.00 /hr.
Material Cost From Page Two $5,102.68 @ 40.00 50.00 /day
TOTAL MATERIAL COST 15,032.64 1691.3 2.0 TL HR=1693.3 TOTAL LABOR 60,257.00
PLUS TAXES @ 8.250% 1,240.19
TOTAL COST MATERIAL & TAXES 16,272.83
TOTAL COST IMPACT** 2.00
SUBCONTRACTS TOTAL COST MATERIAL 16,272.83
6)SUBCONTRACTOR
Material Cost From Page Two
Insulation 5,000.00
0.00
TOTAL COST SUBCONTRACTORS
TOTAL COST EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
5,000.00
3,842.80
COST 0.00
0.00 PLUS 10.00% OVERHEAD
25,115.63
2,576.82
TOTAL SUBCONTRACTS 5,000.00 8) SUMMARY OF COST 28,344.98
SCHEDULE IMPACT HOURS DAYS PLUS 10.00% PROFIT 2,834.50
2.00 BILLING AMOUNT WITHOUT LABOR 31,179.48
7)SCHEDULE IMPACT AMOUNT BILLED FOR LABOR 67,792.00
TOTAL IMPACT ** 2.00 TOTAL BILLING 98,971.48
Authorized / Verified By
PURCHASER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Supervisor Company
By
** - If impact amount can be determined at time this change was enacted, otherwise
impact amounts will be determined at a later date referencing this change order
and the percentage, hours, and/or lump sum amounts agreed to in this change.
PAGE TWO OF THE CHANGE ORDER FORM

XYZ FIELD AUTHORIZED CHANGE ORDER
Customer Order No. xxx
Change No. yyy
Client: CLIENT NAME HERE Date: 02/02/03

Job No: P-XXXX R0
Job: PROJECT NAME HERE
Line: LINE 1 Drawing: DWG 1
Work Started: 11/01/02 Work Completed: 11/01/02 Sheet: 2 of 2
QTY MATERIAL / PO / INVOICE UNIT PRICE AMOUNT QTY MATERIAL / PO / INVOICE UNIT PRICE AMOUNT
10 FLANGE BLIND A105 FS RF 150# 14in Line TEST $108.70 $1,087.00 10 Non-estimated items $10.00 $100.00
10 SOC-O-LET SP97 FS SW 3M S/40 2in on 6in TEST $4.54 $45.40 $0.00
10 CAP A105 FS SW 3M S/40 1in Line TEST $2.11 $21.10 $0.00
10 CAP A234 WPB CS BW S/40 8in Line TEST $10.07 $100.70 $0.00
10 CAP A234 WPB CS BW S/40 14in Line TEST NEED $0.00 $0.00
10 COUPLING HALF A105 FS THR 3M S/40 1in Line TEST NEED $0.00 $0.00
10 COUPLING HALF A105 FS THR 3M S/40 2in Line TEST NEED $0.00 $0.00
10 COUPLING FULL A105 FS SW 3M S/40 1in Line TEST $1.24 $12.40 $0.00
10 COUPLING FULL A105 FS SW 3M S/40 2in Line TEST $4.20 $42.00 $0.00
10 SWAGE CONC A234 WPB CS BW SML S/40 1in x0.75in TEST NEED $0.00 $0.00
10 SWAGE CONC A234 WPB CS BW SML S/40 2in x1.5in TEST $6.34 $63.40 $0.00
10 BOLT UP 150# (LABOR ONLY) 2in Line $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
10 BOLT UP 150# (LABOR ONLY) 6in Line $0.00 $0.00 $0.00
10 FLANGE BACKUP A395 DI 150# 6in Line $15.50 $155.00 $0.00
10 WELD-O-LET SP97 FS BW S/40 2in on 12in $4.74 $47.40 $0.00
10 WELD-O-LET SP97 FS BW S/40 6in on 12in $44.32 $443.20 $0.00
10 $7.69
B&G SET STUD BLTS A193 GRB7,A194 GR2H HEX NUTS 1/8" COMPRESSED RING$76.90
SPIR WIND FLEX CG CS RING 150# 2in Line $0.00
10 $24.66
RING SPIR WIND FLEX CG CS RING 150# 6in Line $0.00
10 $130.00 RING
B&G SET STUD BLTS A193 GRB7,A194 GR2H HEX NUTS 1/8" COMPRESSED $1,300.00
SPIR WIND FLEX CG CS RING 150# 24in Line $0.00
10 NEED
RING SPIR WIND FLEX CG CS RING 600# 2in Line $0.00
100 PIPE (20'JT) A53 B CS BE ERW S/40 6in Line $6.14 $614.00 $0.00
6 90 ELL LONG RADIUS A234 WPB CS BW S/40 6in Line $16.91 $101.46 $0.00
2 45 ELL LONG RADIUS A234 WPB CS BW S/40 6in Line $13.42 $26.84 $0.00
1 TEE A234 WPB CS BW S/40 6in Line $25.50 $25.50 $0.00
1 TEE REDUCING A234 WPB CS BW S/40 6in x4in $31.81 $31.81 $0.00
1 REDUCER CONC A234 WPB CS BW S/40 6in x4in $11.00 $11.00 $0.00
1 REDUCER ECC A234 WPB CS BW S/40 6in x4in $14.09 $14.09 $0.00
6 GALV-HANGER CLEVIS FIG 260 W/ROD&ATTACH 6in Line $13.71 $82.26 $0.00
10 GALV-FIG 137 HANGER STANDARD U-BOLT W/4 NUTS 2in Line $2.22 $22.20 $0.00
17 GALV-FIG 137 HANGER STANDARD U-BOLT W/4 NUTS 1in Line $1.71 $29.07 $0.00
5 GALV-HANGER DBBL CLAMP FIG 295 W/ROD&ATTACH 8in Line$80.67 $403.35 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
$0.00 $0.00 $0.00
TOTAL MATERIAL COST ABOVE 5,002.68 TOTAL MATERIAL COST ABOVE 100.00
TOTAL MATERIAL COST THIS SHEET 5,102.68
APPROVAL SIGNATURE AREA IS SHOWN ON PAGE ONE

CHAPTER THREE
HELP
This book provides you will the most up-to-date help. Use the HELP within the PIPEtalk
file if you do not have this book handy. The HELP buttons are placed in all the
important locations.
PART ELEVEN
The HELP Index Panel
1) HELP Listed by
Subject
2) Recently Added
To Program Not in
Book
Press the HELP button to bring up the HELP. The HELP that is shown may be the one you are
looking for. If not, select the HELP INDEX button on the HELP that did show. Pick the subject and
press the appropriate tab on the panel. The screen you are on may also has buttons that will take you
to the HELP you are wanting. The instructions are broken down into each tab and then the items on
them may be further broken down.
1) Press one of these buttons to bring up the HELP you desire.
2) Because the program is being modified every day, some items you see may not be in the Instruction
Book. Here, we will list the newest items that are not in the book.
The next section will discuss each of these subject buttons.

PART TWELVE
Help Instructions By Subject
The Help Instructions are located at many places in the worksheet. By pressing the HELP Index, you
will present a list of subjects that can be accessed for help:
SETUP
4) Setup Discussion
5) Further Setup Discussions By Subjects
4) A discussion of Setup is on the Setup HELP panel.

5) Further Setup Discussions By SubjectsPress the button on the Setup HELP panel to read
the contents:
Furnished by Line#
Spec Files Vendors
Multipliers Key Word$ Add
Checks Shop/Field
Lbr$ Multiplier Weld Count
Insulation MHR Source
MTL Setup Special
Entry Tab Wage Rates
ENTRY
6) Entry Tab Discussion
6) A discussion of the Entry Tab is on the Entry Tab HELP panel.
7) Deleted. Reports are now inside the estimate files.

UNIVERSAL
8) Universal Tab Discussion
8) A discussion of the Universal Tab is on the Universal HELP panel.

CARBON STEEL
9) Carbon Steel Discussion
9) A discussion of the Carbon Steel Tab is on the Carbon HELP panel.

ALLOYS
10) Alloy Tab Discussion
10) A discussion of the Alloy Tab is on the Alloy HELP panel.

PRICES
11) Material Price

Discussion
11) A discussion of the Material Price Tab is on the Material Price HELP panel.
TEMPLATE
12) Template Discussion
12) A discussion of the Template is on the Template HELP panel.

SPECS
13) Specs Discussion
13) A discussion of the Spec is on the Spec HELP panel.

MTL FILES
14) Matl Files Discussion
14) A discussion of the Matl Files is on the Matl Files HELP panel.
SPEC FILES
15) Spec Files Discussion
15) A discussion of the Spec Files is on the Spec Files HELP panel.
EST FILES
16a)Estimate File
Discussion
16a) A discussion of the Estimate Files is on the Estimate Files HELP panel.
EWO
16b) EWO Discussion
16b) A discussion of the EWO Files is on the EWO HELP panel.

CHAPTER FOUR
The Estimate Files
The estimate file provides you a copy of the estimate , code/WBS and reports. In prior
issues, the reports were run from inside the main program file. This is no longer correct.
All cost and material reports are run from within the estimate files at this time.
PART THIRTEEN
The Estimate File and Reports
New estimate files are now created, deleted, copied and renamed via the new Titles file. Sending the
information to the estimate file is controlled by the Estimate Control Panel on the ENTRY tab. You
will find many methods to access the Titles file throughout the program. One way is to press the
either EST, SPEC or MTL FILES button at the top of the S tab.
Another way to go to the Titles file is to press the EST FILES or SPEC FILES buttons on the
ENTRY tab:
Finally, you can open the Estimate Control Panel and press the big blue button at the top right.
In addition to creating, deleting, renaming, coping and opening estimates, the new Titles file allows
you to name the file whatever you want to. Prior issues of PIPEtalk required estimates to use pre-
named files. In version 6.0, you name the file, in addition, you can have up to 65,000 files controlled
by the Titles file.
Windows Explorer should not be used to create, delete or rename the estimate files. The only way for
PIPEtalk to transfer needed information to the newly created file is via the macros. The path way is
updated when the Title files macros run.
The Titles file will not allow you to rename or delete a file which you are using in the PIPEtalk
program. That is why the PIPEtalk program must be open to do these functions. The file also watches
for file name duplicates. The macros will transfer the project information to the estimate file too.
You need to understand that the actual estimate data is NOT handled by the Titles file. It only handles
the files naming, renaming, deleting and coping of the files, not the transfer of the estimate data to the
files that Titles created and controls. This is a screen shot of the estimates Titles file:
Just Update titles will do only that function. It will open the file and revise the titles you have entered
next to the file. You have highlighted.
Open and Update will update the titles and open the highlighted file for you.
To use the rename function. Under the ENTER OLD FILE NAME title, select the file that you want
to rename from the Pull down list. In the cell to the right, enter the new file name. Then press the
RENAME button. The micro will check the program file to see if the file is in use, if not, it will
rename the file for you. If it is in use, the macro will tell you it cannot perform the name change.
To use the copy function. Under the ENTER OLD FILE NAME title, select the file that you want to
copy from the Pull down list. In the cell to the right, enter the new file name. Then press the COPY
button.
When you use the delete function. The micro will check the program file to see if the file is in use, if
not, it will delete the file for you. If it is in use, the macro will tell you it cannot perform the delete.
After estimate data is transferred to the selected estimate file via the Estimate Control Panel, you may
want to go to (open) the estimate file. You have three primary ways to access the estimate file. A
fourth is macro driven when you update the estimate file. The macro will ask if you want to open the
file after you send information.
1) You can open the Titles file and select the file you want to go to and press the OPEN/UPDATE
button:
2) You can select the Estimate Panel from the ENTRY tab and press OPEN/GOTO:
3) You can select the small dark green button right of the estimate name on the ENTRY tab to open
the estimate file. The yellow button allows you to jump to another open window.
ESTIMATE FILE ORGANIZATION

Each estimate file is divided into five tabs; estimate, codes, estimate file cost, estimate file cost by size
and line list. The last three tabs listed are colored in blue. The estimate and code tab information
comes from the main program. The blue tabs are calculated reports from the information in the
estimate file. Lets look first at the estimate tab. Because the estimate tab is so wide, I have divided it
into three views.
This view begins with the code on the left and ends with the hangers on the right. In the extreme left
top corner is information that is needed for macros, do not remove them. There are also formulas
down the left edge needed for macros. The macro will place these formulas/values when it runs, you
do not have to worry about fixing any of them that are missing if you ad a row. The dotted line at row
10 shows a one (1) on the left side which indicates the first line of takeoff for your estimate. At K10
you see a group of information about the line. This group of line information will show up on the line
list tab under the title called Schedule Information. That report is sorted by the line number.
PART 1/3 (LEFT SIDE) OF THE ESTIMATE TAB

The center view of the estimate tab is shown below. The macro buttons at the top right calculate,
jump to the main estimate file (when open), clears the data, close/return/save to the main file (when
open) and allows you to re-use a line of takeoff inside the main estimate files current takeoff area
(when open).
You should see title information about your project in the center areaclient & project. This
information comes from the Setup tabs estimate list in the main program file. The totals from the
estimate file are copied to the Setup estimate when you open it from the Setup list macro, so you will
know that the file contains data (not empty). There are times that you have a line of takeoff done and
wish to reuse it.
To re-use a line, open PIPEtalk & this file and place your cursor on the line name you want to re-use.
The line name is in column "AI" and is preceded by dashed lines. After you place your cursor in
column AI, press RE-USE THIS LINE IN ESTIMATE button.
Changed, See Above
PART 2/3 (CENTER) OF THE ESTIMATE TAB

The right side of the estimate tab contains the extended cost and hours. Only the values are included
in the estimate file. Remember that the formulas are removed when the estimate leaves the current
takeoff area and is move to storage on the ENTRY tab in the main program file. The ability to change
wage rates and recalculate would have to be added by you if you want to change the estimate extended
cost and hours here.
PART 3 (RIGHT SIDE) OF THE ESTIMATE TAB

The Estimate File Cost tab has three reports. The first one is the cost report, cost by code and a
Concrete Shapes Report. The first two are covered under the BUILD MATERIAL GROUP REPORT
macro. The Concrete is created by pressing the GOTO CONCRETE SHAPES REPORT and running
the report, after selecting the settings you want to use. The top of this report has changed in version
4.1 to this:
You can now do a WBS report by area, over-ride the wage rate & shop rates and add % for indirect
cost. The header has changed to the above shot, but here is a list of the items covered in this report:
In the current version, crew information is now included in the report:

The second part of the report on the Estimate File Cost tab organizes the same estimate by the cost
codes. Generally the totals will be the same, some rounding may make the reports vary by a few
cents. Every effort was made to have both reports have the same resulting totals.
The CONCRETE SHAPES REPORT is on the same tab and is reached by pressing the go to concrete
shapes macro button. At the top you can set your filter and make adjustments to the rates:
The ESTIMATE FILE COST BY SIZE tab provides a comprehensive list by size of pipe parts
quantities and cost The summary of all the sizes goes thru 70 inch (1750) pipe. The image below is
thru 24. You can also choose to include spools or not to include them. The report now hides unused
sizes when you run BUILD REPORT. In addition, you can jump to a pipe size by selecting the size
button. As with other reports, you can filter on the WBS code. In addition, you can select the pipe
spec you want to analysis, change the whole report to another wage rate for the field and shop and
provide a percent for indirect. If you want to display all the rows, press the SHOW ROWS button.
The following is from the prior version and has been changed in version 4.1 as shown above.
Below the summary is a listing of details for each size pipe, from .25 thru 70. The amount of details
provides a very long report. You may want to select the sheets to print, rather printing the entire
report. The list of parts provided by this reports details is as follows:
P01BOLTUPS P02--CONTROL VALVES P03--DEMO

P04--EXPANSION JTS P05--PIPE FITGS (w/flgs) P06--HANGER STEEL
P07HANGERS P08HANGERS P09--HOSES
P10HOSES P11INSTR P12--NIPPLES
P13WELDOLETS P14--UN-CLASSIFIED P15--PIPE
P16--STRAINERS/TRAPS P17SPOOLS P18--STRESS/TESTING
P19--TIE-INS P20TUBING P21--TUBE FITTINGS
P22--VALVES(w/O Control) P23--F.WELDS (FBW) P23S--S.WELDS (SBW)
P24--FLR/WALL PENTR P25BENDS P26--HALF CPLG
P27--FULL CPLG P28NDT P29--REDUCING FITTGS
This is a sample of the (.25) pipe takeoff:

The final tab in the estimate file is the LINE LIST. The estimate data is sorted by the line number,
then the top row, which has the summary of the line is extracted along with the total cost and hours for
each line. Press the blue button to run this report. You will have to define your print range at this
time. In version 6.0, you have two reports. The new report provides a report by line list. This helps
when you need a report by spool sheet.
In prior versions, if a line is entered twice, the report may become confused and provide the wrong
totals. In version 6.0 this problem was corrected. The revised macro now creates a unique list and
provides a correct cost report for the Line List Report and the new Drawing List Report. The revised
buttons are shown below.
CHAPTER FIVE
The U (Universal) Tab

Many estimating units do not require a specification filter to find them. These are known
as Universal Items because they are used universally by all piping. No specification filter
is needed to bring them into the estimate takeoff. These Universal Items are stored on
the U Universal Tab. PIPEtalk knows which items are stored on the associated
worksheets. You may expand the Universal data base as you find items you need. You
do not have to add the item to the Specification Validation List because the specifications
do not use Universal Items. It would be a good idea to add the new SEEK CODE to the
SEEK CODE list in the separate SEEK CODE file. Consistency is part of estimating.
PART FOURTEEN
The Universal Sheet Arrangement
GoTo The Material Groups By Pressing These Buttons
NEW: Press the Index The Price Now button to adjust the prices.
Column Numbers Referenced by The Discussions in This Chapter A
DISCUSSION OF TAB "U"

NEW: Press the INDEX THE PRICE NOW button to adjust old prices. The price will be adjusted
based on the date that the original price was entered. The index is stored on the P tab at the top
right. . You must have an old price in column 18 and a valid old date in column 19. At this time the
prices can be indexed thru the end of 2010.
The upper left contains the price indexing information. The date the data has been indexed to is
shown is yellow/gold, month, then year. .

The Universal Tab contains many different types of materials. They are grouped into ten groups. This
organization helps when you want to locate types of materials and if the price updating is coming from
the P tab or not. The groups on Tab U are Main, Instrumentation, Valves, Pipe Supports By
Figure Number, Pipe Support Steel Priced From The P Tab, Pipe Support For Hangers Priced on
Tab U, Equipment, Concrete, Earthwork and Structural Steel For Buildings. Just press the GoTo
Buttons along the top of the Universal Tab to find the group you want. A copy of the headers of the
ten groups are at the end of Part Fifteen (This One). On the U tab, each group contains a range
name and various formulas. Do NOT delete range names or tamper with formulas used by the
Macros. The storage areas of the range names and formulas are clearly marked.
Row five contains some of the formulas that are used on this tab. When changes are made to this tab
or items added to the database, you would press the yellow "Reset ALL" button. This Macro will copy
the formula in the second column, row five to update the UPC (Unit Price Catalog Number). DO
NOT DAMAGE THE FORMULAS IN THAT ROW. This Macro will copy the formula, calculate
and then remove the formulas leaving only the values. This helps keep the program running fast and
the file small. If you don't run the Macro, make sure the SEEK CODE is correct so that PIPEtalk can
find the new item.
To create a new item in the Universal Items list, it is best to copy a similar item so that the codes,
welds, etc. are possibly done already. Find something that is similar, copy it, modify it. Besides the
UPC formula, there are two other formulas that help calculate insulation and paint quantities. Review/
use them to help quickly get these needed quantities. You have to copy/paste the insulation formula in
the insulation column. Calculate. If the quantity appears right, change the formula to a value.
(Remove the formula and leave only the value). Do the same thing for painting. These two formulas
are not adjusted by the Universal UPC Reset button.
There are other formulas in the Universal tab. They are used to connect the prices for civil items,
Grinnell hanger and Source1 to the "P" Tab. These groups are connected to the "P" Tab: Grinnell
Pipe Supports, Structural Steel For Pipe Supports, Structural Steel For Buildings, and Concrete Unit
Prices For Equipment & Buildings and require formulas in the macro to update their prices. Make
your changes to the "P" Tab and update it first. Then make changes to the "U" Tab, then press the
update UPC button to update the "U" Tab. Just remember that the flow of information begins with the
price multipliers on the P (Price) Tab. The P Tab is then updated, then is used by the U, A
and C Tabs when you update them. Do the adjustments to P Tab first so that U Tab can find the
new prices.
At row eight you will find a column indicator with a black background. This is used as a reference in
the discussion and as a guide in construction of the formulas. Beneath that row are the titles (Rows 9
& 10). At row 11 begins the database list for the Universal Items. First a title header, then beneath it
the list starts. Remember, Universal items are defined as items that do not require the specifications in
order to be used in the estimate. If it is in the specification parts list inside the specification, it is not
an Universal Item. It would belong on the "C" or "A" tabs if its SEEK CODE is listed inside the
Specification Verification List. (The pull down above the specifications contains both Universal Items
and others. Only the items actually used in the specifications are NOT Universal.) The following
discusses the columns.
1) First, The use of this column is not required and can be used for other functions if you desire.
Column 1 (SORT) is used to return the data to a logical display order. If you add anything and keep
the data in the same logical order it is in now, you should renumber column 1 beginning with one and
ending with the largest number. It is easy to write a formula to renumber. Dragging the numbers
down to fill is too slow. The formula would be 1 plus the cell above, except for the first row and it is
just a one. Do not leave any formula active in the data if you don't have to. After renumbering, copy
the value instead of the formula in the column leaving the original formula as a formula. This column
is used to help organize the large amount of data. It is not used by the program. You may use this
column in other ways to organize the data if you wish.
2) Column 2 (UPC) is used by PIPEtalk to locate the item in the database. It is created by the formula
at row 5 on this worksheet immediately above this column. You should make no adjustments to this
formula. All items have to have this UPC created by the formula. Always copy the value in this
column to conserve RAM and speed up the calculations. The macros will write, calculate and convert
to values all the UPC numbers when you press the RESET UPC button. The UPC formula is: Col F &
Col G & Col E (Text added together for any given rowExa: F5&G5&E5)
3) Column 3 on this tab is not being used at this time.
4) Column 4 (Column Description Used In The Estimate) is used to create a part of the description that
you see when you are entering your estimate on the Entry Screen. You should make it short but clear
enough to describe the item. This might have to be sent to someone for pricing, so you need enough
details to price it.
5) Column 5 (SEEK CODE) provides PIPEtalk with a unique ID for the items. Combined with the
first and second size it creates the UPC. If you create a new item and assign it a new SEEK CODE.
Run Excels FIND to see if it already exists for another type of item. If it does, rename it to something
else. You cannot have two different subjects with the same SEEK CODE. Excel would locate only
the first one it comes too. After you have completed the new item, record it in the Seek Code File so
that it is kept current with all the other SEEK CODES listed for reference.
6-7) Column 6 is the primary/1st size and column 7 is the secondary/2nd size. They provide an
expanded definition to the seek code. They may both be diameters. Or the first might be the diameter
and the second a length of the item. These columns are replaced with Excel column numbers AK thru
AN. AK and AL are NPS. AM and AN are ISO sizes. When the macro runs to switch between the
two systems (NPS/ISO), the columns are switched. So make your entries at columns AK thru AN, not
at column numbers 6 and 7.
8 & 14) Columns 8 and 14 are not used within the (U) Universal tab.
9 thru 13) These columns are used by macros and should not be modified unless necessary to modify a
macro.
15) This column is used for the ISO material cost. Generally it is a calculated column, ran by the
Index macro. When you adjust the Index, the macro changes the NPS cost to a ISO cost in this
column. You should price items as NPS and they will be automatically posted by the macro in column
15.
16) Column 16 (UOM) is the NPS unit of measure. There are a few rules to follow here. The LF (w/o
the dot) is reserved for linear feet of pipe. Use LF. (with the dot) for all other linear feet units.
CY.(with the dot) is reserved for cubic yards of concrete. All other cubic yards use CY (w/o the dot).
Even though you indicate the final units are cubic yards or square yards, you will enter ONLY EA, LF
or SF into the left quantity on the ENTRY tab at the current estimate area. PIPEtalk will then convert
based on formula type (1, 2 or 3). See discussion 26 for types of formulas.
17) Column 17 is for NPS prices that will be used in the estimate and is a calculated filed by the Index
macro. This is the value that will be used in the ENTRY tab to create the unit price. In the ENTRY
tab the value from the tab "U" price might be adjusted based on a setting in the Setup. At the ENTRY
tab you can also adjust the price that came from column 17 by typing over unit price. When you
destroy a formula in the entry screen, it will be repaired when you get a fresh screen. Remember that
over-ridden items that are not in the Red on Tan are NOT saved into memories. Only items in red on
tan are stored into the memories.
18,19,20) Column 18 allows you to store the original price you got from the vendor. When column 18
and column 19 (The Vendors Name) and column 20 (The Date You Got The Price) are used together,
they provide a record of the source of the default price. Column 17 is used in the estimate (Now
created by the Index macro) and column 18 is a record of what was said to you. Column 19 is also
used to automatically re-price the data from tab "P". The price seek group in column 19 matches the
seek code on the tab "P" at column 7 (G). The formula looks at the price every where it is need and
updates it based on the prices on tab "P".
21,22) Column 21 and 22 are used to establish the quantity of the insulation. The linear footage refers
to the linear feet equivalency. Most insulators use this method to calculate the value of the work to do
a fitting or valves in linear feet. Then calculate the value of the straight pipe SF and multiply it times
the equivalency to get the value of the SF for the fitting. The insulator uses this to price the work.
You can use it to gauge the quote you receive. You can also use it to do your own calculation for
budgets. Because of all the varying thickness, the calculation only provides the value at the pipes
surface, not the outer jacket area. Row five on tab "U" has a formula you can use to calculate the SF.
23) Column 23 is used to approximate the SF of painting. When you have paint set for something
other than "N", this value will be included and multiplied times the first quantity field's quantity. The
second quantity is NOT multiplied times the value at column 23 of tab "U". The first quantity is
normally measured in EA, SF or LF. That is what your value in column 23 will be measured against.
If you have steel in pounds as a unit of measure, remember that you will be entering LF. Your first
quantity will determine the value of the insulation and painting. Calculate the physical SF per LF and
enter it. Do not convert it to SF per LB. Keep it as SF of paint or insulation per LF.
24) Column 24 is used to determine the shipping weight of the item. Sometimes you will have to
approximate this value. If the item is only going to be installed in the field, it is still good to post the
weight if you know it.
25) In column 25 post the possible welds (EA not LF-steel is not counted) for piping except straight
pipe. If you had a tee enter 3, a 90 enter 2, etc.. The pipe is calculated based on the factory length
(10, 20 or 40) and the lengths installed in the field. This is done automatically. No attempt has been
made to count over-lapping welds and reduce the total (fitting to fitting). This was not a issue because
the welding was included in the manpower of the fittings, pipe and valves. An exact count was not
that important. If you change estimating methods to having to count each weld to apply manpower,
this would cause a problem. Change the setup to "N" (N29) for the weld count if you want to count
your own welds and change the estimating units to yours (#2 at N30). Currently adding a field weld is
an addition to the work. (You don't have to deduct it from any scope)
26) In order to speed up the entry of data, a calculation type is pre-set at column 26 of the "U" tab.
Type 1 requires PIPEtalk to do nothing special, Type 2 requires your entry to be divided by 27(NPS)--
so enter CF and it will convert to CY or M3. Type 3 will be converted to SY or M2--enter SF or M2
in the takeoff. The same calculation type information is used to convert your entry to metric. This
setting will have no effect on the conversion of LF to LB if it is left on the default setting of 1.
27) In order to short list the data that goes to purchasing for pricing and to make the list more accurate,
column 27 separates the items into labor only (No pricing required) and materials that MIGHT need
pricing. It is the first step in making the list short that will need priced later. If the item will never
need a material price or will not need to go to purchasing, put an "L" for labor. Remember, this is a
filter-it does not really mean that there is no material nor will material prices be blocked.
28) Column 28 separates the entry into three possibilities. "F" means the work will always be done in
the field. "S" means it will always be done in the shop. "B" means that it can be both AND split
between them based on the percentage settings in the setup screen. There are items that should be
coded only one way or the other. As a rule, hangers, valves and instruments are "F" only. Field only
items are "F" and Shop items are "S". Concrete, equipment setting, earthwork and steel items are
generally "F".
29) Column 29 pre-sets the crew mix to use. See instructions for the Setup Entry Screen for a
discussion of rates. Pick the correct crew and enter it at column 29 on the "U" tab.
30,31) To provide an interface with job setup/cost/scheduling you can enter a pre-set cost code at
column 30 and column 31. However, the items on the "U" Tab are used in all specifications. This
causes a problem when the cost code for the same item varies from one spec to another. A fix is not
available at this time but a solution is being considered. Enter your desired code (One that fits the
majority of situations) and modify the codes within the specification groups after you complete the
takeoff and before you summarize to job setup values.
32,33) The NPS unit man-hours are installed in columns 32 and 33. It is totally up to you if you wish
to use the units loaded at this time. It is your responsibility for their accuracy and correctness.
PIPEtalk is not responsible for typos or inaccuracy. See the disclaimer at the "About The Author" at
the introduction. Only prompt limited support by email is provided. (pipetalk@yahoo.com)
34,35) The unit here is for ISO. Column 34 is for the ISO unit hours and column 35 is for the ISO
UOM.
36) The SUMMARY CODES that are pre-installed at column 36 create the reports on pages four (4)
and five(5). Do not change the code meanings and do enter a code at each unit you create. Do not
leave this code blank. A list of the Summary Codes is included in the SEEK CODE File and in this
manual.
On the following two pages are the headers of the ten groups. Notice which groups use the Price (P)
Tab and which ones use this tab to get the prices. Items that get prices from the Price tab will look for
price information on the Price Tab first. If it cannot locate one PIPEtalk will look for price information
on the Universal Tab second. The program will try to find a price using the prices on the Universal
Tab last unless you adjust the setup (S) tab to over-ride. To over-ride, enter D for domestic at D11
and Y at N14 like this:
This forces the program to use the defaults first instead of the Price (P) Tab prices.
THE HEADERS OF THE TEN UNIVERSAL ITEMS GROUPS
GROUP 1 OF 10 MAIN UNIVERSAL ITEMS LIST (Using U Tab Prices)

GROUP 1 OF 10 - MAIN UNIVERSAL ITEMS LIST
1 NO TE NO TE: NO TE . 0.00 0.00 NONE ####### 0 0 0 0 0 1 L F CB . . 0 REF -1 NA MO1
2 0NOTE NO TE: NO TE 0.00 . 0.00 0.00 NONE ####### 0 0 0 0 0 1 L F CB . . 0 REF -1 NA MO1
3 0.25NOTE NO TE: NO TE 0.25 . 0.00 0.00 NONE ####### 0 0 0 0 0 1 L F CB . . 0 REF -1 NA MO1
GROUP 2 OF 10 INSTRUMENTS LIST (Using U Tab Prices)

1509 -1 NA
1510 GROUP 2 OF 10 - INSTRUMENTS - OWNERS USUALLY FURNISH THESE ITEMS -1 NA
1511 -1 NA
1512 0.25IN INSTR - IN 0.25 EA (1.00) (1.00) NONE ####### 0.0 0.0 0 1M F CV ? ? 0.5 REF -1 NA P11
1516 1IN INSTR - IN 1.00 EA (1.00) (1.00) NONE ####### 0.0 0.0 0 1M F CV ? ? 0.5 REF -1 NA P11
GROUP 3 OF 10 VALVES LIST (Using U Tab Prices)

2805 -1 NA
2806 GROUP 3 0F 10 - VALVES - NOTE: FOR IP VALVES USE V### (no dash) FOR GP VALVES USE V-###(with dash) -1 NA
2807 -1 NA
2808 201B20F VALVE GLOBE 125# FLANGED CAST IRON CLASS
01B20F 2.00 EA 510.00 510.00 RICHARDSON 98 12 6.3 0.5 0 1 M F CV ? ? 2.02 REF -1 NA P22
2809 2.501B20F VALVE GLOBE 125# FLANGED CAST IRON CLASS
01B20F 3.00 EA 650.00 650.00 RICHARDSON 98 12 9.4 0.8 0 1 M F CV ? ? 2 REF -1 NA P22
2811 3.501B20F VALVE GLOBE 125# FLANGED CAST IRON CLASS
01B20F 5.00 EA 1,480.00 1,480.00 RICHARDSON 98 12 15.7 1.3 0 1 M F CV ? ? 4.53 REF -1 NA P22
01B20F 10.00 EA (1.00) (1.00) NONE ####### 12 31.4 2.6 0 1 M F CV ? ? 9.2 REF -1 NA P22
01B20F 12.00 EA (1.00) (1.00) NONE ####### 12 37.7 3.1 0 1 M F CV ? ? 11 REF -1 NA P22
01B20F 14.00 EA (1.00) (1.00) NONE ####### 12 44.0 3.7 0 1 M F CV ? ? 13.5 REF -1 NA P22
2819 201BF20F VALVE (VG01) BUTT ERFLY 150# TAPPED LUG
01BF20F
FLANGE DUCTILE
2.00 IRON BUNA-N
EA LINED 410.00 410.00 RICHARDSON 98 12 6.3 0.5 0 1 M F CV ? ? 0.95 REF -1 NA P22
GROUP 4 OF 10 PIPE SUPPORTS (Prices From P Tab)

12578 -1 NA
12579
12580
GROUP 4 OF 10 - PIPE SUPPORTS - PRICES CALCULATED FROM THE "P" WORKSHEET -1
-1
NA
NA
12581 The RESET UPS M acro w ill update the formula/prices in column 17. >> <<FORMULA<<FORMULA
CONNECTED CO
TONNECT
THE WORKSHEET
ED TO THE WORKSHEET
"P" "P" -1 NA
12582 RANG E NAME USED IN MACRO -DO NOT DESTRO Y>> LIST PRICE LIST PRICE -1 NA
12583 0.25H BLACK-PIPE SUPPO RT (EA) - H 0.25 EA 2.00 2.00 RICHARDSON
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 0.5 REF -1 NA P07
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 0.5 REF -1 NA P07
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 0.5 REF -1 NA P07
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 0.5 REF -1 NA P07
12587 1H BLACK-PIPE SUPPO RT (EA) - H 1.00 EA 2.50 2.50 RICHARDSON
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 0.75 REF -1 NA P07
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 0.75 REF -1 NA P07
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 1 REF -1 NA P07
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 1 REF -1 NA P07
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 1.25 REF -1 NA P07
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 1.5 REF -1 NA P07
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 1.5 REF -1 NA P07
6/1/1997
97 0 0.0 1.0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 1.75 REF -1 NA P07
GROUP 5 OF 10 PIPE SUPPORT STRUCTURAL STEEL (Using U Tab Prices)

23634 GROUP 5 OF 10 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR PIPE SUPPORTS - ENTER PRICES MANUAL - SEE ALSO UNITS PRICED FROM SHEET "P" BELOW -1 NA
23635 -1 NA
23636 HSPHEAVY FIELD FABRICATION-HEAVY STEEL >30&<50# HSPHEAVY LB 1.00 1.00 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 1M F IL ? ? 0.025 REF -1 NA S05
23637 HSPLIGHT FIELD FABRICATION-LIGHT STEEL <15.5# HSPLIGHT LB 1.00 1.00 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 1M F IL ? ? 0.03 REF -1 NA S03
23638 HSPMEDIUM FIELD FABRICATION-MEDIUM STEEL 15.5>30#
HSPMEDIUM LB 1.00 1.00 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 1M F IL ? ? 0.025 REF -1 NA S04
23639 HSPXHEAVY FIELD FABRICATION-XTRA-HEAVY >50# HSPXHEAVY LB 1.00 1.00 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 1M F IL ? ? 0.02 REF -1 NA S06
23640 HSCUTSTEEL3/8
FIELD TORCH CUT 3/8" STEEL HSCUTSTEEL3/8 LF. 0.00 0.00 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 1L F IL ? ? 0.2 REF -1 NA S12
23641 HSWELD1/2 FIELD WELDING 1/2" HSWELD1/2 LF. 0.00 0.00 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 1L F IL ? ? 0.5 REF -1 NA S16
23647 HSPRIME STEEL - PRIMER HSPRIME SF 0.15 0.15 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.01 REF -1 NA S12
GROUP 6 OF 10 PIPE SUPPORT STRUCTURAL STEEL (Using P Tab Prices)

23684 -1 NA
23685 GROUP 6 OF 10 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR PIPE SUPPORTS - PRICES COME FROM SHEET "P" -1 NA
23686 -1 NA
23687 The RESET UPS M acro w ill update the formula/prices in column 17. >> #N/A <<FORMULAS -1 NA
23688 RANG E NAME USED IN MACRO -DO NOT DESTRO Y>> #N/A -1 NA
23689 HSS1 1/2X10 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1 1/2X10 AT 0.79 LBHSS1
& 2 SF
1/2X10 LB 6.00 SS304EXP NONE 1/1/2001 0.0 2.0 0.79 0 1 M F IL ? ? REF -1 NA S12
23690 HSS1 1/2X13 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1 1/2X13 AT 0.6 LB HSS1
& 2 SF1/2X13 LB 6.00 SS304EXP NONE 1/1/2001 0.0 2.0 0.6 0 1 M F IL ? ? REF -1 NA S12
23692 HSS1 1/2X6 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1 1/2X6 AT 2.5 LB &HSS1
2 SF 1/2X6 LB 6.00 SS304EXP NONE 1/1/2001 0.0 2.0 2.5 0 1 M F IL ? ? REF -1 NA S12
23694 HSS1/2X13 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1/2X13 AT 1.47 LB & HSS1/2X13
2 SF LB 6.00 SS304EXP NONE 1/1/2001 0.0 2.0 1.47 0 1 M F IL ? ? REF -1 NA S12
23696 HSS1/2X18 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1/2X18 AT 0.7 LB &HSS1/2X18
23698 HSS1X16 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1X16 AT 0.44 LB & HSS1X16
23699 HSS3/4X10 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-3/4X10 AT 1.2 LB &HSS3/4X10
GROUP 7 OF 10 BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL (Using P Tab Prices)

27873 -1 NA
27874 GROUP 7 OF 10 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS - PRICES COME FROM SHEET "P" -1 NA
27875 -1 NA
27876 The RESET UPS Macro will update the formula/prices in column 17. >> #N/A <<FORMULA -1 NA
27877 RANGE NAME USED IN MACRO-DO NOT DESTROY>> #N/A -1 NA
27878 S-S1 1/2X10 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1 1/2X10 AT 0.79 LBS-S1
& 2 1/2X10
SF LB 6.00 SS304EXP CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0.0 2.0 0.79 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
27879 S-S1 1/2X13 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1 1/2X13 AT 0.6 LB S-S1
& 2 SF1/2X13 LB 6.00 SS304EXP CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0.0 2.0 0.6 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
LIST 0.0 2.0 0.4 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
27881 S-S1 1/2X6 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1 1/2X6 AT 2.5 LB &S-S1
2 SF1/2X6 LB 6.00 SS304EXP CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0.0 2.0 2.5 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
LIST 0.0 2.0 1.19 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
27883 S-S1/2X13 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1/2X13 AT 1.47 LB &S-S1/2X13
2 SF LB 6.00 SS304EXP CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0.0 2.0 1.47 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
LIST 0.0 2.0 0.86 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
LIST 0.0 2.0 0.7 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
LIST 0.0 2.0 1.14 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
27887 S-S1X16 304SS-EXPANDED WIRE-1X16 AT 0.44 LB & S-S1X16
LIST 0.0 2.0 0.44 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
LIST 0.0 2.0 1.2 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
LIST 0.0 2.0 0.8 0 1 M F IL ? ? 0.014 REF -1 NA S12
GROUP 8 OF 10 MISC/EARTHWORK (Using U Tab Prices)

31811 -1 NA
31812 GROUP 8 OF 10 - MISC & EARTHWORK - MANUALLY ENTER PRICES HERE -1 NA
31813 -1 NA
31814 C-PLYWOOD1/2AB
PINE PLYWOOD EXTERIOR GLUE 1/2" AB C-PLYWOOD1/2AB SF 1.50 1.50 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 0 1 M F CC ? ? 0.036 REF -1 NA C06
31815 C-PLYWOOD1/2CD
PINE PLYWOOD EXTERIOR GLUE 1/2" CD C-PLYWOOD1/2CD SF 0.54 0.54 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 0 1 M F CC ? ? 0.011 REF -1 NA C06
31818 C-PLYWOOD3/4ABF
FIR PLYWOOD EXTERIOR GLUE 3/4" AB C-PLYWOOD3/4ABF SF 1.60 1.60 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 0 1 M F CC ? ? 0.05 REF -1 NA C06
31819 C-PLYWOOD3/4ABO
OAK PLYWOOD EXTERIOR GLUE 3/4" AB C-PLYWOOD3/4ABO SF 3.20 3.20 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 0 1 M F CC ? ? 0.071 REF -1 NA C06
31823 D-CATCHBASIN
REMOVE CATCHBASIN & HAULOFF D-CATCHBASIN EA 25.00 25.00 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 8 REF -1 NA C10
31824 D-MANHOLE REMOVE MANHOLE & HAULOFF D-MANHOLE EA 25.00 25.00 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 0 1 M F CP ? ? 8 REF -1 NA C10
31825 D-PUMPSMALLREMOVE SMALL PUMP (<5HP) D-PUMPSMALL EA 0.00 0.00 NONE 6/1/1998 0.0 0.0 0 0 1 L F CP ? ? 6 REF -1 NA C10
GROUP 9 OF 10 CONCRETE (Using P Tab Prices)

31916 -1 NA
31917 GROUP 9 OF 10 - CONCRETE UNIT PRICES FOR EQUIPMENT & BUILDINGS - PRICED FROM SHEET "P" -1 NA
31918 -1 NA
31919 The RESET UPS Macro will update the formula/prices in column 17. >> #N/A <<FORMULA -1 NA
31920 RANGE NAME USED IN MACRO-DO NOT DESTROY>> #N/A -1 NA
31970 C-BCABCS CONTINOUS FTG--ANCHOR BOLTS-CS C-BCABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31971 C-BRABCS BASE-RECTANGLE--ANCHOR BOLTS-CS C-BRABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31972 C-BSABCS BASE-SQUARE--ANCHOR BOLTS-CS C-BSABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31973 C-BVABCS BASE-CURVED--ANCHOR BOLTS-CS C-BVABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31974 C-CEABCS CURB-ON EXISTING--ANCHOR BOLTS-CS C-CEABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31975 C-CNABCS CURB-NEW--ANCHOR BOLTS-CS C-CNABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31976 C-ELEABCS ELEV ON WOOD FORMS-ENCASE--ANCHORC-ELEABCS
BOLTS-CS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31977 C-ELMABCS ELEV ON METAL DECK--ANCHOR BOLTS-CS C-ELMABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31978 C-ELWABCS ELEV ON WOOD FORMS--ANCHOR BOLTS-CS C-ELWABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31979 C-ENCABCS ENCASE-CONDUIT--ANCHOR BOLTS-CS C-ENCABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31980 C-ENPABCS ENCASE-PIPE--ANCHOR BOLTS-CS C-ENPABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
31981 C-ENSBABCS ENCASE-STEEL BEAM--ANCHOR BOLTS-CSC-ENSBABCS LB 1.55 ABCS CIVIL PRICE1/1/2001
LIST 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1M F CC ? ? 0.1 REF -1 NA C01
GROUP 10 OF 10 EQUIPMENT (Using U Tab Prices)

36755
36756 GROUP 10 OF 10 - EQUIPMENT MANHOURS
36757
36758 M-Agitator Agitator M-Agitator EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4002 4002 1 REF M01
36759 M-Bin Bin M-Bin EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4003 4003 1 REF M01
36760 M-Blender Blender M-Blender EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4044 4044 8 REF M01
36761 M-Blower Blower M-Blower EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4044 4044 12 REF M01
36762 M-Boiler Boiler M-Boiler EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4044 4044 14 REF M01
36763 M-Breeching Breeching, Ducts, Dampers or Valves M-Breeching EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4015 4015 1 REF M01
36764 M-Catalyst Catalyst M-Catalyst EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4018 4018 1 REF M01
36765 M-Centrifuge Centrifuges M-Centrifuge EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4019 4019 1 REF M01
36766 M-Checkout Test, Checkout and Startup M-Checkout LS 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4139 4139 1 REF M01
36767 M-Chemical Chemical Treatment M-Chemical EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4020 4020 1 REF M01
36768 M-Chest Chest M-Chest EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4021 4021 1 REF M01
36769 M-Chipper Chipper M-Chipper EA 1 (1.00) NONE 2/2/2001 0 0.0 0.0 0 0 1L F M 4044 4044 16 REF M01
CHAPTER SIX
The C (Carbon Steel) Tab
The most popular material for piping is carbon steel. This tab group includes all
piping/fittings except alloys, FRP and plastics. Galvanized steel pipe, ductile iron and
malleable fittings are included in the Carbon Steel Tab. In order to have enough space in
this file, PIPEtalk can now off-load material group types. This process was discussed in
the Setup Tab chapter. It is better to off-load any materials you are not going to need.
This also allows you to expand the list that was provided with the program. Bring the
materials into the program and add the needed items. Be sure to send a copy of your
upgrade to the storage file. This will allow you to have the ability to get your latest copy
when you need it. You do have to add the new items to the Specification Validation List
if you are expanding that list. This process was discussed with the Specifications
instructions. A new method of saving and importing anothers Specifications Parts List
is now available in version 4.1
PART FIFTEEN
The Carbon Steel Sheet Arrangement
GoTo The Material Groups
Press the Index The Price Now button to adjust the prices.
Column Numbers Referenced by The Discussions in This Chapter A
B
DISCUSSION OF TAB "C"
Press the INDEX THE PRICE NOW button to adjust old prices. The price will be adjusted based
on the date that the original price was entered. The index is stored on the P tab at the top right. .
You must have an old price in column 18 and a valid old date in column 19.
A few words about PIPEtalks weld count method before discussing the Carbon Steel Tab. The
welding time is included in the source one group of man-hour units. The program is counting the
fitting and pipe welds. This feature can be turned off in the Setup Screen as discussed prior. The
count of the welds for pipe is adjusted by the length of the pipe as it is taken off. If the pipe joint
length is ten feet and the quantity of pipe is nine feet, no weld will be counted. If the pipe is eleven
feet long, one weld will be counted for pipe. LF of welding structural steel is NOT counted in any
welding quantities. PIPEtalk does not delete the fitting to fitting weld count or the slight extra
manpower included. Most estimates do not require the exact count of weldsslight count variations
are allowed in this business. However, you may enter a negative weld to adjust for fitting to fitting
welds. The program will accept a negative entry.
There are times that you will need to add welds without fittings or pipe being entered. In the case
where you handle a spool, handle (only) a welded valve, cut into an existing pipe - add a field weld
(FBW) or socket weld (SW3,SW6,SW9) or a threaded makeup (THR). Threaded connections should
not be counted if you only want the welds and can be programmed out when you construct the man-
power units. Enter a 0 at the weld quantity (Col "Y" or Labeled the column 25 on sheets "U","C" and
"A") when you build the unit. No count will then be entered when PIPEtalk uses the unit.
The Carbon Steel Tab contains some of the formulas on row five that are used on this tab. When
changes are made to this tab or items added to the database, you would press the yellow "Reset UPC
& Description" button. This Macro will copy the formula in the second column, row five to update the
UPC (Unit Price Catalog Number) and the calculated description. DO NOT DAMAGE THE
FORMULA ON ROW FIVE. This Macro will copy the formulas and calculate and then remove the
formulas leaving only the values. This helps keep the program running fast and the file small. If you
don't run the Macro, make sure the SEEK CODE is correct so that PIPEtalk can find the new item.
You can paste the formula for the UPC for the item you have built if you do not wish to use the macro.
To create a new item in the Carbon Steel Tab units, it is best to copy a similar item so that the codes,
welds, etc are possibly done already. Find something that is similar, copy it, modify it. Besides the
are not adjusted by the "Reset UPC & Description" button.
Use the SEARCH button to GoTo carbon steel, ductile iron, ductile iron galv, forged steel and
malleable iron groups and press the Search Tab C button. Stainless, alloys, plastic and FRP are on
the A (Alloy) Tab which will be discussed in the next chapter.
& 10). At row 11 begins the database list for the Carbon Steel Tab. First a title header, then beneath it
the Carbon Steel Tab list of units begins.
1) Working from left to right. Column 1 (SORT) is used to return the data to a logical display order.
If you add anything and keep the data in the same logical order it is in now, you should renumber
column 1 beginning with one and ending with the largest number. It is easy to write a formula to
renumber. Dragging the numbers down to fill is too slow. The formula would be 1 plus the cell
above, except for the first row and it is just a one. Do not leave any formula active in the data if you
don't have to. After renumbering, copy the value instead of the formula. This column is used to help
organize the large amount of data. It is not used by the program. You may use this column in other
ways to organize the data if you wish.
at row 5 on this tab immediately above this column. You should make no adjustments to this formula.
All items must have this UPC created by the formula. Always copy the value in this column to
conserve RAM and speed up the calculations.
3) Column 3 is used for the Short Description of the item. This description combined with others to
create the descriptions on the ENTRY tab Screen. Write as short a description as you can that tells
what the item is. Do not add anything that is displayed in column four (4) or it will be duplicated in
the description. (If it is used in column fourdont enter it again in the short description)
4) Column 4 (Column Description Used In The Estimate) is used created by a formula stored in the
gray are in row five (5). Copy the formula and create the description, then copy the value to remove
the formula and reduce the number of formulas in the worksheet. Or simply press the yellow "Reset
UPC & Description" button. This Macro will copy the formula in the second column, row five to
update the UPC (Unit Price Catalog Number) and create the calculated description. This Macro will
copy the formulas, calculate and then remove the formulas leaving only the values.
the first one it comes too. After you have completed the new item, record it in the Seek Code File so
that it is kept current with all the other SEEK CODES listed for reference.
6,7) Column 6 is the primary/1st size and column 7 is the secondary/2nd size. They provide an
two systems (NPS/ISO), the columns are switched. So make your size entries at columns AK thru
AN, not at column numbers 6 and 7. Reducing tees, concentric reducers, eccentric reducers and
swages require a second size. O-lets don't require the on size but it is best to provide the
information. The description looks strange when you dont provide all the needed information.
8) Column 8 provides information about the items Material Specification. See specifications at column
"O" on the "S" tab for a list. Examples: 304, 309, 310, 316, 317, 321, 347, 348, 304L, 316L, 317L,
ABS, ALLOY 20, CARBON MOLYBDENIUM, CARPENTER CAST STEEL, CHROME
MOLYBDENIUM, CI, CPVC, CS, 1 CR, 2 CR, 9 CR, DI GALV, DVDF, FRP, FS, 1 CR, FS
2 1/4 CR, FS 9 CR, FS GALV, HASTELLOY, INCONEL, MI, MONEL, NICKEL STEEL,
POLYBUTYLENE, POLYETHYLENE, POLYPROPYLENE, PVC and CPVC. You can find this
list in the Specification Validation List at the Specifications.
9) Column 9 contains the schedule of the pipe/fittings. The schedule of the material begins with "S/"
or ___# or 2, 3, 6, 9M's See specifications at column "P" on the "S" tab for a list. Examples: S/5,
S/10, S/20, S/30, S/40, STD WT, S/60, XH, GALV S/80, S/100, S/120, S/140, S/160, XXH, STD,
GALV S/40, GALV S/40, C&W S/80, C&W STD, WT C&W, 150# BLK, 300# BLK, 125# BLK,
250# BLK, SERVICE WT, XH WT, 2M, 3M, 3M GALV, 6M, 6M GALV, 9M, 150# GALV, 300#
GALV, 125# GALV , 250# GALV, CLASS 50, CLASS 150, CLASS 200 and CLASS 300. You can
find this list in the Specification Validation List at the Specifications.
10) Column 10 contains the type of connection used by the pipe/fittings. See specifications at column
"Q" on the "S" tab for a list. Examples: BELLED END, SW, BE, PE, SW, BJ, BW, THR, FLG,
GROOVED, GLUE, PRESS, LEAD/OAKUM, GASKET, CLAMP, MECHANICAL FUSION, SO,
LAP JT, STUB-IN and NOZZLE. You can find this list in the Specification Validation List at the
Specifications.
11) Column 11 contains the type of manufacturing used to construct the pipe/fittings. See
specifications at column "R" on the "S" tab for a list. Examples: SML, ERW, BELLED, FF, RF, RTJ,
ASB and GARLOCK. You can find this list in the Specification Validation List at the Specifications.
12) Column 12 contains the ASTM for the pipe/fittings. See specifications at column "S" on the "S"
tab for a list. Examples: A105, A106, A120, A126, A181, A182, A197, A216, A217, A234, A240,
A268, A269, A270, A296, A307, A312, A333, A351, A335, A352, A358, A376, A395, A403, A409,
A436, A445, A47, A487, A494, A53, A536, A563, A567, A672, A733, A813, AWWA C110,
AWWA C111, B127, B160, B161, B162, B163, B164, B165, B167, B168, B333, B335, B336, B337,
B363, B366, B407, B408 and B409. You can find this list in the Specification Validation List at the
Specifications.
13) Column 13 contains the GRADE for the pipe/fittings. See specifications at column "T" on the "S"
tab for a list. Examples: A, B, B60, B65, B70, B60, B65, OR B70, C X-42, 1, F1, F9, F11, F22, F91,
WP, WPA, WPB, WPC, WP1, WP9, WP11, WP12, WP22, WP91, F5, 2, 5, 22, 316, LCB, WCB,
LC3, CF3, CF3M, CF8, CF8M, CF8C and CN7M. You can find this list in the Specification
Validation List at the Specifications.
14) Column 14 contains the PRESSURE RATING for the pipe/fittings. See specifications at column
"U" on the "S" tab for a list. Enter one from the list if a flange/fitting needs the rating to match the
specification. Examples: 125#, 150#, 300#, 600#, 900#, 1500# and 2500#.
15.
16) Column 16 (UOM) is the unit of measure. There are a few rules to follow here. The LF (Without
the dot) is reserved for linear feet of pipe. Use LF. (with the dot) for all other linear feet units.
CY.(with the dot) is reserved for cubic yards of concrete. All other cubic yards use CY (w/o the dot).
Even though you indicate the final units are cubic yards or square yards, you will enter ONLY EA, LF
or SF into the left quantity. PIPEtalk will convert based on formula type (1, 2 or 3). See discussion 26
for types of formulas.
surface, not the outer jacket area. Row five on tab "C" has a formula you can use to calculate the SF.
second quantity is NOT multiplied times the value at column 23 of tab "C". The first quantity is
enter it. Do not convert it to SF per LB. Keep it as SF of paint or insulation per LF.
weight if you know it.
made to count over-lapping welds and reduce the total (fitting to fitting). This was not an issue
because the welding was included in the manpower of the fittings, pipe and valves. An exact count
was not that important. If you change estimating methods to having to count each weld to apply
manpower, this would cause a problem. Change the setup to "N" (N29) for the weld count if you want
to count your own welds and change the estimating units to yours (#2 at N30). Currently adding a
field weld is an addition to the work. (You don't have to deduct it from any scope)
26) In order to speed up the entry of data, a calculation type is pre-set at column 26 of the "C" tab.
Type 1 requires PIPEtalk to do nothing, Type 2 requires your entry to be divided by 27-so enter CF
and it will convert to CY. Type 3 will be converted to SY-enter SF in the takeoff. Later the same
calculation type information will be used to convert your entry to metric. This feature is not ready at
this time. If you want the CF entry to be converted to CY use 2, for SF to SY use 3. Make no change;
enter a 1 in column 26. This setting will have no effect on the conversion of LF to LB if it is left on
the default setting of 1.
filter-it does not really mean that there is no material nor will material prices be blocked.
between them based on the settings in the setup screen. There are items that should be coded only one
way or the other. As a rule, hangers, valves and instruments are "F" only. Field only items are "F"
and Shop items are "S". Concrete, building steel, equipment setting, earthwork and steel items are
generally "F".
29 Column 29 pre-sets the crew mix to use. See instructions # 20 for a discussion of rates. Pick the
correct crew and enter it at column 29 on the "C" Tab.
column 30 and column 31. Enter your desired code (One that fits the majority of situations) and
modify the codes within the specification groups after you complete the takeoff and before you
summarize to job setup values.
to use the units loaded at this time. It is your responsibility for their accuracy and correctness.
PIPEtalk is not responsible for typos or inaccuracy. See the disclaimer at the "About The Author" at
the introduction. Only prompt limited support by email is provided. (pipetalk@hotmail.com)
UOM.
and five (5). Do not change the code meanings and do enter a code at each unit you create. Dont
leave this code blank. A list of the SUMMARY CODES is included in the SEEK CODE File and in
this manual.
CHAPTER SEVEN
The A (Alloy/Other) Tab
Carbon steel pipe and fittings maybe the most popular, but alloys are the most hours
intensive and materials expensive. Because of this, they are the hardest to get the hours
and prices right. I have used many sources to try and get units for the man-power of
alloy piping. Many I have chosen are averages and interpretations of various sources.
Averages belong to no organization. Run a sample estimate and see if you get an answer
you can live with. Remember you can run multipliers on the units. These have to set in
the Setup Screen BEFORE you run the estimate. After the estimate is run, PIPEtalk
cannot adjust the output. There are no formulas remaining in the output, only raw data.
PART SIXTEEN
The Alloy Sheet Arrangement
Find Material Groups By Pressing Search
NEW: Press the Index The Price Now button to adjust the prices.
A
Column Numbers Referenced by The Discussions in This Chapter
B
DISCUSSION OF TAB "A"
NEW: Press the INDEX THE PRICE NOW button to adjust old prices. The price will be adjusted
based on the date that the original price was entered. The index is stored on the P tab at the top
right. . You must have an old price in column 18 and a valid old date in column 19.
The Alloy Tab contains some of the formulas on row five that are used on this tab. When changes are
made to this tab or items added to the database, you would press the yellow "Reset UPC &
Description" button. This Macro will copy the formula in the second column, row five to update the
UPC (Unit Price Catalog Number) and the calculated description. DO NOT DAMAGE THE
FORMULAS ON ROW FIVE. This Macro will copy the formulas and calculate and then remove
the formulas leaving only the values. This helps keep the program running fast and the file small. If
you don't run the Macro, make sure the SEEK CODE is correct so that PIPEtalk can find the new item.
You can paste the formula for the UPC for the item you have built if you do not wish to use the macro.
To create a new item in the Carbon Steel Tab units, it is best to copy a similar item so that the codes,
welds, etc are possibly done already. Find something that is similar, copy it, modify it. Besides the
are not adjusted by the "Reset UPC & Description" button.
Use the SEARCH button to find items on Tab A. Press SEARCH TAB A to search that tab for the
selected item.
& 10). At row 11 begins the database list for the Alloy Tab. First a title header, then beneath it the
Alloy Tab list of units begins.
1) Working from left to right. Column 1 (SORT) is used to return the data to a logical display order.
If you add anything and keep the data in the same logical order it is in now, you should renumber
column 1 beginning with one and ending with the largest number. It is easy to write a formula to
renumber. Dragging the numbers down to fill is too slow. The formula would be 1 plus the cell
above, except for the first row and it is just a one. Do not leave any formula active in the data if you
don't have to. After renumbering, copy the value instead of the formula. This column is used to help
organize the large amount of data. It is not used by the program. You may use this column in other
ways to organize the data if you wish.
at row 5 on this tab immediately above this column. You should make no adjustments to this formula.
All items must have this UPC created by the formula. Always copy the value in this column to
conserve RAM and speed up the calculations.
3) Column 3 is used for the Short Description of the item. This description combined with others to
create the descriptions on the ENTRY tab. Write as short a description as you can that tells what the
item is. Do not add anything that is displayed in column four (4) or it will be duplicated in the
description. (If it is used in column fourdont enter it again in the short description)
4) Column 4 (Column Description Used In The Estimate) is used created by a formula stored in the
gray are in row five (5). Copy the formula and create the description, then copy the value to remove
the formula and reduce the number of formulas in the worksheet. Or simply press the yellow "Reset
UPC & Description" button. This Macro will copy the formula in the second column, row five to
update the UPC (Unit Price Catalog Number) and create the calculated description. This Macro will
copy the formulas, calculate and then remove the formulas leaving only the values.
the first one it comes too. After you have completed the new item, record it in the Seek File so that it
is kept current with all the other SEEK CODES listed for reference.
two systems (NPS/ISO), the columns are switched. So make your entries at columns AK thru AN, not
at column numbers 6 and 7. Reducing tees, concentric reducers, eccentric reducers and swages require
a second size. O-lets don't require the on size but it is best to provide the information. The
description looks strange when you dont provide all the needed information.
8) Column 8 provides information about the items Material Specification. See specifications at column
"O" on the "S" tab for a list. Examples: 304, 309, 310, 316, 317, 321, 347, 348, 304L, 316L, 317L,
ABS, ALLOY 20, CARBON MOLYBDENIUM, CARPENTER, CAST STEEL, CHROME
MOLYBDENIUM, CI, CPVC, CS 1 , CR 2 , CR 9, CR, DI, GALV, DVDF, FRP, FS 1 1/4 CR, FS
2 1/4 CR, FS 9 CR, FS GALV, HASTELLOY, INCONEL, MI, MONEL, NICKEL STEEL,
POLYBUTYLENE, POLYETHYLENE, POLYPROPYLENE, PVC and CPVC. You can find this
list in the Specification Validation List at the Specifications.
9) Column 9 contains the schedule of the pipe/fittings. The schedule of the material begins with "S/"
or ___# or 2, 3, 6, 9M's See specifications at column "P" on the "S" tab for a list. Examples: S/5,
S/10, S/20, S/30, S/40, STD WT, S/60, XH, XH GALV, S/80, S/100,S/120, S/140, S/160, XXH, STD
GALV, S/40 GALV, S/40 C&W, S/80 C&W, STD WT C&W, 150# BLK, 300# BLK, 125# BLK,
250# BLK, SERVICE WT, XH WT, 2M,3M, 3M GALV, 6M, 6M GALV, 9M, 150# GALV, 300#
GALV, 125# GALV, 250# GALV, CLASS 50, CLASS 150, CLASS 200 and CLASS 300. You can
10) Column 10 contains the type of connection used by the pipe/fittings. See specifications at column
"Q" on the "S" tab for a list. Examples: BELLED END, SW, BE, PE, SW, BJ, BW, THR, FLG,
GROOVED, GLUE PRESS, LEAD/OAKUM, GASKET, CLAMP, MECHANICAL FUSION, SO,
LAP JT, STUB-IN and NOZZLE. You can find this list in the Specification Validation List at the
Specifications.
11) Column 11 contains the type of manufacturing used to construct the pipe/fittings. See
specifications at column "R" on the "S" tab for a list. Examples: SML, ERW, BELLED, FF, RF, RTJ,
ASB and GARLOCK. You can find this list in the Specification Validation List at the Specifications.
12) Column 12 contains the ASTM for the pipe/fittings. See specifications at column "S" on the "S"
tab for a list. Examples: A105, A106, A120, A126, A181, A182, A197, A216, A217, A234, A240,
A436, A445, A47, A487, A494, A53, A536, A563, A567, A672, A733, A813, AWWA, C110,
AWWA, C111, B127, B160, B161, B162, B163, B164, B165, B167, B168, B333, B335, B336, B337,
B363, B366, B407, B408 and B409. You can find this list in the Specification Validation List at the
Specifications.
13) Column 13 contains the GRADE for the pipe/fittings. See specifications at column "T" on the "S"
tab for a list. Examples: A, B, B60, B65, B70, B60, B65 OR B70, C X-42, 1, F1, F9, F11, F22, F91,
WP, WPA, WPB, WPC, WP1, WP9, WP11, WP12, WP22, WP91, F5, 2, 5, 22, 316, LCB, WCB,
LC3, CF3, CF3M, CF8, CF8M, CF8C and CN7M. You can find this list in the Specification
14) Column 14 contains the PRESSURE RATING for the pipe/fittings. See specifications at column
"U" on the "S" tab for a list. Enter one from the list if a flange/fitting needs the rating to match the
specification. Examples: 125#, 150#, 300#, 600#, 900#, 1500# and 2500#.
15.
16) Column 16 (UOM) is the unit of measure. There are a few rules to follow here. The LF (w/o the
dot) is reserved for linear feet of pipe. Use LF. (with the dot) for all other linear feet units. CY.(with
the dot) is reserved for cubic yards of concrete. All other cubic yards use CY (w/o the dot). Even
though you indicate the final units are cubic yards or square yards, you will enter ONLY EA, LF or SF
into the left quantity. PIPEtalk will convert based on formula type (1,2 or 3). See discussion 26 for
types of formulas.
surface, not the outer jacket area. Row five on tab "C" has a formula you can use to calculate the SF.
Keep all the units in NPS. When you switch to ISO, the program will use the NPS units and convert
them to ISO.
second quantity is NOT multiplied times the value at column 23 of tab "C". The first quantity is
enter it. Do not convert it to SF per LB. Keep it as SF of paint or insulation per LF. When you
change to ISO the program will recalculate to square meters for you.
weight if you know it. Keep all the units in NPS. When you switch to ISO, the program will use the
NPS units and convert them to ISO.
made to count over-lapping welds and reduce the total (fitting to fitting). This was not a issue because
the welding was included in the manpower of the fittings, pipe and valves. An exact count was not
that important. If you change estimating methods to having to count each weld to apply manpower,
this would cause a problem. Change the setup to "N" (N29) for the weld count if you want to count
your own welds and change the estimating units to yours (#2 at N30). Currently adding a field weld is
an addition to the work. (You don't have to deduct it from any scope)
26) In order to speed up the entry of data, a calculation type is pre-set at column 26 of the "C" tab.
Type 1 requires PIPEtalk to do nothing, Type 2 requires your entry to be divided by 27-so enter CF
and it will convert to CY. Type 3 will be converted to SY-enter SF in the takeoff. Later the same
calculation type information will be used to convert your entry to metric. This feature is not ready at
this time. If you want the CF entry to be converted to CY use 2, for SF to SY use 3. Make no change;
enter a 1 in column 26. This setting will have no effect on the conversion of LF to LB if it is left on
the default setting of 1.
filter used to create a list going to purchasing-it does not really mean that there is no material nor will
material prices be blocked.
between them based on the settings in the setup screen. There are items that should be coded only one
way or the other. As a rule, hangers, valves and instruments are "F" only. Field only items are "F"
and Shop items are "S". Concrete, building steel, equipment setting, earthwork and steel items are
generally "F".
29) Column 29 pre-sets the crew mix to use. See instructions for the Setup Entry Screen for a
discussion of rates. Pick the correct crew and enter it at column 29 on the "C" tab.
column 30 and column 31. Enter your desired code (One that fits the majority of situations) and
modify the codes within the specification groups after you complete the takeoff and before you
summarize to job setup values.
to use the units loaded at this time. It is your responsibility for their accuracy and correctness by
running a sample estimate and checking the results. PIPEtalk is not responsible for typos or
inaccuracy. See the disclaimer at the "About The Author" at the introduction. Only prompt limited
support by email is provided. (pipetalk@hotmail.com)
UOM.
and five (5). Do not change the code meanings and do enter a code at each unit you create. Dont
leave this code blank. A list of the SUMMARY CODES is included in the SEEK CODE File and in
this manual.
CHAPTER EIGHT
The P (Pricing) Tab
Keeping prices up to date is a real battle if you dont have a close working relationship with a
major material supplier. I have obtained a large list of materials from a national piping
supplier. I would have included their name here, but they would not cooperate in the
distribution of PIPEtalk . The pipe materials are broke down into groups that equate to your
suppliers normal wholesale sources. Your supplier will be able to help you zero in on the cost of
the standard groups of pipe materials in PIPEtalk if you submit samples of each group of the
pipe materials to them. Review the prices that you receive back from your supplier. Organize
the prices into the groups on the Price Tab. Adjust the multipliers in PIPEtalk for each group
until you get the prices to reflect your suppliers prices. As you bid very large jobs, you will be
able to take some discounts and you will be close to the correct price for bidding. Remember
prices that come from the Price Tab can still be adjusted globally on the Setup Tab before that
are used by the estimate.
PART SEVENTEEN
The Item Class Multipliers
The Pricing Tab consists of two major parts. The first part is a set of Item Class Multipliers in the top
left side that adjusts all the list prices on the Price Tab. The second part is the main Material Price List
shown below the multipliers. List prices are up through twelve inches are included here. Generally,
larger size prices have been entered on the (C)Carbon Steel and (A-lloy) Stainless Steel Tabs at the
default price area.
The Item Class Multipliers has three sets of multipliers for the material item class listed. Each set is
divided into two sources, domestic and import. Plus a global multiplier for each class item for quick
global adjustments to all the sets is provided. The various parts of the Item Class Multipliers are
discussed on the next page.
ITEM CLASS MULTIPLIERS ILLUSTRATION
6) Each Item Class Has Three Sets Of Multipliers
4) Current Multiplier Running

5a/b) Macro Button to Update
Prices Button
3) Item Class Group Name
1) Item Class Global Multiplier Running
2) Item Class Description

8) Go To Price List Menu A
7) Document Price Source and History
B
1) The multiplier set is chosen by the Setup Screen as discussed in the prior chapter. The current
multiplier is chosen by the Setup Screen from either Domestic or Import multiplier of the three
available sets. Again, that choice is selected from the Setup Screen at Tab S. The multiplier chosen
by the Setup Screen will be shown at the current multiplier column. The Item Class Global Multiplier
adjusts whatever multiplier the Setup Screen has selected. The possible Setup Screen choices are; Set
1--Domestic, Set 1Import, Set 2Domestic, Set 2Import, Set 3Domestic and Set 3-Import.
The Item Class Global Multiplier allows for quick adjustments for each class of material. Instead of
having to adjust each price set for the class you want to adjust, you can simply adjust the current
multiplier running. The Item Class Global Multiplier will adjust the current running multiplier which
will adjust the List Price shown The Price Tabs adjusted list prices are the ones used in the estimate.
The retail list prices are shown in the Price Tab at the right edge and each are adjusted based on which
Item Class they are. The Item Class current running multiplier adjusts those retail prices. The formula
for a price that is used in the estimate would be;
( ( ( LIST PRICE x ( CURRENT MULTIPLIER = PRICE TAB GLOBAL x ITEM CLASS

MULTIPLIER ) ) = PRICE SHOWN ON PRICE TAB LIST) x SETUP SCREEN ADJUSTMENTS)
= PRICE SHOWN ON ENTRY SCREEN
The formula simply says that the list price is adjusted by the multiplier set you picked from the Setup
Screen. However, perhaps the price for all the sets need to be adjusted by the Item Class Global
Multiplier. As an example say you recently had a price increase for forged steel fittings at 18DA.
So, you adjust the Item Class Global Multiplier upward by 8% (1.08). By entering the adjustment at
the Item Class Global Multiplier, you have indirectly adjusted all multiplier sets by adjusting the Item
Class current multiplier being used. Of course you could go to each multiplier and adjust it to include
the added 8% and set the global back at 1.00 It is just easier to adjust them all at one time using the
global.
2,3) The Item Class Description provides a written description of the class code. Item Class Codes
break down the materials into manufacturing wholesale groups. These are the companies that your
vendor will go to for a quote. A detail list of the Item Class descriptions and code numbers follow;
Item Class Description Item Class

PIPE DSAW DOM 24-42 02DA
PIPE ELECT WELD DOM 2-3 02EA
PIPE ELECT WELD 4-12 02EB
PIPE ELECT WELD DOM 14-16 02EC
PIPE ELECT WELD DOM 18-24 02ED
PIPE ELECT WELD IMP 2-24 02EN
PIPE PRESS TUBING DOM 02PA
PIPE PRESS TUBING IMP 02PN
PIPE SEAML DOM 2-4 02SA
PIPE SEAML DOM 5-12 02SB
PIPE SEAML DOM 14-16 02SC
PIPE SEAML IMP 2-24 02SN
POWELL BRZ VALVES 08PB
POWELL IRON VALVES 08PI
FABRI KNIFE GATE VALVES 09FA
POWELL CS VALVES CS 09PC
R P $ C FS VALVES A 11RA
R P $ C FS VALVES D 11RD
APOLLO STAND VALVES 12AA
APOLLO FLANGED BALL VALVES 12AB
CS BW FITTINGS DOM 16DA
CS STD/EXH LR 90/45 .5-24 DOM 16DB
CS < 12" ELLS IMP 16FA
CS 14"> ELLS IMP 16FB
CS BW FIT TEES IMP 16FC
CS BW FIT REDUCERS IMP 16FG
FS FLANGES DOM 17DA
FS FLANGES <12" IMP 17FA
FS FLANGES 14"> IMP 17FB
A105 FS FITTINGS DOM 18DA
A105 FS FITTINGS BAR STOCK DOM 18DB
A105 FS UNIONS DOM 18DU
A105 FS FITTINGS IMP 18FA
A105 FS FITTINGS BAR STOCK IMP 18FB
A105 FS UNIONS IMP 18FU
BONNEY FS OLETS 18OA
CI PLUGS & BUSHINGS 19FP
MI FIT COM (W) 19MA
MI FIT SPEC 19MB
ALL IRON UNIONS (W) 19UA
JB SMITH SWAGE NIPPLES 21J1
STD BLANK & GALV BW NIP A53 21NA
EH BLK SMLS NIPPLES 21NI
SS SEAML PIPE S10 DOM 66S1
SS SEAML PIPE DOM 66SD
SS SEAML PIPE IMP 66SF
SS WELD PIPE 304/L55 S10>40 DOM 66W1
SS WELD PIPE 304 S80 DOM 66W2

SS WELD PIPE 316 S5,S10,S40 DOM 66WA
SS WELD PIPE 316 S80 DOM 66WB
SS WELDED PIPE IMP 66WF
DURCO ATOMACO BALL VALVES 69DB
DURCO VALVES 69DS
POWELL SS VALVES FLG 69PO
POWELL SS VALVES THR & SW 69PS
ANGLE RINGS 71AR
SS 316 TEE A403 CR ???????? 71PG
SS SEAML BW FITTINGS DOM 71SD
SS SEAML BW FITTINGS IMP 71SF
SS BW FITTINGS DOM 71WD
* SS BW SMALL BORE 45 ELLS DOM 71WD.
SS BW FITTINGS IMP 71WF
ALASKAN BACKING FLANGES 73BF
LAP/JT & L/WT BACKUP FLGS 73BU
SS FORGED FLGS DOM 73FD
SS FORGED FLGS IMP 73FF
SS SWAGE NIPPLES S40 76N4
SS SWAGE NIPPLES S80 76N8
SS NIPPLES 76NI
SS 2/3M FITTINGS DOM 76PD
SS 2/3M FITTINGS IMP 76PF
SS 150# FITTINGS DOM 76SD
SS 150# FITTINGS IMP 76SF
FITTINGS O-LETS 76SO
CUT LENGTH PIPE IN STOCK CUTP
VENDOR2 98 ?
GRINNELL GRINNELL
VENDOR2 VENDOR2
CIVIL CIVIL
CS FIELD MATERIALS FROM IC 311A
CS SHOP FABR MATERIALS FROM IC 313A
CS VALVES, FLANGED 315A
CS VALVES, NON-FLANGED 316A
SS FIELD MATERIALS FROM IC 321A
SS SHOP FABR MATERIALS FROM IC 323A
SS VALVES, FLANGED 325A
SS VALVES, NON-FLANGED 326A
ALLOY FIELD MATERIALS FROM IC 331A
ALLOY SHOP FABR MATERIALS FROM IC 333A
ALLOY VALVES, FLANGED FROM IC 335A
ALLOY VALVES, NON-FLANGED FROM IC 336A
4) The Current Multiplier Running is shown for each Item Class in this column.
5) After you made any change in the Item Class Multipliers or add an item to the Price List, press this
macro button to update the Price Tab. Each list price will be updated depending on which Item Class
it belongs to. The UPC will also be re-run to create the UPC any new items you added.
6) These are the columns where the three sets of multipliers are stored for each Item Class. These
groups are; Set 1--Domestic, Set 1Import, Set 2Domestic, Set 2Import, Set 3Domestic and
Set 3-Import. Each is stored in these vertical columns to the right of the Item Class.
7) It is important to know when you last updated the prices and from whom you obtained the price.
This area of the Price Tab allows you space to store that information.
8) Press this button to split the screen at the materials list and display the menus to GoTo the different
menus.
More Information about the P Tab --See a birds eye view of the Following Multiplier Chart
COMPLETE ITEM CLASS MULTIPLIERS CHART ILLUSTRATION
The illustration below and on the next page, shows the complete Item Class Multiplier chart list. At
the bottom on the left are some civil prices along with the multipliers used for the Grinnell catalog
prices and Source1's prices used at various locations. Source1 is another database from an un-named
vendor. Source1 is used in the Universal Tab to assist in pricing miscellaneous materials. If You have
received an updated index file from us, press the GET NEW PRICE MULTIPLIERS FROM FILE
button. You can view the Index by pressing the GOTO INDEXES button. Press the GOTO PRICE
LIST button to see the prices below the multiplier list shown below.
If you are adjusting the prices (Modifying some & looking at results) and simply want to view the
revised price before sending it to any other tabs, press the large green button to update only tab P.
If you want to update the entire file, you should make your adjustments to the percentage in columns 5
thru 10. Be sure to post the dates in columns 11 thru 16 to correspond to the update (Revision Dates
are Very Important!). Then press the large yellow button to update all. THIS IS A VERY SLOW
MACRO.
Continued on the next page

Part 2 of 2 from Prior Page

PART EIGHTEEN
The Material Price List
Each price provided by the vendor was classified and coded using the numbered columns 5>15 so that
PIPEtalk could locate the price. If you add an item to the Price Tab you will need to enter the same
information at columns 5>15 that is used to locate the item on the U, C and A tabs. The code
breakdown for all the tabs must be exactly the same for the tabs to find the item. Because Carbon
Steel and Alloys are both priced inside this tab, the GoTo Buttons include both material types. Many
alloys are not priced in this Price Tab. They were not provided as a standard list price item by this
vendor.
We have used another major sourse to calculate many prices and have now included them inside the
P (price) tab. They start with an IC in the part number. This additional pricing is included in
PIPEtalk beginning with version 2.0
Notice that CIVIL has a GoTo button. Civil prices were added to this vendors prices at the bottom of
the tab. This was done to capture pricing for like items of civil materials. This keeps you from having
to add so many prices for the very large list of civil items in PIPEtalk. The civil items allow you to
simply find the concrete, rebar, forms, etc. prices here in the master price list. A discussion of the
various parts of the Material Price List follows the next set of illustrations.
MATERIAL PRICE LIST ILLUSTRATION

Material GoTo Buttons
A
Column Numbers Referenced by The Discussions in This Chapter
MATERIAL PRICE LIST DISCUSSION

A new SEARCH button has been added to the header. Use it or the Goto buttons to find items
inside Tab P.
If you are adjusting the prices (Modifying some & looking at results) and simply want to view the
revised price before sending it to any other tabs, press the large green button to update only tab P.
If you want to update the entire file, you should make your adjustments, then press the large yellow
button to update all. THIS IS A VERY SLOW MACRO.
1) CALCULATED (RUN MACRO, NO ENTRY REQUIRED) -- The UPC for the Price Tab. The
Yellow Press To Reset Codes And Prices button will build this code if you change the file. Run this
macro every time you make any change to the multipliers or the materials
2) Optional -- In order to line up the tab from one side to the other, the vendors part number should be
shown on both sides. See also column 24.
3) Optional -- When I receive vendor data I place a counter to return the data in the original order if
required. This column is not required to be used when you add materials.
4) Optional -- My first step was to group the price list I received into major groups, such as fittings,
pipe, and valves. This column contains the original grouping. This column is not required to be used
when you add materials.
and the second a length of the item. These columns are replaced with Excel column numbers AC thru
AF. AC and AD are NPS. AE and AF are ISO sizes. When the macro runs to switch between the
two systems (NPS/ISO), the columns are switched. So make your entries at columns AC thru AF, not
at column numbers 5 and 6. Reducing tees, concentric reducers, eccentric reducers and swages require
a second size. O-lets don't require the on size but it is best to provide the information. The
description looks strange when you dont provide all the needed information.
7) Required information -- Column 7 is the SEEK CODE which provides PIPEtalk with a unique ID
for the items. Combined with the first and second size it creates the UPC. If you create a new item
and assign it a new SEEK CODE. Run Excels FIND to see if it already exists for another type of item.
If it does, rename it to something else. You cannot have two different subjects with the same SEEK
CODE. Excel would locate only the first one it comes too. After you have completed the new item,
record it in the Seek Code File so that it is kept current with all the other SEEK CODES listed for
reference.
8) Required information -- Column 8 provides information about the items MATERIAL

Specification. Examples: 304, 309, 310, 316, 317, 321, 347, 348, 304L, 316L, 317L, ABS, ALLOY
20, CARBON MOLYBDENIUM, CARPENTER CAST STEEL, CHROME MOLYBDENIUM, CI,
CPVC, CS, 1 CR, 2 CR, 9 CR, DI GALV, DVDF, FRP, FS, 1 CR, FS 2 1/4 CR, FS 9 CR, FS
GALV, HASTELLOY, INCONEL, MI, MONEL, NICKEL STEEL, POLYBUTYLENE,
POLYETHYLENE, POLYPROPYLENE, PVC and PVDF. You can find this list in the Specification
9) Required information -- Column 9 contains the SCHEDULE of the pipe/fittings. The schedule of
the material begins with "S/" or ___# or 2, 3, 6, 9M's Examples: S/5, S/10, S/20, S/30, S/40, STD
WT, S/60, XH, GALV S/80, S/100, S/120, S/140, S/160, XXH, STD, GALV S/40, GALV S/40, C&W
S/80, C&W STD, WT C&W, 150# BLK, 300# BLK, 125# BLK, 250# BLK, SERVICE WT, XH WT,
2M, 3M, 3M GALV, 6M, 6M GALV, 9M, 150# GALV, 300# GALV, 125# GALV , 250# GALV,
CLASS 50, CLASS 150, CLASS 200 and CLASS 300. You can find this list in the Specification
10) Required information -- Column 10 contains the type of CONNECTION used by the
pipe/fittings. See specifications at column "Q" on the "S" tab for a list. Examples: BELLED END,
SW, BE, PE, SW, BJ, BW, THR, FLG, GROOVED, GLUE, PRESS, LEAD/OAKUM, GASKET,
CLAMP, MECHANICAL FUSION, SO, LAP JT, STUB-IN and NOZZLE. You can find this list in
the Specification Validation List at the Specifications.
11) Required if applicable -- Column 11 contains the type of MANUFACTURING used to construct
the pipe/fittings. Examples: SML, ERW, BELLED, FF, RF, RTJ, ASB and GARLOCK. You can
12) Required information -- Column 12 contains the ASTM for the pipe/fittings. Examples: A105,
A53, A536, A563, A567, A672, A733, A813, AWWA C110, AWWA C111, B127, B160, B161,
B162, B163, B164, B165, B167, B168, B333, B335, B336, B337, B363, B366, B407, B408 and B409.
You can find this list in the Specification Validation List at the Specifications.
13) Required if applicable-- Column 13 contains the GRADE for the pipe/fittings. Examples: A, B,
B60, B65, B70, B60, B65, OR B70, C X-42, 1, F1, F9, F11, F22, F91, WP, WPA, WPB, WPC, WP1,
WP9, WP11, WP12, WP22, WP91, F5, 2, 5, 22, 316, LCB, WCB, LC3, CF3, CF3M, CF8, CF8M,
CF8C and CN7M. You can find this list in the Specification Validation List at the Specifications.
14) Required if applicable-- Column 14 contains the PRESSURE RATING for the pipe/fittings.
Enter one from the list if a flange/fitting needs the rating to match the specification. Examples: 125#,
150#, 300#, 600#, 900#, 1500# and 2500#. You can find this list in the Specification Validation List
at the Specifications.
15) Required if applicable-- Column 15 contains the LINING for the pipe/fittings. See specifications
at column "R" on the "S" tab for a list. Enter one type from the list if the item has a lining. Examples:
C276, CEMENT, EPOXY, GLASS, KYNAR, MG-PSZ, POLYETHYLENE, POLYPROPYLENE
PTFE, PVDF, RUBBER, SARAN, TEFLON and TFE. You can find this list in the Specification
16) Required information -- Enter the Domestic or Import indicator (D or I). This is required so that
the Setup Screen can find the materials location source.
17) Not usedspare.
18,19) Column 18 is the calculated ISO cost and column 19 is the ISO UOM. Both are calculated
when you update the unit costs.
20) The materials are broken down into a few major groups. If you know the group, enter it here. It is
not required, but helps find the items you are looking for. Examples are SS and CS.
21) Required information -- In order for the Item Class Multiplier chart to attach itself to the list price,
you need the Item Class code here. Without the code the estimate price in column 27 cannot be
calculated.
22) Required information -- Vendor provided description of the material is posted in this column.
23) Required information -- Vendor provided unit of measure of the material is posted in this column.
24) Required information -- The vendors part number is again entered here in order to line up the tab
from one side to the other. The vendors part number should be shown on both sides. One time at
column 2 and again at column 24. The program will obtain this part number and display it in the
estimate out data.
25) Required information -- Column 25 is the original list price you got from the vendor. Do not use
any multipliers on the list price.
26) CALCULATED (RUN MACRO, NO ENTRY REQUIRED) -- The multiplier that the Item Class
Multiplier chart provided to be used to adjust the list price is shown in this column to the right of the
list price it will be adjusting. The Yellow Press To Reset Codes And Prices button will build this
multiplier. Run this macro every time you make any change to the multipliers or the materials list.
27) CALCULATED (RUN MACRO, NO ENTRY REQUIRED) -- Column 27 is for prices that will
be used in the estimate. This is the value that will be used in the ENTRY tab to create the unit price. It
is created when the Yellow Press To Reset Codes And Prices button macro multiplies the list price
times the selected multiplier from the Item Class chart. In the ENTRY tab the value from this price
column might be adjusted based on a setting in the Setup.
28) CALCULATED (RUN MACRO, NO ENTRY REQUIRED) This price update information will
show up in the estimate. It comes from the Item Class Multiplier chart. If a date is stored, the Yellow
Press To Reset Codes And Prices button macro will get the date for you.
29) Optional -- In order to see that the prices did indeed change, copy the prices from column 27 to
column 29. If there is a problem with the multipliers or the macro, you can replace the prices you had.
This is just a precaution.
CHAPTER NINE
Sample Practice Estimate
We have covered all the basic information of how to use PIPEtalk . It is time to see if you can
create something using the information provided. Chapter Nine contains the SEEK CODES
and what the crews/craft resources are. Work Chapters Eight and Nine together with this
example as you enter the sample practice estimate. Load the PIPEtalk Program and follow the
instructions. It is really easy to do.
PART NINETEEN
Sample Practice Estimates
The two samples attached provide a guide to understanding how to do an estimate using the PIPEtalk
program. The first sample is of a pipe isometric with a bill of materials. The second is a sketch made
just to show the entries you used to do the estimate. Follow along with the steps. You will be
referenced back to sections of the book that you will need to read. When you get to this chapter, you
should have already read the prior chapters. If you have not, maybe you should look them over before
proceeding with these samplesor look over them as you make the necessary entries.
Sample Practice Estimate One
FIGURE 1A--PIPE ISOMETRIC

Pipe isometrics provide the physical information for the pipe takeoff. They are not to scale. Some
estimators measure thru the fittings, some do not. The reason you may include the fitting lengths as
part of the pipe length is to accommodate for pipe waste. However, you are accidentally adding more
manpower to the estimate too. This added man-power might keep you from getting the project when
bidding hard dollar prices. In PIPEtalk, you need to enter each piece of pipe you see. Do not
accumulate a series of lengths and make an entry. In this section I will attempt to guide you through a
typical takeoff using PIPEtalk. Look at the drawing above and the bill of materials from a typical
isometric drawing.
FIGURE 1B--PIPE ISOMETRIC BILL OF MATERIAL

Review the material types and schedules in preparation to do the pipe take-off quantity survey.
Remember, after you do the quantity entries, you are finished with estimating the manpower. If
PIPEtalk is completely setup and priced outyou are then finished with the pipe estimate. Paste the
information created by PIPEtalk into you main estimating spreadsheet summary document. Add
indirects and other direct estimates, subcontract quotes to the PIPEtalk estimate.
STEP-BY-STEP INSTRUCTIONS
STEP 01: Do the setups on the Setup tab (S). This is covered in Chapter One. Use Chapter one
to guide you thru the setups.
STEP 02: We need to select the group of specifications to use. Go to the Setup (S) tab. Select
the SPEC FILES button at the top of the S(Setup/Specs) tab to open the Titles file.
Select the PIPEtalk SP01Generic Set 1 set and LOAD it.
STEP 03: On the ENTRY tab select the appropriate specification to use (STD WT).
Here we select the STD WT specification. This is a carbon steel pipe material, 150#
flanges. Valves are not specification driven. You select them from the valve list
provided or add new ones with your numbers (SEEK Codes). Always start valve
SEEK CODES with a V. Press the Spec Info button to see more about the spec or go
to the spec list :
We can also tell this is 150# by calculating the Entry sheet and looking at the right lower part of the
upper entry screen.
Spec Information On the S Tab (Must Calculate after creating/modifying)

Generally, the pipe has the specification in the line number. Create the specification(s) for your client,
then later pick the right one from the panel.
STEP 04: Review the estimates requirements for the bid breakdown to be submitted to the
owner/engineer/general contractor. Determine a set of codes to capture those
requirements. (Work Breakdown Structure of Estimate Proposal) On the Entry Screen
at cell BR140, select the WBS bid code from the list. If you have not built the
Proposals breakdown, do so by selecting the button above the code entry area. It has
Code: on the button. Press the Code: button and enter them into the list on the
right sideremoving the old ones, adding the new ones. You can have 70 WBS codes.
After creating them, place your cursor on the code you want to use and press the light
green button above the code to copy the code and return to the Entry Screen. You can
then use the pull-down to select them from the Entry Screen if you prefer. If you store
your estimate into an estimate file, the WBS codes are stored inside the estimate file.
When you reload the estimate the codes are brought back to this list. See below:
STEP 05: Enter the Line-- line number at cell BS140 on the ENTRY tab. It can be any text
length that is acceptable by Excel (<256). Enter whatever you want to for this sample.
See the following picture:
STEP 06: Enter the Dwg-- drawing number with revision number at cell BT140 on the ENTRY
tab. It can be any length text that is acceptable by Excel (<256). Enter anything you
want for the sample. See below:
STEP 07: Enter the From at cell BU140 on the ENTRY tab. This is usually another line
number or equipment the line comes from this, based on flow direction. As before,
your limit is any text length that is acceptable by Excel. Enter anything you want for
the sample. See below:
STEP 08: Enter the To at cell BW140 on the ENTRY tab. This is usually another line number
or equipment the line goes to this, based on flow direction. As before, your limit is
any text length that is acceptable by Excel. Enter anything you want for the sample.
See below:
STEP 09: A lot of information about the shop and field is covered in the setup chapter. Here is
where you enter Y if you want any of the pipe shop fabricated and the labor hours
and cost captured. Materials at the shop is not determined. Enter N at cell BX140 on
the ENTRY tab if you do not want the shop work split out. There is a drop down to
select from. Yes or No is not acceptable---please use Y or N. The formulas are
very long/largeonly the short version of Yes and No should be used. Enter a Y for
this sample. See the below:
STEP 10: Look at the line number to determine if the line is insulated. If so, what is the type?
What is the thickness? This cell can look at your entry and determine how to calculate
the insulation. It changes formulas based on your entry. You will need to enter in a
way the cell can see your thickness. This is the comment information at that cell:
Enter the specification and a thickness to use in cell BY140 using a decimal in the
thickness. Enter a whole number and a decimal (Exa: Enter 2.5 )
Please follow the rules above. The program also adjusts calculations based on if the
line is heat traced or not. We have added some pricing for insulation. This is now
being added to the data base. Look for the insulation units at the top of the U tab.
After you calculate the line you are estimating, look at the quantity of insulation. Find
the insulation type you want from the U tab, enter the correct SEEK CODE and enter
the square feet calculated by the PIPEtalk program.
You may use the Assistant combined with the Calculate this tab and Post button to
make the calculated entries for paint and insulation.
The program will not automatically enter the seek code but will do the calculations if
you press the buttons after you have entered all the pipe and fitting and
entered the correct SEEK code for the paint and insulation. Enter a N for this
example. See below:
STEP 11: Will the pipe paint? If , yes, then place a Y or the name of the pipe paint spec at cell
CA140. If it does not paint, simply type N. If you place N PIPEtalk will not
calculate the paint SF. We have added some estimating units for painting. See the U
tab after insulation to review and select the painting you want.
BLAST/PRIME EPOXY SEEK CODE = COAT1
BLAST/PRIME/ONE TOP EPOXY SEEK CODE = COAT2
BLAST/PRIME/TWO TOP EPOXY SEEK CODE = COAT3
Enter a Y for this sample estimate. See below:
STEP 12: As the work gets higher off the ground, enter the height from the ground. The higher it
is, the more PIPEtalk will add to the labor. Enter 15 feet (M) at cell CB140. This is
covered in Chapter 1 and Chapter 2 Section 6 Discussion 52. There is a chart at the
end of Chapter 2 Section 6 that discusses the multiplier values. See below:
1
You can now adjust the height multipliers. Press the button at the top of Tab S to go to
the height multipliers.
STEP 13: See also Chapter 2 Section 6 Discussion 54. You have entered most of the
information you need to be ready to make the take-off. But, first are you using the spec
name you want to show up on the take-off? You can use one spec and call it something
else. You can run a generic specification or any other specification and call it another
name if you wish to. Enter another name for the spec and then press the Enter Spec
Override Name button. See below:
STEP 13: Now we are ready to make our first take-off entry. Look at the bill of materials. Enter
the first item into the ENTRY tab at cell BR147. Enter 6 which is the size of the pipe,
now enter the SEEK CODE of 90 and a quantity of 6. Press the small blue macro
vertical green to the left of the size 6 to do a Quick-view. You will see this:
Now enter a 3 at the second size at BS148. Then enter a SEEK CODE of RE.
PIPEtalk will know you are still running 6 inch pipe because you did not change the
first size. Press the vertical green macro button to the left of the first size column on
row 148 to do a Quick-view of that row. You will see this:
STEP 14: Continuing with item three on the bill of materials, enter the SEEK CODE of F for
the default flange and a quantity of 3. Calculate using the Quick-View bar. You will
see that the default flange is a 150# flange.
The bill of material says 600#, so change the SEEK CODE to FWN6 to over-ride the
default flange. Calculate using the Quick-View button. That now matches the bill of
materials -- 600# with a bore of STD. However, the pipe size is not correct. Change
the size to 3 instead of 6 at the first size column and again calculate using the Quick-
View button. This provides the correct pipe fittings. As you can see, you have to
watch what you do or you will make an error. See the completed estimate picture at
the end of this sample.
STEP 15: Item four of the bill of materials is the gasket. PIPEtalk does not provide for a gasket
only. Item eight is the bolts for the gasket. PIPEtalk combines the two entries. It is not
often that you would need gaskets without bolts. Enter a SEEK CODE of BG and a
quantity of 2. Calculate using the Quick-View button. As was the problem before, the
default is a 150# flange. So change the SEEK CODE to BG6 to get 600# and
calculate using the Quick-View button. The size is 3 which is the same as the prior.
PIPEtalk used that size, we have no change to make to the size.
See the completed estimate picture at the end of this sample.
STEP 16: Item five of the bill of materials is the pipe. The pipe is entered in seven entries. Look
over the drawing. I have entered 9, 11, 2, 18, 20, 1 and 2. This adds up to more than
they have in the bill of materials. Why do I enter the pipe separately? In order to count
the welds for me as correctly as possible. If you were to add the pipe as one entry, the
weld count cannot be made properly. Any length greater than 20 feet for P2 adds an
extra weld. We entered a P, which by spec definition is a P2. I looked over the pipe
and determined that it is possible to have four (4) spool pieces. Because we are running
with the spools in the on (Y)position, we must handle them after they arrive on site.
STEP 17: A hanger is on the bill of material next. Determine which Grinnell number is the one
you need and enter it. Many figure numbers are not priced. Many other companies
cross reference their numbers with the Grinnell figure numbers. On the CD you will
find cross reference files you can use. Here I use HG62Athat means it is a hanger
(H) and it is galvanized (G) and it is Grinnell figure number 62A which is a GALV-
FIG 62A ADJUSTABLE PIPE STANCHION 6in Line. The bill of materials
actually referenced a detail number which I do not have a drawing of. You should have
these drawings to see the hanger details. The next item is also a hanger, a dummy
leg. I used a HLEG or BLACK HANGER DUMMY LEG OR BASE ELL CS 6in
Line See the completed estimate picture at the end of this sample.
STEP 18: A small length of 3 pipe is next. Enter the size and a P at the SEEK CODE. The
quantity of one foot is enough. See the completed estimate picture at the end of this
sample.
STEP 19: Now another hanger. It is a shoe. I have used a HG160 which reads GALV-
HANGER SHOE FIG 160 6in Line Be sure to change the pipe size to 6.
STEP 20: They have a valve listed now. They ask for a particular valve that is in their
specifications. The entry you make depends on who you are doing the estimate for.
You will need to develop the valves for your clients. Here, I use a generic valve. I
entered VB6F. This reads as Valve, Ball, 600#, Flanged. The valve has a chain
wheel operator. So use a VCW as the next SEEK CODE. See the completed estimate
picture at the end of this sample.
STEP 21: We need another support---See STEP 17
STEP 22: Another valve. This is a gate valve. I also used a generic valveVG6F which is
VALVE GATE 600# FLANGED 2in Line Notice the line size changed to 2
STEP 23: More pipe. It is a piece of 2 Std Wall pipe. I used a S/80 small bore pipe that is in the
specification setup. Usually, short pieces of pipe (nipple length) step up in strength
over the rest of the pipe. S/80 is a better selection for the budget than STD. See the
completed estimate picture at the end of this sample.
STEP 24: One reason I selected this drawing was that it had many types of fittings. The bill of
material at item 15 is a weld-o-let. To do a weld-o-let you need the branch size placed
in the first size and the main line diameter (On size) in the second size. So we entered
2 in the first and 6 in the second size. O-lets change the background color to tell you
there is an entry needed. See the completed estimate picture at the end of this sample.
STEP 25: Item 16 is an soc-o-let. The specification is for a 3000# SOL. They have not indicated
if it is 3M. I assume it is. If I had wanted to over-ride the 3M SOL specification
setting, I could have entered SOL6 at the SEEK CODE instead of SOL. Again I need
the two sizes. The branch first and then the on size. As with the WOL, the color
changes asking for the on size. See the completed estimate picture at the end of this
sample.
STEP 26: They want a pipe nipple now. It is a diameter x 3 inch length seamless. Schedule is
XH. If you press the View Wall button, you will see that XH=S/80 in the size
pipe. I entered the .5 size and a 3 size and a SEEK CODE of N. Quantity is one.
Remember, if you want a quantity of one, you do not have to make an entry in the
quantity field, just calculate and one should be at the quantity field. Be sure to press
Hide Wall button to remove the pipe wall chart. See the completed estimate picture
at the end of this sample.
STEP 27: Item 18 is a valve. We do not have a VB8W valve in the generic list. After a short
search, I located one in ConocoPhillips valves. I entered the valve number of
V774602093. Each client uses different numbers. You will need to create the needed
valves or use the ones in the system now. Any threaded valve can be bored for socket-
welding. I have placed that remark in the note field. The valve description is now
Valve, Gate, Solid Wedge, Class 800, SW, FS, OS&Y, Bolted Bonnet, 11-13 CR
Trim, Hard Faced Seat Rings, In Accordance with API Std. 602 (ASTM A105). Tag:
774602093### 0.5in Line SW x Thrd. As you can see, the note was added to the
description in the data base. To see the description, you can use the Convert Formula
to Text button in the center-bottom of the upper part of the entry screen. See the
STEP 28: We need another flange. This one is a 6 inch. See STEP 14
STEP 29: Finally, we need two sets of 6 inch bolts and gaskets. The size does not change from
the prior entry, so we do not enter anything in the first size (It will be calculated and
show as 6) At the SEEK CODE enter BG6remember the specification is for 150#.
If we wanted 150#, we could have simply entered BG. To over-ride the specification
setting, we entered BG6 which gets a 600# set. BG3 will get a 300# set. See the
STEP 30: We are almost finished. We need to test the pipe system. So we enter a SEEK CODE
of TEST by running the ASSISTANT button, selecting default and pressing TEST
button. Change the words Size? to 6. The 2 and 3 pipe is of a very small
quantity, so I do not bother making a separate entry. I calculate the worksheet and look
at the upper control panel of the ENTRY tab at the current estimate data. The very top
row is the complete file information.the row below is the current take-off. It says the
total pipe line is 65 feet long. You can see the LF for each size by pressing the LIST
button and viewing the LF per size. Here, I will test all the footage as 6. Because you
are combining all sizes into one entry, you would manually enter the combined length
instead of making three separate entries for the pipe testing. You could have allowed
the ASSISTANT to do the calculation, but just enter the LF total of 65.
You can simply enter the word TEST and press the macro button to calculate the LF of
that size pipe. You could press TAB Calc & Post, FILE Calc & Post to automatically
calculate the LF to be tested for a particular size pipe. See those buttons below.
SELECTING TEST WILL TYPE TEST INTO THE ESTIMATE
STEP 31: Go back to STEP 11 to review how to make the paint entry.
As with testing, you could press TAB Calc & Post, FILE Calc & Post buttons to automatically
calculate the SF to be painted for a particular size pipe. In addition, you can press the LIST button and
select the button to view the paint SF by size as shown below.
Selecting the View the Current Takeoffs Pipe Hangers, Welds, Insulation and Paint by Pipe Size
button will bring up a list like the following list. From it you can see the quantities for paint.
THE ENTRIES USED TO DO THIS TAKE-OFF SAMPLE
THE BLUE QUICK CALCULATE BUTTONS ON THE LEFT HAVE BEEN

REPLACED WITH A GREEN VERTICAL BAR AS SHOWN HERE
At this point, you should be able to understand what your steps are to create an estimate. The entire
estimate created is not shown above. The next picture shows the entire current estimate that is
normally shown on the ENTRY tabs takeoff screen. As you can see it is difficult to read when you
try to show the whole view.
THE VIEWS THAT FOLLOW ARE FROM PIPETALK 3.0

PIPETALK 7.0 PROVIDES SIMILAR INFORMATION
You can see at a glance many things. You can see the specification used on the left edge. You can see
who furnishes the materials. Here, the contractor is furnishing all the materials. For instance you see
that the bolts and gaskets are furnished by the owner. I changed these to be by the owner by entering
an O where the C was and pressed the calculation button for that row. The material cost is gone:
Notice that the spools are not LF, but are LF.---has a . after the LF. This helps you separate things
easier if you sort on that column. If you sort on the SEEK CODE, you will see that things are grouped
very well. Hangers are all H. Pipe is all P. Valves are all V. In addition, there is a code to the
extreme left you can use to separate the information. Before I show you that information, lets look at
the way the Entry Screen Control Panel provides information.
You would like to see more information than the raw take-off shows. You want this without having to
take out a calculator. You need to know some averages and totals to determine if this lines takeoff is
acceptable. Should you add more due to circumstances at the site? Lets look at the upper part of the
take-off screen to make those decisions. Next page
ENTRY SCREEN CONTROL PANEL SHOWING SAMPLE ONE
A
The take-off is complete and we can now look at the results of the current takeoff:
B
A
Above is shown the left side the Current Estimate information. In order to get this information you
must calculate the entire file.
You can use F9 to calculate, but it is better to use the calculation buttons shown above. Why use these
buttons? They re-calculate the test, welds, paint and insulation you may have enteredif you left the
formulas for auto-calculation. If you entered the values, then the program cannot re-calculate those
values. Remember, you can always copy a formula back and run these calculation buttons.
You can see that paint is about 196 SF. You can also see the approximate weld counts at the center of
the screen (View A above). Because welds are not actually manpowered individually, the count is not
as important as when you count them and apply manpower to each one. The work to make the welds
are included in the units of the pipe and fittings. This is not to say an accurate weld count is not
important. The problem with all programs and here too, is that fitting to fitting welds are counted
twice. However, the man-power should not be adjusted for fitting to fitting situations using these
units. You can see the welds by pressing the LISTS button as shown or the W button. The Lists
button will open a panel, select To View the Current Takeoffs. If you select the W button, look to the
top right to see the weld count for the current takeoff.
B
Here we can see many summary things about the current estimate. Our estimate created a man-power
of 2.47 man-hours per each foot of the pipe. We can see the shop man-hours as well as the field hours.
Due to space limitations, we cannot see many things we would like to see. That is what the reports do
for us. Before we look at the reports, lets look at the other information the program creates.
PART ONE OF THREE OF THE LEFT SIDE OF THE CURRENT ENTRY SCREEN
(You can now view with LEFT ARROW-VIEW DETAIL button)
In version 4.1, the material part number has been changed to the UPC number so that the file can be
recalculated. This is the first picture of the left edge of the current takeoff. You normally do not see
this part of the screen. To see this information, remove the split screen of the ENTRY tab and go to
the left. (To reset the split screen on the Entry screen, just press the red up arrow. If you get lost on
the ENTRY tab, just to Home at cell A1 and press the button there.it will fix your problem.) On
the left side you can see many things. This information is stored for you along with the things you
normally see on the Entry screen. As you can see, you get a lot of information when you estimate
using PIPEtalk. Please take a moment to look over the information above. It is self explanatory.
This part one of three of the left side. Now lets look at part two.
PART TWO OF THREE OF THE LEFT SIDE OF THE CURRENT ENTRY SCREEN
(You can now view with VIEW DETAIL button)
As with part one, you can simply review the above to see what is provided here. Notice that the
hanger counter is keeping track of the number of hangers. Certain types of hangers will count,
others will not count. If it is a piece of hanger that does not attach directly to the pipe, it will NOT be
counted as a hanger. The description arrangement is different than the one you se in the screen. This
description is developed to allow you to sort for purchase. It is organized to provide better grouping.
Plus, none material items are collected (Labor only) so that you do not ask for material prices for those
items. This saves you a lot of time sorting what to get prices on and what not to.
Lets look at the final third part of the left side of the current estimate.
PART TWO OF THREE OF THE LEFT SIDE OF THE CURRENT ENTRY SCREEN
(You can now view with VIEW DETAIL button)
This is a record of the take-offs estimates bid breakdown information; line name, drawing, from and
to. It also captures the information about insulation, heat tracing and painting. This is used to
determine what your subcontractors need to do for you. Properly sorted, they can estimate directly
from the information you send them. Cut and paste only the information you want to send them.
We have covered all the take-off methods. It is time to send the estimate to storage and thus set-up for
the next one. Before that, go to the right and find the red up arrow and press it. Your screen should be
reset back to the normal split view. Now, to send the estimate to storage, press the New Screen and
Store Takeoff macro button.
The macro button to press when you are finished with the estimate and are ready for another is shown
above. It is the big red one. To see the last takeoff in the storage area on the right, press the red down
arrow button. To see the last takeoff on the left side press the bent down arrow.
You have done your first estimate using the program. As with all systems, you need to know what to
do next. This sample is an attempt to guide you through that process. You would repeat the takeoffs
one line at a time. You can use the memories to save time. Press the large dark bar with the up arrow
to return to the top of your screen (From the storage areasee picture below). You are now back in
split screen view that is used for the current takeoff.
Now press the MEMORY button as shown in the picture below.
You now can see that the estimate you just did is listed in the Last Entry Stored. You can store it in
Memory 1 or 2 if you wish to. Return to the Entry screen by pressing the dark bar with the arrow.
Now press the Use Prior button. You will now have a copy of the last estimate. Modify as required.
You may place a 0 on the quantity to show you do not need it for the new takeoff, the program will
remove it from the items that it sends to storage area. You do not have to delete it, just put a zero
quantity. Remember that all the formulas for a given column are the same at the Current Estimate
Entry area on the ENTRY tab. NEVER DELETE OR ADD A ROW
Lets see what an EWO looks like using the estimate you just built. Press the EWO FORM button.
on the right side. Go to the tab that says Use This Sheet For Your Extra. If you are not running the
program now, the next page shows the EWO form created by PIPEtalk . Look at the EWO created by
the program. You will see a possible use of the programs information. The EWO form can be
modified as you require. I have done many extras, this is the best way I know. Press the Close and
Return button on the Instruction sheet.
YOUR COMPANY NAME HERE FIELD AUTHORIZED CHANGE ORDER

Customer Order No.
Change No.
Client: Date: 11/04/04 Run Date: 11/4/04 3:36 AM

Job No:
Job:
Line: Drawing:
Work Started: Work Completed: Sheet: 1 of 1
QTY MATERIAL / PO / INVOICE UNIT PRICE AMOUNT DESCRIPTION OF WORK
8.000% (8% x Labor) Consumable supplies and $261.60 $20.93
welding material
6 90 ELL LONG RADIUS A234 WPB CS BW STD WT 6in Line $20.16
$120.96
1 REDUCER ECC A234 WPB CS BW STD WT 6in x3in $33.21
$33.21
3 FLANGE WN A105 FS BW RF 600# STD WT 3in Line $33.00
$99.00
2 $0.00WIND FLEX CG CS RING 600# 3in Line
B&G SET STUD BLTS A193 GRB7,A194 GR2H HEX NUTS 1/8" COMPRESSED RING SPIR
9 PIPE (20'JT) A53 B CS BE ERW STD WT 6in Line $7.17 $64.53 EQUIPMENT & TOOLS
11 PIPE (20'JT) A53 B CS BE ERW STD WT 6in Line $7.17 $78.87 @ / hour
2 PIPE (20'JT) A53 B CS BE ERW STD WT 6in Line $7.17 $14.34 @ / hour
18 PIPE (20'JT) A53 B CS BE ERW STD WT 6in Line $7.17 $129.06 @ / day
20 PIPE (20'JT) A53 B CS BE ERW STD WT 6in Line $7.17 $143.40 @ / day
1 PIPE (20'JT) A53 B CS BE ERW STD WT 6in Line $7.17 $7.17 @ /
2 PIPE (20'JT) A53 B CS BE ERW STD WT 6in Line $7.17 $14.34 @ /
20 CS STD WT SPOOL HANDLING (L.F.) 6.00in Line LGTH=20LF $0.15 $3.00 TOTAL EQUIPMENT & TOOLS 0.00
20 CS STD WT SPOOL HANDLING (L.F.) 6.00in Line LGTH=20LF $0.15 $3.00 LABOR
20 CS STD WT SPOOL HANDLING (L.F.) 6.00in Line LGTH=20LF $0.15 $3.00 ST OT CRAFT ST OT
3 CS STD WT SPOOL HANDLING (L.F.) 6.00in Line LGTH=3LF $0.15 $0.45 11.4 0.0 Pipe Foreman @ 20.00 30.00 /hr. 228.20
1 GALV-FIG 62A ADJUSTABLE PIPE STANCHION 6in Line $125.00 $125.00 36.2 0.0 Pipefitter @ 20.00 30.00 /hr. 724.60
1 BLACK HANGER DUMMY LEG OR BASE ELL CS 6in Line $25.81 $25.81 31.2 0.0 Pipe Welder @ 20.00 30.00 /hr. 624.60
1 PIPE (20'JT) A53 B CS BE ERW STD WT 3in Line $3.32 $3.32 25.8 0.0 Pipe Helper @ 20.00 30.00 /hr. 516.40
5 GALV-HANGER SHOE FIG 160 6in Line $24.00 $120.00 0.0 Carpenter Foreman @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
1 VALVE BALL 600# FLANGED 6in Line $6,921.76 $6,921.76 0.0 Carpenter @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
1 VALVE CHAIN WHEEL OPERATORS 6in Line $317.00 $317.00 0.0 Carpenter Helper @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
1 GALV-FIG 62A ADJUSTABLE PIPE STANCHION 6in Line $125.00 $125.00 0.0 Ironworker Foreman @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
1 VALVE GATE 600# FLANGED 2in Line $940.00 $940.00 0.0 Ironworker @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
1 PIPE (20'JT) A106 B CS BE SML S/80 2in Line $2.60 $2.60 0.0 Ironworker Helper @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
1 WELD-O-LET SP97 FS BW STD WT 2in on 6in $10.42 $10.42 0.0 Laborer Foreman @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
1 SOC-O-LET SP97 FS SW 3M S/80 0.5in on 6in $4.98 $4.98 0.0 Laborer @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
1 NIPPLE A106 B CS THR SML S/80 0.5in x 3in Lg $1.69 $1.69 0.0 Operators Foreman @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
1 $26.00
Valve, Gate, Solid Wedge, Class 800, SW, FS, OS&Y, Bolted Bonnet, $26.00
11-13 CR Trim, Hard Faced Seat Rings, In0.0
Accordance
Operators 20.00
with API Std. 602@(ASTM 30.00
A105). Tag: 774602093###
/hr. 0.5in Line SW x Thrd
2 FLANGE WN A105 FS BW RF 600# STD WT 6in Line $116.22 $232.44 0.0 Millwright Foreman @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
2 B&G SET STUD BLTS A193 GRB7,A194 GR2H HEX NUTS 1/8" COMPRESSED RING SPIR $0.00WIND FLEX CG CS0.0 RING Millwrights
600# 6in Line @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
65 FIELD HYDROSTATIC PIPE TESTNG 6in Line $1.10 $71.50 42.9 0.0 Shop Labor @ 20.00 30.00 /hr. 858.20
194 BLAST/PRIME/TWO TOP EPOXY $1.71 $331.74 Prj Manager @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
$0.00 Q.C. @ 20.00 30.00 /hr.
$0.00 15.9 0.0 Other @ 20.00 30.00 /hr. 318.00
$0.00 @ /hr.
$0.00 @ /hr.
$0.00 @ /hr.
$0.00 @ /hr.
$0.00 @ /hr.
Material Cost From Page Two $0.00 @ /day
TOTAL MATERIAL COST 9,994.52 163.5 0.0 TL HR=163.5 TOTAL LABOR 3,270.00
PLUS TAXES @ 8.250% 824.55
TOTAL COST MATERIAL & TAXES 10,819.07
TOTAL COST IMPACT** $0.00
SUBCONTRACTS TOTAL COST MATERIAL 10,819.07
0.00 TOTAL COST SUBCONTRACTORS 0.00
0.00 TOTAL COST EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS 0.00
0.00 10,819.07
0.00 PLUS 10.00% OVERHEAD 1,081.91
TOTAL SUBCONTRACTS 0.00 11,900.98
SCHEDULE IMPACT HOURS DAYS PLUS 10.00% PROFIT 1,190.10
2.00 BILLING AMOUNT WITHOUT LABOR 13,091.08
AMOUNT BILLED FOR LABOR 3,270.00
TOTAL IMPACT ** 2.00 TOTAL BILLING 16,361.08
Authorized / Verified By
PURCHASER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Supervisor Company
By
** - If impact amount can be determined at time this change was enacted, otherwise
We need to remove the current estimate now (Not the stored). The estimate part we did before is in
storage and will not be erased by erasing the current estimate. Press the red Erase Current Takeoff
button.
You will receive a warning message that tells you that you are erasing the current estimate area.
We have covered all the basics. To begin your own estimate you should remove this sample estimate.
To remove the estimate we have created, press the Clear Storage Area button. See below.
You will receive a warning message that tells you that you are erasing the storage area.
Say Yes to remove this sample. Remember, you can still make a copy by selecting memory one.
Sample Practice Estimate Two
1 0'-0 " 1 1 '-0 "
P 90
P INP I
F 4'-0 "
6 " A BC-2 " in s u l V G1T
.75 " G A TE 1 50 # T
P T
90
1 4'- 0 " 90 1 4 '-0 "
P
45
N T OL 3
90
P P
S OL 3
P
6 " DEF-1 .5 " ins u l V G 1F

3 " JK L- 2" in s ul 2 2 '-0 "
1 " G A TE 1 50 # F
P 90
TR V B3 F
RC 90
F F 3" B A LL 3 0 0# F
6 X 4 3'- 6"
90 P P
F F
4"
P 90 TR P
90
F
2 '- 0" 4'-6 "
F
1" G HI-1 " in s u l
INSTRUCTIONS
1. Do the project setup. ("S" Sheet) Read the instructions provided at the help fields at the setup screen.
2. Now enter on the "ENTRY" Sheet the Code, line number, the drawing number, to and from. Use the code & line number I gave
you at the list. Use anything for the drawing, to and from.
3. Enter insulation=(1, 1.5, 2), painting( Y or N ), heat tracing ( Y or N )and set height above grade=22.
4. Pick the specification you want from the list.
5. Enter the items at the line number as shown in the list below. Put a note in the note field for the Instrument #
6. Put a note at the instrument PI. Enter "PI-2001" in the note field.
7. (F9 or Press CALC Button) The first calculation will be slow. After the first calc things will speed up.
8. You should have a calculation that shows no errors.
9. Now press the red "Store Data New Takeoff" button. Wait until a fresh screen & hr glass is gone..
10. The o-let second size is the "on size" The second size of any reducing fitting is the smaller size.
11. The first size for a bolt is the dia. The second size for a bolt is the length.
12. Enter the next lines information. Notice the data at the top will change when you hit Calc.
13. Press the down arrow button on the left to see where the information went to.
14 NA
15. You now have an EWO form to provide quick estimating of EWO's. Press the EWO Form button to open the EWO file.
TAKEOFF SAMPLE FOR PIPEtalk 3.0

TAKEOFF IS FOR FIELD ERECTED LB AND SB PIPING
CODE=3000 LINE: 6" ABC-2" insul CODE=3001 LINE: 1" GHI-1" insul
Inch X Inch X Seek Code Lf,Sf,Cf Ea Qty Inch Size X Inch X Seek Code Lf,Sf,Cf Ea
Size Size Size Qty
6.00 P 10 1.00 P 16
6.00 P 4 1.00 P 3.5
6.00 P 4 1.00 P 2
6.00 P 10 1.00 P 2
6.00 P 10 1.00 P 2
6.00 P 1 1.00 90 4
6.00 P 16 1.00 F 3
6.00 P 3.5 1.00 BG 3
6.00 P 2 1.00 VG1F 1
6.00 90 3 1.00 HG137 auto calc
6.00 45 2 HSGL2.5X 12
2.5X1/4
6.00 T 1
6.00 3 TR 2
6.00 F 2
6.00 BG 2
1.00 6 SOL3 1
0.75 6 TOL3 1
0.75 6 N 2
0.75 VG1T 1
0.75 INPI 1
6.00 HG212 auto calc
HSGL3X3 20
X1/4
HSWELD1 3
/4
CODE=30 LINE: 6" DEF-1.5" insul CODE=30 LINE: 3" JKL-2" insul
00 02
Inch Size X Inch X Seek Code Lf,Sf,Cf Ea Qty Inch Size X Inch X Seek Code Lf,Sf,Cf Ea
Size Size Qty
6.00 P 6 3.00 P 4
6.00 P 21 3.00 P 4
6.00 90 1 3.00 P 1.5
6.00 4 RC 1 3.00 P 1.5
6.00 F 1 3.00 90 2
6.00 BG 1 3.00 F 2
6.00 HG212 auto calc 3.00 BG 2
HSGL3X3 10 3.00 VB3F 1
X1/4
HSGP.5 2 3.00 HG137 auto calc
0.50 5 HEXPB 4 HSGW4X1 4
3
HGNS 1 HSGP.75 2
0.75 6 HEXPB 4
HGNS 1
1.The part of the hanger that needs the pipe size can be auto counted. Just enter the hanger code & Calc.
2.A list of codes is in a separate file called " PIPEtalk SEEK CODES" You can print that file's list.
3.The Method to take-off spooled pipe is different. The setup screen has to be adjusted and other settings
have to be made during the take-off. The code SP listed by individual pieces and FBW's have to be
added to the take-off. The settings to auto count the welds would be turned off for either LB or LB & SB.
Other settings may be needed.
CHAPTER TEN
E2P6
E2P6 (Excel two Primavera 6.0) presents a method to create a schedule from the estimate using
small prebuilt schedules. The schedules are modified by the codes within the estimate units.
The small schedules are called C-GEN (Code Generated) schedules.
PART TWENTY
Methods Explained
The dream of going straight from the estimate to a schedule has been very illusive. To say it would be
impossible, might be more right than wrong. However, with careful planning a method has been
achieved to take the estimate, convert it and bring it into the schedule via the import feature of
Primavera 6.0. The new Primavera is totally different than the older P3 version we have all learned to
love and hate. The new 6.0 is mostly a hate relationship between it and the schedulers. It is difficult
to learn and use. Some features we were use to are gone and new ones have to be learned. Older
schedulers, such as myself, resist change. Most of the old schedulers want our old P3 back.
However, Primavera has decided that they know best and have forced us to change. The method of
importing the PIPEtalk estimate shown here is only for the new Primavera 6.0 and 6.1. No effort to
design one for the outgoing P3. The design of an export file to Microsoft Projects is underway, but
not expected to be completed for a few months (21JUN08)
The time to enter the schedule activity data is very lengthy. Any help to create the first cut,
preliminary schedule, would be a life saver. PIPEtalk has designed a series of small schedules that are
selected by code. The method is called C-GEN Scheduling. This method is used for Engineering
schedules as well as construction. For Engineering, an Excel file is exported from the main estimating
program on the company network and imported into a special Excel file. This file calculates and
exports the result to tabs that are imported into Primavera 6.0 We have not included the file that
converts Engineering to a schedule. PIPEtalk has only included the construction component for
conversion of information which comes form the PIPEtalk program.
The Primavera WBS is utilized to separate the estimate codes within the schedule. The code you
assign the estimate is later used as part of the WBS breakdown inside Primavera. There is no way
currently to enter the description of the WBS inside Primavera, you will have to do that manually.
The WBS system needed to import the estimate is totally constructed by this program, you should not
have to create any WBS. You will have to enter your description. Each estimate code (Part of the
Primavera WBS) can have 200 lines of pipe associated with it inside the WBS that is built in
Primavera by PIPEtalk. That is 200 pipeline takeoffs, not 200 rows of takeoff.
Each piece of equipment has a C-GEN code which selects a small schedule that is best suited for that
piece of equipment. A schedule activity is then created for rough setting, motors, alignment, electrical
connections, painting, etc. For instance, equipment with no motor would have no motor entry or
electrical, but might have instrumentation needed in the schedule. If you do the takeoff for the
equipment and a foundation, all in one takeoff, the program will connect the logic for the two. When
you run the schedule, it will place the foundation first and then install the equipment after curing. If
you do them in two separate takeoffs, PIPEtalk cannot know they are related.
Each foundation type is separated into one of four layered groups beginning with the deepest to the
highest elevated concrete shape. The C-GEN schedule ties the different levels to each other when they
are all taken off as a single takeoff. If you do a separate takeoff for each level, the program will not
know to connect their levels together by code. So, if you are going to create a C-GEN schedule, do
the footings, u-drain and slab-on-grade for one structure all in one takeoff.
Each pipe takeoff is assigned a separate WBS so that each line will show up separately under the code
you assigned to it. Each one of the 60 codes from the estimate can have up to separate 200 lines.
Excavation for pipe is recognized and kept separate from foundation earthwork. The logic is built to
first excavate, then install the underground pipe. The schedule event for the pipe installation has the
hours to install the pipe and the linier footage of the pipe. The pipeline will have a weld entry created
in the schedule and the hours and the weld count included.
You can adjust the crew size, add activities and set the default duration to suit your experiences for
any of the C-GEN schedules. After you adjust them for your company, you can reuse them for all
future estimates from the program.
This is a view of a pipe C-GEN Schedule:

PART TWENTY-ONE
Excel Import File
The keys to being able to import the estimate into Primavera are the two files called PIPEtalk E2P6
CALCULATION FILE and PIPEtalk E2P6 PRIMAVERA IMPORT FILE. The formulas and macros
designed inside these files make the whole process possible. The design of these files took hundreds
of hours. They are not protected, so you can follow the sequence of their operation. (Good Luck)
The process to convert the data is complicated and the steps should be followed carefully. If you do a
step out of order, the resources and materials may not be loaded correctly inside the schedule.
The PIPEtalk E2P6 CALCULATION FILE has eight tabs. Each tab does an important function.
Lets take one tab at a time. First, it would be a good idea to review the entire list of steps before we
proceed. I assume you have some knowledge of Primavera 6.0 and a high degree of Excel experience.
I understand you may have had no experience with importing the Excel file into Primavera, so I am
placing special emphasis on that area of instruction.
INSTRUCTIONS TAB
These are the steps shown inside the PIPEtalk E2P6 CALCULATION FILE on the INSTRUCTIONS
tab:
GENERAL
Converting a PIPEtalk estimate to a manpower loaded schedule quickly is the goal of this file. The
schedule created does not have to be perfect, but is a starting point to be marked up and modified by
those that are up-close and personal with the project. This saves the time of originating first-cut
schedules that are in a state of change due to the moving scopes. Many times, the engineer knows the
necessary information but has no time to convey that information to the scheduler. Worse, the
estimator has no time to convey the information to the scheduler. So, here we have the estimate do the
"talking". This program requires the purchase of PIPEtalk to function.
The idea here is to build small CGEN-Schedules (Code Generated Schedules) that meet the
requirement of each one of the estimate item's requirement. If the estimate item is a pump foundation,
then, prebuild the standard pump foundation schedule. Assign a default duration, a percent of the
labor so it can automatically adjust the duration based on the magnitude of the work.
I assume that your company has work that is a repeat of the same type, same steps from project to
project and require a schedule be prepared per your contract requirements. The items that repeat can
be coded in the estimate to a CGEN-Schedule. When the calculated cells "see" the schedule code
and finds the materials and labor quantities, the program will build a schedule based on durations
using the crew that was pre-determined. This program only works for PIPEtalk estimates. Do the
instruction steps in the order they are listed below.
This program will create a better schedule if you will takeoff the information in groups. Code the
scope of work related to a piece of equipment or area to one of the WBS codes. Code the takeoffs for
that scope to the code and build your scope to that code one line at time. You should begin by taking
off one line and include it's equipment and foundations---all coded to the one WBS. The equipment
may have many pieces of pipe and they can be taken off separately, but coded to the one area WBS.
STEP 1
Start Primavera. Import the file that builds the WBS; "PIPEtalk IMPORT WBS AND PROJECT
DATA.xer". Primavera has help in their program that will provide guidance for importing. Leave
Primavera running and go to next step.
STEP 2
Now import the file called; "PIPEtalk RESOURCES.xer" to build the resources used by the PIPEtalk
estimating units. Add these PIPEtalk resources to yours by importing this file. Leave Primavera
running and go to next step.
STEP 3
Now import; "TARGET01.xer" file. This builds a target file for the program to land the information
in.
STEP 4
a) You need a layout, which you can change later if you wish. Open your layout menu and import;
"PIPEtalk Layout.plf". This layout has the WBS levels ready to use. Any of your layouts will work,
but you should address the WBS levels as you need to address the PIPEtalk CGEN-Schedules. b)
Now select from the menu, Tools/Global Change/Import: "DURATION _ PHYSICAL.pcf" from the
PIPEtalk folder. c) Now select from the menu, Tools/Global Change/Import: "Duration Type
FU_T=FD&U.pcf" from the PIPEtalk folder. You can close Primavera now or leave it running. We
have data to get from the Excel files at this time.
STEP 5
Open the estimate file you want to bring into Primavera. These are number 1 thru 60 in the PIPEtalk
folder (Exa: PIPEtalk EST01). Press the "SAVE/CLOSE THIS FILE & SHIP THE ESTIMATE TO
THE SCH CALC FILE & OPEN IT" button located on the top of the ESTIMATE tab. As the button
says, you will be shipping your estimate (ESTIMATE tab) to the "1-Paste Est File Here" tab in this
worksheet file.
STEP 6
Now look over the estimate you imported into this worksheet. Do you need to change anything? If
so, do it in the "1-Paste Est File Here" tab. When you finish open the next tab in this worksheet, "2-
Schedule to Analysis".
STEP 7
At the top of "2-Schedule to Analysis", you will see a button, press it now to run a macro that will
erase 10,000 rows and copy the same from the "1-Paste Est File Here" tab. Never modify this tab.
DO ALL MODIFICATIONS OF YOUR ESTIMATE ON THE "1-Paste Est File Here" TAB AND
THEN UPDATE THE "2-Schedule to Analysis" TAB.
STEP 8
If you want to change any of the CGEN-Schedules, you should do so now. They are located on the
"5-CGEN-Schedules"
STEP 9
Select the "3-Control Screen" tab. Press the macro button called; "STEP 9 CALCULATE TABS 3,4
& 5". Allow it to complete it's calculations.
STEP 10
Also on the "3-Control Screen" tab is a macro button called; "STEP 10 CREATE PRIMAVERA
IMPORT INFORMATION". Press the macro button to complete the creation of the Primavera import
file.
STEP 11
When the macro has finished, you will receive this message, "This file has been saved and will now
close. The data has been transferred to the import file. You can now run Primavera. After staring
Primavera select the supplied Import Template and import the information from IMPORT FILE
FROM EXCEL TO P6.xls. This file is saving and closing...."
STEP 12
All the Excel files have closed. Now you should return to Primavera. Open the project called:
"Target01". On the Menu select Import/Spreadsheet..
STEP 13
Select File/Import: PIPEtalk E2P6 PRIMAVERA IMPORT FILE.xls Select NEXT.
STEP 14
Check Activities and Activities Relationships. This will build the activities without the resources. Do
not check the resources yet. Select NEXT.
STEP 15
At Import Project Options, on the right side, double click on the empty cell below Import To and
select Target01. Then NEXT and then FINISH. The program will run (Maybe some time) and give
you a report screen saying it was successful or maybe it ran with some errors. Some errors is
expected, so that will not be a problem.
STEP 16
From the Primavera screen, select the activities, then select View/Layout/Open the layout called:
TARGET TEST. If it is not in your list, execute Step 4 and return to this step afterwards. You should
now see your activities. The resources are not yet loaded.
STEP 17
To prepare the file to receive the resources, you must run a Global Change called: "DURATION _
PHYSICAL" before importing the resources from the new PIPEtalk E2P6 PRIMAVERA IMPORT
FILE.xls file. Run the Global Change by selecting APPLY CHANGE and then select COMMIT
CHANGES. The programs then asks if you want to save a log file. I usually do not. Close the Global
Change window.
STEP 18
Again, select File/Import: PIPEtalk E2P6 PRIMAVERA IMPORT FILE.xls Select NEXT.
STEP 19
Only check Resources and Resource Assignments. This will build the reources for the activities you
loaded prior. Select NEXT.
STEP 20
select Target01. Then NEXT and then FINISH. The program will run (This may take some time) and
give you a report screen saying it was successful or maybe it ran with some errors. Some errors is
expected, so that will not be a problem. (This is the same as step 15)
STEP 21
In Primavera, calculate the project. The resources are in the file, but need to be modified. Run a
Global Change called:"Duration Type FU_T=FD&U.pcf". Run the Global Change by selecting
APPLY CHANGE and then select COMMIT CHANGES. The programs then asks if you want to
save a log file. I usually do not. Close the Global Change window. Finally, select File/Import:
PIPEtalk E2P6 PRIMAVERA IMPORT FILE.xls Only check Resources and Resource Assignments.
This adjusts the method that Primavera does it's resource math. Select NEXT. Calculate (F9) You
should see activities broken down by WBS codes and their associated hours if you have the correct
layout. Modify the schedules for items you do not need, shorten lengthen durations. As you change
the durations, confirm that the hours are constant, that they do not change when you change the
duration.
PASTE EST FILE HERE TAB
Instruction Step 5 above is the point at which you will arrive on the PASTE EST FILE HERE tab
having come from the estimate file of your choice via a macro button in that estimate file. After
pressing the macro in the estimate, it transferred the folder location and the estimate information to the
PIPEtalk E2P6 CALCULATION FILE and closed the estimate file you were in.
The PASTE EST FILE HERE tab is where you can modify the estimate before it is sent to the
schedule. Take this opportunity to review it for errors. You can add rows and delete them. However,
do NOT add or delete any columns. You can modify any cell at this time. Step 6 provides the next
instruction for you to follow.
STEP 6
Now look over the estimate you imported into this worksheet. Do you need to change anything? If so,
do it in the "1-Paste Est File Here" tab. When you finish open the next tab in this worksheet, "2-
Schedule to Analysis".
SCHEDULE TO ANALYSIS
Before you load the estimate from the Paste Est File Here tab to the Schedule To Analysis tab,
you should erase the old estimate from the Schedule To Analysis tab. A macro button is located at
the top right of this tab that removes the old estimate and posts the new one. You should run this
macro when you have finished modifying the Paste Est File Here tab.
STEP 7
At the top of "2-Schedule to Analysis", you will see a button, press it now to run a macro that will erase
10,000 rows and copy the same from the "1-Paste Est File Here" tab. Never modify this tab. DO ALL
MODIFICATIONS OF YOUR ESTIMATE ON THE "1-Paste Est File Here" TAB AND THEN UPDATE
THE "2-Schedule to Analysis" TAB.
CONTROL SCREEN
This tab will bring the estimate and the C-GEN schedules together. It has special formulas which find
the proper C-GEN schedule, based on the items code, and post the labor hours and major material
quantities, adjust durations and exclude unneeded schedule activities/events. There are two buttons
that must be run in the correct order for them to extract the necessary information.
STEP 9
Select the "3-Control Screen" tab. Press the macro button called; "STEP 9 CALCULATE TABS 3,4 &
5". Allow it to complete it's calculations.
STEP 10
Also on the "3-Control Screen" tab is a macro button called; "STEP 10 CREATE PRIMAVERA
IMPORT INFORMATION". Press the macro button to complete the creation of the Primavera import
file.
CALCULATIONS TAB
This tab should not be adjusted. The formulas that separate the information into groups and mines the
data from the estimate are located here. The only macro button located here is used to check
calculations while the formulas were being designed.
C-GEN SCHEDULES/SCHEDULE CODES/RSRC TABS

This tab is where the actual C-GEN schedules are located at. This is where you should modify these
schedules. Do not change the name of the schedulecalled PT SCH CODE at column C. Each
schedule has a row number associated with it. The schedule name is combined with a row number so
the formulas can locate it. Do not remove a row or add one. You can modify what is on the row. A
list of Schedule Codes are contained on the Schedule Codes tab. Locate the Construction group of
codes at row 58. Beginning on the next page is a list of the Schedule Codes for Construction.
The things you can modify are the default duration (Col T), crew size (Col AA) and the relationship
can be either FF, FS, SS, SF with a lag you select. The relationship is changed in column W and the
lag in column X. The crew name can also be changed. The tab RSRC has the list of crew names.
Each crew is spread over the C-GEN schedule. The crew percent must add up to 100% so that the
hours can be correctly distributed across all the activities. If the percent is greater than 100, it will
load too many hours into the activity. There is a list of crews following the list of Schedule Codes.
SCHEDULE CODES
Earthwork--Pipe/Fdn
EARTHWORK
E01 BKFILL--HAND E-B BACKFILL
E02 BKFILL--MACH E-B
E03 COMPCT--HAND E-C COMPACT
E04 COMPCT--MACH E-C
E05 EXCAV--HAND E-E EXCAVATE
E06 EXCAV--MACHINE E-E
E07 HAUL E-H HAUL
E08 PURCHASE FILL E-P PURCHASE
E09 SITE PREP E-E
E10 TRENCH BKFILL E-B
E11 TRENCH EXCAV E-E
E12 LOAD EARTHK E-H
E13 EARTHWK OTHER E-E
Foundations
CONCRETE
C01 ANCHOR BOLTS C-AB A.B.
C02 CONCRETE C-CO PLACE/FINISH
C03 DEMOLITION C-DE DEMO
C04 EMBED' MTL C-RE REBAR/EMB
C05 FINISH C-CO
C06 FORMS C-FO FORMS
C07 GROUT C-GR GROUT
C08 METAL DECKG C-FO FORMS
C09 REBAR C-RE
C10 CONC OTHER C-CO
C11 WELDED WIRE C-RE
C12 WATERSTOP C-FO
C13 CONSTR JTS C-FO
C14 CONC SAWING C-DE
C15 COREDRILL CONC C-DE
BC BASE CONTINOUS FOOTING FDN
BR BASE RECTANGLE SHAPED FDN
BS BASE SQUARE FDN
BV BASE CURVED FDN
ENC ENCASE CONDUIT
ENP ENCASE PIPING
ML MAT--LARGE (>50 CY)
MM MAT--MEDIUM (>25 CY & <50 CY)
MS MAT--SMALL (<25 CY)

MUD MUD or SEAL SLAB
SC SITEWORK--CATCH BASIN
SM SITEWORK--MANHOLE
SW SITEWORK--CULVERT WING WALL
EQC EQUIP FDNS--VERY COMPLEX FORMS
EQM EQUIP FDN--MEDIUM COMPLEXITY
EQS EQUIP FDN--SIMPLE FORMING
GB GRADE BEAM
PD PIER--ROUND--DRILLED
PNL(w/sono) PIER--ROUND--NOT DRILLED--LARGE
PNM PIER--ROUND--NOT DRILLED--MEDIUM
PNS PIER--ROUND--NOT DRILLED--SMALL
PRL PIER--RECTANGLE--LARGE
PRM PIER--RECTANGLE--MEDIUM
PRS NGLE--SMALL
PSL PIER--SQUARE--LARGE
PSM PIER--SQUARE--MEDIUM
PSS PIER--SQUARE--SMALL
TC TRENCH--COVERED W/STEEL&GRATING
TO TRENCH--OPEN
UD U-DRAIN--DEEP DEPTH W/GRTG
UM U-DRAIN--MEDIUM DEPTH W/GRTG
US U-DRAIN--SHALLOW DEPTH W/GRTG
WB WALL--BUTTRESS
WC WALL--CURVED
WS WALLSTRAIGHT
CE CURB ON EXISTING CONCRETE
CN CURB ON NEW CONCRETE
OS OCTAGON--SOLID
OT OCTAGON--TURNDOWN EDGES
RP REPAIR--ISOLATED PATCH OF SLAB
RS REPAIR--SMOOTH OUT THE SLAB
SD SITEWORK--DITCH--CONCRETE LINED
SOGR SLAB ON GRADE --REBAR REINF
SOGRB SLAB ON GRADE --REBAR REINF W/ BEAM
SOGRD SLAB ON GRADE --REBAR REINF W/ DOWELS
SOGRT SLAB ON GRADE --REBAR REINF W/TURNDOWN
SOGW SLAB ON GRADE --WELDED WIRE REINF
SOGWD SLAB ON GRADE--WELDED WIRE REINF W/DOWELS
SR SITEWORK--ROADWAY
SS SITEWORK--SIDEWALK
STEP CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE STEPS
ELE ELEVATED ENCASED -WOOD FORMS
ELM ELEVATED SLAB--METAL FORMS
ELW ELEVATED SLAB--WOOD FORMS
ENSB ENCASE STEEL BEAMS

ENSC ENCASE STEEL COLUMNS
Structural Steel
STRUCTURAL STEEL
S01 BAR JOIST S-J JOIST
S02 DECKING S-D DECKING
S03 FABR STL-LIGHT S-S STR STEEL
S04 FABR STL-MEDIUM S-S
S05 FABR STL-HEAVY S-S
S06 FABR STL-XHEAVY S-S
S07 GRATING S-G GRATING
S08 SLOPPED HR S-H HANDRAIL
S09 STRAIGHT HR S-H
S10 OPEN LADDER S-L LADDER
S11 CAGED LADDER S-L
S12 STEEL OTHER S-S
S13 PLATE STEEL S-S
S14 SHEETMETAL S-M SHEETMETAL
S15 STEPS S-P STEPS
S16 WELDING S-W STL WELDING
Process Equipment
PROCESS EQUIPMENT
M01 PROCESS EQUIP M-M EQUIPMENT
M12 STARTUP M-S STARTUP
4001 accumulator M-Accumulator
4005 aereator M-Aereator
4010 agitator M-Agitator .5HP
4015 air dryer M-Air Dryer
4020 airpreheater M-AirPre-20TON
4022 analyzer M-Analyzer
4023 arrestor M-Arrestor
4025 baghouse M-BH-(Each) Bags
4030 barkdrum M-(LF) Barking Drum 12ft dia x 76ft
4032 batterycharger M-Battery Charge
4035 beltconveyor M-(EA) Belt Conveyor Splicing
4040 bin M-Bin
4045 blackliquorheater M-Heater, Black Liquor
4050 blender M-Blender
4052 centrifuge M-Centrifuge
4055 chainconveyor M-(Ton) Chain Conveyor Supporting Steel
4060 chipper M-Chipper Wood 112in 44.5tons
4065 chute M-(Ton) Chutes & Framing Steel
4070 clarifier M-ClarifierL

4075 coalescer M-Coalescer
4077 column/tower M-Column
4080 compressor M-(EA) Instrument Air Compressor 200 SCFM, 100 PSIG (Wt=2.6 tons)
4082 condenser M-Condenser
4083 converter M-Converter
4090 cooler/HVAC M-CoolerA
4095 cracker M-Cracker
4100 crane/trolley M-(EA) Machine Room Crane 64ft Span (Wt=36.8 tons)
4105 crushing M-Crushing Equipment
4110 damper M-Damper
4115 decker M-(EA) Disc Decker 12.5ft dia x 24ft Including Hood
4117 demister M-Demister
4120 demineralizer M-Demineralizer
4125 demo M-Demo
4127 desuperheater M-Desuperheater
4130 digester M-(Ton) Batch Digesters 400T/24H (4700CF) 150in ID x 46ft (Wt=57.36 tns)
4145 dryer M-(EA) Instrument Air Dryer (Wt=1.2 tons)
4147 duct M-Duct
4150 dump M-(EA) Hydraulic Truck Dump-80,000lb Cap (50ft x 10ft Bed) (Wt=6.64 tons)
4155 dustcollector M-DC-Filter, Cartridge Dust Collector Blower, 10hp
4160 ejector M-Ejector
4165 elevator M-Elevator
4170 evacuator M-Evacuator
4175 evaporator M-Evaporator
4185 fan/blower M-Fan .5HP
4190 feeder M-FeederC
4195 feedwaterheater M-FH-H.P.--0>20 Tons
4200 filter M-Filter
4205 flaker M-Flaker
4210 flare M-Flare
4212 FlowConveyor M-Flow Conveyor
4215 flume M-Flume
4220 fueloilheater M-HeaterFO-1.5TON
4225 furnance M-Furnance
4230 gasfilterseparator M-VF-10
4235 gate M-Gate
4240 gearmotor M-Gearmotor
4245 generator M-G-DG-1500
4246 glycol unit M-Glycol Package Units
4247 granulator M-Granulator
4250 grinder M-(EA) Grinder, Flat Box (Wt=4.6 tons)
4252 hammermill M-Hammermill
4255 heater/heat exchanger M-Heat ExchangerA
4260 heatexchangerretube M-Heat Exchanger Retube
4265 hoist M-(EA) Hoist For Car Shaker (10,000lb, 25ft Lift)(Wt=1.3 tons)
4270 hopper M-Hopper

4271 impactor M-Impactor
4272 incinerator M-Incinerator
4275 jib M-Crane Jib
4277 kiln M-Kiln
4280 lowerator M-(EA) Lowerator (Wt=7.58 tons)
4282 manway M-Manway
4285 mixer M-MixerPC.25
4290 motor M-Motor
4295 nozzle M-NozzleB
4297 packageboiler M-Package Boiler
4298 packer M-Packer
4300 papermachine M-PM-High-Calendar Section
4305 PneumaticConveyorSystem M-Pneumatic Conveyor
4310 precipitator M-Precipitator
4315 pressurevessel M-T-H-P-001
4320 pulpdryer M-Pulp Dryer
4325 pulpchest M-Pulp Chest
4330 pump/mtr M-(EA) Fan Pump 21,000 GPM @ 95 TDH (Wt=6.95 tons)
4335 pump/drive/mtr
4340 reactor M-Reactor
4345 reboiler M-Reboiler
4347 receiver M-Receiver
4350 RecoveryBoiler M-B-R-00110
4355 reducer M-Reducer
4360 refiner M-(EA) Jordan Broke Refiner (Wt=15 tons)
4365 reformer M-Reformer
4370 regenerator M-Regenerator
4375 relocate M-Relocate16
4380 repulper M-(EA) Broke Repulper (Wt=15.17 tons)
4382 sampler M-Sampler
4385 saveall M-(EA) Disc Saveall 12.5ft x 30ft--24 Discs
4390 saveall M-Saveall
4395 sawdeck M-Saw Deck
4400 scaletruck/rail M-(EA) Truck Scale (50 Ton Cap)(Wt=3.4 tons)
4405 scale M-ScaleM1
4410 screens M-(EA) Centri Screens for Primary Headbox (Wt=3.47 tons)
4411 ScrewConveyor M-Screw Conveyor M-ConveyorSSA FIX CODES IN MACRO
4412 scrubber M-Scrubber M-ConveyorSA
4415 separator M-(EA) Gas Off Separator, Conical top & Bottom (6ft dia x 12.75ft
high)(Wt=2.72 tons)
4420 sewage M-SewageC
4425 shaker M-(EA) Car Shaker & Supporting Steel (11ft Wide Frame)(Wt=5.36 tons)
4430 silencers M-Silencers
4432 silo M-Silo
4435 skid M-Enclosure Skid2
4437 skimmer M-Skimmer

4440 slinger M-(EA) Chip Slinger (Wt=2 tons)
4442 sparger M-Sparger
4445 stack M-Stack
4450 startup/vendor rep M-Startup
4455 steamturbinegenerator M-Steam Turbine Generator
4460 sterlingboiler M-B-S-10910
4465 strainer M-Strainer
4470 strippercolumn M-Stripper Column
4475 surfacecondenser M-CS-FT-(Each) Cond Crossover Boltup
4480 tank M-(EA) Decanting Turpentine Tank (5ft dia x 12ft high)(Wt=1.04 tons)
4485 turbine M-(EA) Turbine Drive, Inlet 600 PSIG, Outlet 15 PSIG, 1800hp,
5400RPM (Wt=6.438 tons)
4487 turbinegenerator M-Turbine Generator
4490 unloader M-Unloader
4495 valve M-(EA) Digester Blow Valves (10in) (Wt=.6 tons)
4500 stockwasher M-(EA) Brown Stock Washer 11.5ft dia x 20ft (Filter Area
729SF)(Wt=45.47 Tons)--Includes Repulper
4505 washer M-Washer
Piping
PIPING
P01 BOLTUPS P-P PIPING
P02 CONTROL VALVES P-P
P03 DEMO P-D DEMO
P04 EXPANSION JTS P-P
P05 PIPE FITGS (w/flgs) P-P
P06 HANGER STEEL P-H HANGERS
P07 HANGERS P-H
P08 HANGERS P-H
P09 HOSES P-P
P10 HOSES P-P
P11 INSTR P-I INSTRUMENTS
P12 NIPPLES P-P
P13 WELDOLETS P-P
P14 UN-CLASSIFIED P-P
P15 PIPE P-P
P16 STRAINERS/TRAPS P-P
P17 SPOOLS P-S SPOOLS
P18 STRESS/TESTING P-T TESTING
P19 TIE-INS P-E TIE-INS
P20 TUBING P-P
P21 TUBE FITTINGS P-P
P22 VALVES(w/O Control) P-P
P23 F.WELDS (FBW) P-W PIPE WELDING
P23S S.WELDS (SBW) P-W

P24 FLR/WALL PENTR P-C CSA MODS
P25 BENDS P-P
P26 HALF CPLG P-P
P27 FULL CPLG P-P
P28 NDT P-T
P29 REDUCING FITTGS P-P
5100 CS Piping
5110 CARBON STEEL PIPE & FITTINGS
5111 CARBON STEEL PIPE & FITTINGS < 3"
5112 CARBON STEEL PIPE & FITTINGS 3" > 6"
5119 CARBON STEEL PIPE & FITTINGS > 50"
5140 BOLTS & GASKETS
5141 BOLTS & GASKETS < 3"
5142 BOLTS & GASKETS 3" > 6"
5149 BOLTS & GASKETS > 50"
5170 CARBON STEEL WELDING
5171 CARBON STEEL WELDING < 3"
5172 CARBON STEEL WELDING 3" > 6"
5179 CARBON STEEL WELDING > 50"
5300 304 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings

5310 304 STAINLESS PIPE & FITTINGS
5311 304 STAINLESS PIPE & FITTINGS < 3"
5312 304 STAINLESS PIPE & FITTINGS 3" > 6"

5319 304 STAINLESS PIPE & FITTINGS > 50"
5370 304 STAINLESS WELDING
5371 304 STAINLESS WELDING < 3"
5372 304 STAINLESS WELDING 3" > 6"
5379 304 STAINLESS WELDING > 50"
5400 316 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings

5410 316 STAINLESS PIPE & FITTINGS
5411 316 STAINLESS PIPE & FITTINGS < 3"
5419 316 STAINLESS PIPE & FITTINGS > 50"

5470 316 STAINLESS WELDING
5471 316 STAINLESS WELDING < 3"
5479 316 STAINLESS WELDING > 50"
5500 Ductile Iron

5510 DI
5511 DI PIPE & FITTINGS < 3"
5512 DI PIPE & FITTINGS 3" > 6"
5519 DI PIPE & FITTINGS > 50"
5600 HDPE
5610 HDPE
5611 HDPE PIPE & FITTINGS < 3"
5612 HDPE PIPE & FITTINGS 3" > 6"
5619 HDPE PIPE & FITTINGS > 50"
Electrical
Instrumentation/Controls
Painting/Coating
M02 MISC GROUP 2 M-2 NA
M07 PAINT/COATING STEEL M-PS PAINTING
M08 PAINT/COATING PIPE M-P PAINTING
M09 PAINT/COATING EQUIP M-PE PAINTING
Insulation
M10 INSULATION PIPE M-I INSULATION
M11 INSULATION EQUIP M-IE INSULATION
NOTE: In upcoming revisions, the M series of numbers will be expanded to closely match the
Complete Estimator file. This will impact all estimate files too.
LABOR CREWS & RESOURCES
B PT-Blr Erection Labor

BH PT-Backhoe Labor
C_CSA Construction--CSA Labor
C_E&I Construction--Elect/Instr Labor
C_IND Construction Indirects Labor
C_INSUL Construction--Insulation Labor
C_NDT Construction--NDT Testing Labor
C_PAINT Construction--Painting Labor
C_PIPE Construction--Pipe Labor
C10 PT-Hangers Labor
C11 PT- Labor
C12 PT- Labor
C13 PT- Labor
C14 PT- Labor
C15 PT- Labor
C16 PT- Labor
C17 PT- Labor
C18 PT- Labor
C19 PT- Labor
C20 PT- Labor
C21 PT- Labor
C22 PT- Labor
C23 PT- Labor
C24 PT- Labor
C25 T- Labor
C26 PT- Labor
C27 PT- Labor
C28 PT- Labor
C29 PT- Labor
C30 PT- Labor
CB PT-Do Boltups Labor
CC PT-Civil Crew Labor
CP PT-Pipe Installation Labor
CV PT-Valves Installation Labor
CW PT-Pipe Welding Labor
EI PT-Elect/Instr Labor
I PT-Insulation Labor
IL PT-Struct Steel Labor
L PT-Laborer Labor
L-CONC PT-Concrete Labor
L-EARTH PT-Earthwork Labor
L-ELECT PT-Electrical Labor
L-HANGERS PT-Hangers Labor

L-INSTR PT-Instrumentation Labor
L-INSUL PT-Insulation Labor
L-MECH PT-Process Equipment Labor
L-PAINT PT-Painting Labor
L-PIPE PT-Pipe Labor
L-PIPEW PT-Pipe Welding Labor
L-STEEL PT-Structural Steel Labor
L-TEST PT-Testing Labor
M PT-Equipment Installation Labor
M-CONC PT-Concrete Material Quantity Material Cubic Yards
M-EARTH PT-Excavation Material Quantity Material Cubic Yards
M-ELECT PT-Electrical Material Quantity Material Each
M-HANGERS PT-Hanger Material Quantity Material Each
M-INSTR PT-Instrumentation Material Each
M-INSUL PT-Insulation Material Quantity Material Square Feet
M-MECH PT-Process Equipment Material Qty Material Each
M-PAINT PT-Paint Material Quantity Material Square Feet
M-PIPE PT-Pipe Material Quantity Material Linear Feet
M-STEEL PT-Struct Steel Material Quantity Material Pounds
M-TEST PT-Testing Material Quantity Material Linear Feet
M-WELDS PT-Welds Quantity Material Each
O PT-Operator Labor
P PT-Painting Labor
RE PT-Rebar Labor
PART TWENTY-TWO
Primavera Importing
After you have completed your estimate, it is time to use Primavera to import the information from
Excel to the schedule. Again I will post the instructions and add pictures that can be found on the
Instructions tab in the PIPEtalk E2P6 CALCULATION FILE. Please follow these step by step
instructions.
STEP 1
Start Primavera. Import the file that builds the WBS; "PIPEtalk IMPORT WBS AND PROJECT
DATA.xer". Primavera has help in their program that will provide guidance for importing. Leave
STEP 2
Now import the file called; "PIPEtalk RESOURCES.xer" to build the resources used by the PIPEtalk
estimating units. Add these PIPEtalk resources to yours by importing this file. Afterwards, leave
Select Import from the menu. Then select Primavera PM/MM as shown above.
Import only the project at this time. (Image above)
You should be able to locate the .xer file in the PIPEtalk4.1 folder as shown above. Select to
Open the file.
The file will now show up in the next Primavera menu as seen above. Select next.
After selecting next, the screen above will appear. You now need to select a place to import
the file to.
If you press next, you will get an error asking you to select an EPS location.
By double clicking the Import to cell, you will have the above menu appear. Select the
location you want the file to be put.
The location you chose will now be in the right side as shown above. Press next.
After pressing next, the screen above will be shown. You want to import ALL items as shown
on the next page. I have created a layout called ALL to address the situation. The next page will
show you how to build ALL if you do not have one that does the same as the ALL layout.
Simple Add a layout (see prior view) and do not check any of the boxes as shown above and
press OK.
This screen (above) will show after you press Next. Now press Finish.
The program should now be running as shown above.

STEP 3
Now import; "TARGET01.xer" file. This will build a target file for the program to land the
information in. See the image below.
After selecting the file name from the list, you will see the image above. Press Next.
As before, select the Import To and select the location to put the file at. It would be better if you put
all files in the same location in Primavera. Press Next.
This screen will appear after you pressed Next. Press Finish to Import the file.
The screen telling you the Import was successful is shown above. Press OK in that screen.
STEP 4
You need a layout so you can view the files in Primavera, which you can change later if you wish.
Open your layout menu and import; "PIPEtalk Layout.plf". This layout has the WBS levels ready to
use. Any of your layouts will work, but you should address the WBS levels as you need to address
the PIPEtalk CGEN-Schedules.
Select the PIPEtalk Layout to import into Primavera as shown above. I usually save the layout so all
users can use it (See below) This import is quick. You need another import to create a global change.
Select from the menu, Tools/Global Change/Import: "DURATION _ PHYSICAL.pcf" from the
PIPEtalk folder as shown below:
Select from the menu, Tools/Global Change/Import: "Duration Type FU_T=FD&U.pcf" from the
PIPEtalk folder similar to the image shown above.
Steps 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10 are related to the Excel instructions and were discussed in
Part Twenty-One of Chapter 10. Now begin at Step 11 on the next page.
STEP 11/12
When the macro has finished, you will receive this message, "This file has been saved and will now
close. The data has been transferred to the import file. You can now run Primavera. After staring
Primavera select the supplied Import Template and import the information from IMPORT FILE
FROM EXCEL TO P6.xls. This file is saving and closing...." All the Excel files have closed. Now
you should return to Primavera. Open the project called: "Target01". On the Menu select
Import/Spreadsheet.. If you have closed the file, open it back up.
After opening the file, select Import again. This time you will import a spreadsheet. (See below)
STEP 13
Select File/Import: PIPEtalk E2P6 PRIMAVERA IMPORT FILE.xls Select NEXT.
STEP 14
Check only Activities and Activities Relationships (See Below). This will build the activities without
the resources. Do not check the resources yet. Then Select NEXT.
After you selected next, you will see the screen above. Now again, select Next and you see the screen
below.
STEP 15
At Import Project Options, (See image on prior page bottom) on the right side, double click on the
empty cell below Import To and select the folder location you are using. Then NEXT and then
FINISH (See image below). The program will run (Maybe some time) and give you a report screen
saying it was successful or maybe it ran with some errors. Some errors are expected, so that will not
be a problem.
STEP 16
From the Primavera screen, select the activities, then select View/Layout/Open the layout called:
TARGET TEST. If it is not in your list, execute Step 4 and return to this step afterwards. You should
now see your activities. The resources are not yet loaded.
STEP 17
To prepare the file to receive the resources, you must run a Global Change called: "DURATION _
PHYSICAL" before importing the resources from the new PIPEtalk E2P6 PRIMAVERA IMPORT
FILE.xls file. Run the Global Change by selecting APPLY CHANGE and then select COMMIT
CHANGES. The programs then asks if you want to save a log file. I usually do not. Close the Global
Change window.
STEP 18
Again, select File/Import: PIPEtalk E2P6 PRIMAVERA IMPORT FILE.xls Select NEXT.
STEP 19
Only check Resources and Resource Assignments. This will build the resources for the activities you
loaded prior. Select NEXT.
STEP 20
select Target01. Then NEXT and then FINISH. The program will run (This may take some time) and
give you a report screen saying it was successful or maybe it ran with some errors. Some errors is
expected, so that will not be a problem. (This is the same as step 15)
STEP 21
In Primavera, calculate the project. The resources are in the file, but need to be modified. Run a
Global Change called:"Duration Type FU_T=FD&U.pcf". Run the Global Change by selecting
APPLY CHANGE and then select COMMIT CHANGES. The programs then asks if you want to
save a log file. I usually do not. Close the Global Change window. Finally, select File/Import:
PIPEtalk E2P6 PRIMAVERA IMPORT FILE.xls Only check Resources and Resource Assignments.
This adjusts the method that Primavera does it's resource math. Select NEXT. Calculate (F9) You
should see activities broken down by WBS codes and their associated hours if you have the correct
layout. Modify the schedules for items you do not need, shorten lengthen durations. As you change
the durations, confirm that the hours are constant, that they do not change when you change the
duration.
The WBS structure of the PIPEtalk Import File is designed for future entries which include
Engineering and Procurement. The items imported will only be Construction related. The WBS has
60 Areas. The areas cannot import a description due to Primaveras design of importing. There is
simply no ability built into the system to import the WBS descriptions via the Excel importing.
Each Area is broken down into sublevels as shown below.
The piping is further broken down into 200 lines. Again each of the WBS entries for the 200 lines can
be have a description added from Excel. Therefore, the WBS will read something like this when you
see the layout:
Your Project File Name

Area Number
Construction
Piping
Line Number
Activities
CHAPTER ELEVEN
COMPLETE ESTIMATOR FILE

The Complete Estimator was released for the first time in October 2008. In this instruction
book issue, we include a copy of the first rough cut instructions which are found inside the
Complete Estimator file. The purpose of the Complete Estimator is to provide you a file you can
use to bring all the estimate together, including indirects. Plus you can paste/use the pipe
estimate here.
PART TWENTY-THREE
Complete Estimator File
TAB INDEX
GENERAL COMMENTS
SETUP SCREEN
ESTIMATE
TAKEOFF
BARE
LOADED
Sample CD1
Sample CD2
Sample CD3
CRAFT
CREWS
UNITS
PRICE OVER-RIDES
Paste PIPEtalk Here
WC
COST CODE
BOND
FINANCE
ABOUT
GENERAL COMMENTS
Calculation has been turned off in the Complete Estimator. Due to the large
amount of calculations, it is suggested you keep the calculation set to manual. Use the provided
calculation buttons, when supplied or F9.
1 This file has been used to build 100 million dollar projects and is used to bring
assemble the finish estimate. Use it to bring all of your Excel units you have collected over the
years. Organize the information by many code levels. You can bring into this file your RS
Means units (Conversion file is separate); add yours to theirs and a PIPEtalk estimate file by
pasting values. You can map the PIPEtalk codes to your code inside this file. This is the first
issue of this file, but not the first time it has been used for large estimates. It has taken 10 years
to develop. Because the estimate constantly changes the requirements, the file is in constant flux.
It is very "adjustable" to meet your needs.
2 To begin to explain it, I must describe to you my ideas that were used to build it.
First, I believe projects have many parts. A short list is; contractor directs, contractor indirects,
contractor home office cost, contractor profits, subcontractors, owner costs and engineering.
Each of these have further breakdowns.
3 The estimate line item should cover the following subjects; description, quantity,
unit of measure, calculate hours, crew, crew rate, unit for manpower hours, unit for materials,
unit for process equipment, units for subcontractors, units for equipment and the resulting
calculated fields. In addition, you need cost broken down to match the bid, scope areas (WBS)
and scheduling.
4 The main cover sheet that should not be changed to any degree is the "estimate"
tab. It is more than just a report, it is a checking device. At the bottom, you will have to adjust
the formulas so that the check row is zero. What is happening here is a comparison between the
data that is collected on the "estimate" tab and the data that is on the "takeoff" tab. They
should be in balance when all is said and done.
5 Reports are necessary to retrieve the estimate results. Each code column has a
different type of report sample provided to you. I suggest you design your own by modifying the
included ones.
SETUP SCREEN
1 The major area of the setup screen are: project information, your companies
information, various switches and questions, equipment rental craft controls, percent setups for
unload/loaded rates, rental unit price sets, other country selections, PT&I percentages, select
wage rates to use, bonds, workers comp dates and wages for various craftsmen.
2 Starting in the upper left corner:

Estimate Revision Self explaining
Estimate Title 1 Self explaining
Your Company Name Self explaining
Your Company Second Line Self explaining
Your Company Third Line Self explaining
Your Company Fourth Line Self explaining
Your Proposal Number Self explaining
Turn on Crew Productivity: If you wish to adjust the estimate for a different location
or craft type (Union/Non), select Y and press the button
to go to the crews. There, adjust the 1.0 to your
preferred value. You will see, next to the crew name, if
the file is using that crew.
Select Rate Set to Use Each craft can have 40 different rate sets. A rate set
has 6 possible groups: 1--Building, 2--Highways, 3--
Industrial, 4--Max of the first 3, 5--Your fixed company
rates and 6--Union
Select Rate Group Select which group:1--Building, 2--Highways, 3--
Industrial, 4--Max of the first 3, 5--Your fixed company
rates and 6--Union
Country Currency: At column K, there is a place for you to build a list of
countries. Select the one you are using.
US Money Conversion X To convert US currency to another, enter the multiplier
here. As a record, post the same to the right of the
country in the Country List (Col L)
Use A Loaded Rate? (Y/N) : Select if you want to use a loaded or non-loaded rate.
This will switch calculations from column G and H,
depending on you selection here. The estimate tab with
switch too.
Calc Indirects Using Duration?: If you select no, the indirects connected to the duration
at cells C26,C27&C28 on the setup tab will be turned
off. If you are using a loaded rate that includes
indirects, select N here. You would do this if you were
using a loaded rate that includes indirects.
Use Pricing Over-ride? If you use this file to build a template or an estimate that,
you need to adjust through time. Setup the price over-
rides on the over-ride tab and select Yes here.
1.Proj Indirects Duration (Wks) Enter the staff duration here.
2.Proj Indirects Duration (Wks) Enter the support craft duration here
3.Proj Indirects Duration (Wks) Enter the equipment rental duration here. You can
adjust the formulas at the equipment to reflect any
month you want.
PortaJohns People#: How many people do you allow per PortaJohn? There
is a calculated filed to the right that gives the result.
Hours Per Week for Craft Hours to work each week for the hourly employees
Hours Per Week for Staff Hours that you will pay the staff (Salary) for each week.
Work Days/Week Enter 4,5,6,7 here

Enter Proj Duration (Wks) From move in to move out, enter the duration
Approx Number of People Your best guess (Used as a logic check)
Enter USA Subcontract Rate Subcontractors are prorated and the hours are guessed
at. How much do you want to allow per hour for the
subs rate?
2nd Country Subcontract Rate If you run this file for another country entry their
subcontractor rate per hour.
Overtime After (Hrs/Wk): Normally entered as 40.
3 Continuing down the page, at E50 on the setup tab, you should enter the current
rates for PT&I's. If you select another country or select loaded, these will not be used.
4 There are some links to the bond and finance calculators. There is also a link to
the workers compensation tab.
5 The names of the wage rate sets can be changed in the next section beginning at
row 67 on the setup tab. A few rates are currently loaded. You should load yours beginning at
rate set six (6).
6 You can change the wage rate group sets next. You will see that the ones provided
match government styled projects. I see no need to change these, but you can. The third set is
an average of the first three, so do not modify that name.
7 I am somewhat limited on the number of rates I can have. The limit is set by A
thru IV divided by three. I have the used the maximum available. You can change the names of
the craft on the CRAFT tab--do not change names or labor codes on the setup tab.
8 You can post wage rates under the 6 possible groups: 1--Building, 2--Highways, 3-
-Industrial, 4--Max of the first 3, 5--Your fixed company rates and 6--Union and record the rate
source for each of the 40 rate sets. Do not change rates on the CRAFT tab.
9 Back to the top center. Subcontractors, hourly and staff can be paid a per diem
via their hours. Set a rate for per diem for each hour a subcontractor, an hourly paid employee
or staff personnel. (Press the hyperlink to go to the Per Diem)
10 Back to the top center. You can adjust the indirect operator labor, which is
contained inside the direct takeoff, reducing duplication of hours. Some crews used by RS
Means contain operators. The operators time is collected by PIPEtalk and presented here for
your review. If you automatically deduct the hours found in the directs from the indirect hours
at rentals by formula, it creates a circular reference. To allow the direct hours to be deducted
from the operators time, you can have the macro post the hours. Old estimates leave old
numbers in the template, so I have a clear button for each operator. To use this feature, you
must link the operator's labor formula to the hours to be deducted. A link can be used to go to
each one.
11 At the top right is a list of percentages that run when you pick loaded or non-
loaded rates at C23. Each project, each company requires their own settings. Do not change
these percentages on the estimate tab; use this setup tab to change them.
12 Beneath the loaded/non-loaded percentages you will find the equipment rental
group switch. This is designed to move in/out two sets of equipment rental rates. You may do
business with another country and the rates there are so different that standard USA rates
simply do not apply. Many of the rates in this file have become outdated and may require you to
make adjustments. Do not make the rate changes in column Y. The rates must be changed in
columns AJ and AL. The setup will switch one set or the other based on you selection. After
making changes in columns AJ or AL, run the macro button to move a copy of the set you want
to be used.
13 Lastly, the extreme top right has a list you can use to list the countries you do
business with. You can post the exchange rate and date here too. The countries are used in a
pull down.
14 Finally, if you make any change on the setup tab, calculate the entire file for the
changes to be posted and calculated.
ESTIMATE
1 The purpose of the estimate tab is to pull information from the takeoff, organize it,
add contractor multipliers; post owners cost and provide some engineering cost.
2 The top of the tab contains the contractors cost, then the owners cost and finally
the engineering information.
3 The contractors cost is divided into: directs, field indirects, home office cost,
multipliers and markups.
4 The owners cost will vary and no one template will be correct for all projects.
5 The design firm cost can be placed on this tab or on the takeoff tab and then
posted on this tab by formulas.
6 Many times the owner provides all the major equipment. The owner does not
expect the contractor to mark up the equipment as if he had purchased it. The owner expects
him to lower his profit on the major owner purchased items. You can list the items to be
marked up at the lower cost at the bottom left corner of the estimate tab.
7 The most difficult thing is to be sure that all the items on the takeoff are accounted
for on the estimate tab. If you forget to post a code for the estimate, it will not be posted on the
estimate tab. Look at the bottom row (right) of the estimate tab and you will see a series of zero.
The goal is to make sure that all of these are zero after calculating the entire file by using the
provided button. This button also posts a circular reference breaker, so use the button to do the
calculation please. (Means that the takeoff items are inside the estimate tab). You may have to
adjust the formula, be careful, and understand why you are making the adjustment if you make
one.
TAKEOFF
1 The takeoff is organized by alpha-number (A01, A02, etc) with controls across the
top of the tab. Your data comes from three sources. You can have a wild card, which you build
without tying to another source. It can also be used for headers. Second, you have a takeoff
item that is connected to your database called UNITS (tab). Thirdly, you have formulas that are
connected to the PIPEtalk information inside the file. The pipetalk information is pasted by you
into this file.
LEFT TOP
RIGHT TOP
2 To jump around in the takeoff tab, you can press the A>Z buttons. This will take
you to a BARE labor summary tab, which has a list of all the alpha-numbers and their titles. To
update the list, you might have to recalculate the tab to display all the titles. Select any of the
alpha-numbers (Hyper-links) to jump to them on the takeoff tab.
3 These A>Z alpha-number groups collect information that lies beneath them. Each
A>Z group has 35 sub-groups. The gray summary lines have a letter and two numbers. (Exa:
A01) Any item that belongs to that group contains a dot after the groups name. (Exa: A01.)
This allows the formulas to rollup the estimate information to the gray bars. You will also need
to enter a name for the upper roll up alpha group--see the bottom of the BARE tab to enter a
name. In summary, the formulas captures information at the A level and then creates a
summary at the gray bar and the BARE tab for each of the sub-groups, like A01, A02, B01, etc.
4 To begin, you need some rows to collect your estimate data. Select a grey alpha-
number bar. In column "I" add a description for that alpha-number group. Now place your
cursor beneath the gray bar. Then press the "Add Rows" button or the "A" button; both run
the same macro. The macro will show you a panel that allows you to pick a few simple buttons
to make the rows that you need. Have your cursor at the location where you want the rows to be
added before pressing any of the buttons. Select one of three kinds of rows to add to the takeoff
panel. There are samples in the original template.
DO NOT ADD ANY GRAY TITLES UNLESS ARE REPLACING ONE YOU
ACCIDENTALLY REMOVED.
5 At the top are some goto buttons. Press them to goto the indirects, equipment
rentals and engineering.
6 Also, at the top of the takeoff tab are other buttons. One allows you to save the file
quickly. One allows you to paste as a value (V). There are buttons that allow you to show/hide
the codes on the left and formula rows at the top. The button marked "xF" will calculate the
entire file. The button marked "xT" will calculate the takeoff tab. The one marked "DUP" will
copy and insert you selected rows. The "DEL" macro button will delete a row/range that you
specify.
BARE
1 This tab provides two things. One, a summary of all the alpha-numbers and a
place to enter the titles for the A,B,C totals. NEVER INSERT OR DELETE ROWS OR
COLUMNS ON THE BARE TABOTHER TABS ARE CONNECTEDPOSITION IS
IMPORTANT!
2 At the top of the file you will find some micro buttons. One will look to see if a
summary has more than zero dollars, if not, it will hide the row. The hide buttons will allow you
to see the macro running. It does run slowly. Another button displays all hidden rows. You
should calculate the entire file before running the hide/unhide buttons. Another button pastes
values and one calculates the tab.
3 On the right top you will find a row of buttons A>Z. Use these to jump to the
alpha group.
4 All the alpha-numbers are links to the takeoff sheet are on the left side. Press the
link and it will take you straight to the right place on the takeoff tab.
LOADED
1 This tab is a simple duplication, by formulas, of the BARE tab but the formulas
spread the indirect cost over the directs. Equipment rentals are spread based on the labor.
2 There are fewer macro buttons on the LOADED tab. AS before, you will find
buttons that hide rows that are of zero value and another that unhides all the rows. As before,
be sure you have calculated the entire worksheet before running those macros.
SAMPLE CD1
1 This is a sample of how the code level one can be used.
SAMPLE CD2
1 This is a sample of how the code level two can be used.
SAMPLE CD3
1 The code level three was originally used to capture information for schedules.
This tab has to be modified to suit your company or the project.
CRAFT
1 This tab collects data about the craft. Here, the total hours and the hours from
the indirects are shown. The math difference is considered to be the hours from the directs.
You may change the crafts meaning (Columns B & C), but if you do, the crews using that craft
will need to be modified on the crew tab. The crew tab may have that craft in its crew. If you
change the meaning of that crewmen, it will put the wrong craft in the crew. So be careful how
you change the labor codes. Keep in mind that some units may be using the crew you change. If
you change the code, it may give you $0 per hours for the missing craftsman.
CREWS
1 There are four sets of crews. The first (1/4) is simply the craft list plus the safety
training crew. You do not need to adjust group 1 of 4.
2 Set 2 of 4 is for the PIPEtalk crews. If you add crews to PIPEtalk, you should add
the same to this tab.
3 Set 3 of 4 is for engineering.
4 Set 4 of 4 are crews that you build or are from RS Means. If you use RS Means or
another company, you will need to include the crews here.
5 To build a crew, you need to list the crew code on the left edge. If it turns red, the
code is already being used, so you will have to select another or find the crew in the list. From
left to right, reading the top, place the number of men for any craft on the row for the crew. Do
not forget the to list the equipment operators you need. Partial persons are OK. (Exa: OD at
.25)
UNITS
1 These units are from older RS Means. You should load your own units here.
PRICE OVER-RIDES
1 On the setup screen, you can select to use price over-rides. The purpose of the
price over-rides is to allow a fast updating of the prices. The upper part is used to post
information from your purchasing. The lower part is where you would post the information
from your current estimate (takeoff tab). Paste the columns that are indicated on the over-ride
tab.
PASTE PIPEtalk HERE

1 This tab allows you to paste values of a PIPEtalk estimate. Begin by pasting the
values of the pipetalk estimate file, beginning at cell C137. Then select which lines you want to
use in the estimate (takeoff tab). Move the supplied PT#### to the left (Col a) if you do not want
to use the line of takeoff. If the PT#### is in the left column, the takeoff line on the Paste
PIPEtalk Here tab will not be used. If the PT#### is in the second column (Col B), you can
reference the PT#### in the takeoff tab using the PIPEtalk formula row.
2 There are four macro buttons. They are: CLEAR NUMBERS AND RESET,
CLEAR OLD DATA, HIDE CROSS REF MAP and UNHIDE CROSS REF MAP
3 Use CLEAR NUMBERS AND RESET to reset the left side and CLEAR OLD
DATA to remove the current estimate to create a blank template.
4 There are two macros to display or hide the pipetalk reference map. Press the
unhide macro. Here the code found in PIPEtalk is cross-referenced with the estimate codes. If
you want PIPEtalk to ship the estimate information to another estimate code, remap it here.
(WC) WORKERS COMP INSURANCE

1 The WC tab is used to post the rates for the workers compensation insurance.
There are four columns that can contain WC rates. These is a list of the codes on the left edge.
Then there is a discount column. To the right of the discount is the resulting rate to be used in
the estimate. You can switch between any of the four WC rates by placing an X above the
column you want to use.
COST CODE
1 This tab is not being used at this time and the format is outdated.
BOND
1 This form is also outdated, but can be adjusted to suit your company's use.
FINANCE
1 Enter the amount to be financed on the estimate tab and the percentages on the
finance tab, then calculate the finance tab. The estimate tab will show the result when the file is
calculated.
CHAPTER TWELVE
Codes And Craft Resources
A comprehensive listing of the code structures and craft resources is provided in this chapter.
You must be able to enter the SEEK CODES without having to do much thinking. In order to
do estimating quickly, the SEE CODES must be naturally intuitive to you. Study the code
structures and you will find in a short time, yourself entering the SEEK CODES without having
to look them up.
PART TWENTY-FOUR
Report Codes
MISCELLANOUS SUMMARY ITEMS ON THE REPORTS
M01 PROCESS EQUIPMENT

M02 MISCF Miscellaneous field installed items not defined in the data base.
M03 MISC Miscellaneous shop fabricated items not defined in the data base.
M04 MISC
M05 MISC
M06 MISC
M07 MISC
M08 MISC
M09 MISC .
M10 INSULATION
M11 PAINT/COATING
M12 STARTUP
PIPING SUMMARY ITEMS ON THE REPORTS
P01 P-BOLTUP (EA Used to track the number of field bolt-ups. Code attached to all bolt and gasket sets.
P02 P-CONTROL VALVES (EA) Used to track the number of control valves installed by piping.
P03 P-DEMOLITION (LOT) Totals information about pipe demolition.
P04 P-EXPANSION JTS (EA) Counts the number of pipe expansion joints.
P05 P-FITTINGS (EA) Used to count the number of fittings to determine fitting density. This code is attached to
the fittings that are to be included in this count.
P06 P-HANGER STEEL (LB) Used to total the pipe support hanger steel weight.
P07 P-HANGERS (EA) Used to accumulate the quantity of hangers by each. This count includes the assemblies
and hangers that will count EACH.
P08 P-HANGERS (LOT) Used to accumulate the information that completes the EACH hanger group. (All but certain
hanger figure numbers and assemblies).
P09 P-HOSES (EA) Used to count the quantity of hoses that are estimated by each.
P10 P-HOSES (LF) Accumulates the hoses that do not estimate as each but as LF.
P11 P-INSTRUMENTS (EA) Used to track the number of instruments installed by piping.
P12 P-NIPPLES (EA) Used to accumulate and flag special descriptions for nipples.
P13 P-OLETS (EA) Used to create special descriptions and count olets.
P14 P-OTHER (LOT) Used to charge all other pipe functions that don't fit other codes.
P15 P-PIPE (LF) Used to accumulate pipe LF and determine material supply responsibilities from setup.
P16 P-STRAINER/TRAP (EA) Used to accumulate strainers and steam traps by the EA.
P17 P-SPOOLS(EA or LF) Used to accumulate spools by LF or EA (Depends on setup).
P18 P-TESTING (LOT) Code used to track information for pipe testing. Most pipe testing is included in the other
units. This does NOT break out the value included in other units.
P19 P-TIEINS (EA) Helps count the number of tie-ins estimated.
P20 P-TUBING(LF) Used to track the LF of tubing.
P21 P-TUBING FITTINGS (EA) Used to track the number of tubing fittings.
P22 P-VALVES (EA) Used to track the number of pipe valves regardless of the type of valve.
P23 P-WELDING (EA) Used to count the field welds. The welds are counted by the information pre-set at column
"N" on sheet "LAB" times the quantity.
P23S P-WELDING (EA) Used to count the shop welds. The welds are counted by the information pre-set at column
"N" on sheet "LAB" times the quantity.
REPORT CODES CONTINUED

CONCRETE SUMMARY ITEMS ON THE REPORTS
C01 C-ANCHOR BOLTS (LB) Collects the LB of concrete anchor bolts (Not Expansion types) (Codes: Anchor Bolts:
ABCS,ABSL,ABSS ).
C02 C-CONCRETE (CY) Code used to accumulate concrete quantities (Codes: C20,C30,C35,C40 and C45)
C03 C-DEMOLITION Use to collect CY for demolition of concrete.
C04 C-EMBEDDED (LB) Code used to collect the pounds of embedded metal (Code: EM) .
C05 C-FORMS (SF) Collects the SF of forms (Codes for wood is F1, F2, F3 and F4. Rental forms is code
FRENT).
C06 C-GRATING (SF) Collects the SF of grating used on concrete work. Includes cast iron and steel (Codes:
GC,GEF,GG,GP).
C07 C-GROUT (CF) Totals the CF of all grout. ( Grout Codes: GE,GNS and GSC) .
C08 C-METAL DECKING (SF) Accumulates the SF of "Q" or "C" decking (Not Converted to LB by program) - See also S-
DECKING (LB) for buildings.
C09 C-REBAR (LB) Collects the weight in LB of rebar. Used to check LB/CY by type of concrete. (Codes:
RE1,RE2,REC1,REC2).
C10 C-OTHER (LOT) Used to collect information on all other concrete work not otherwise coded separately.
EARTHWORK SUMMARY ITEMS ON THE REPORTS

E01 E-BACKFILL HAND Used to total the CY of hand backfill and hand trim (Codes: HB and HT).
E02 E-BACKFILL MACHINE Used to total the CY of machine backfill (Code: MB).
E03 E-COMPACTION HAND Used to total the CY of hand compaction .
E04 E-COMPACTION MACHINE Used to total the CY of machine compaction.
E05 E-EXCAVATION HAND Used to total the CY of hand excavation. Code: MH).
E06 E-EXCAVATION MACHINE Used to total the CY of machine excavation (Code: ME).
E07 E-HAUL Accumulates the CY of haul (Code: HAUL).
E08 E-PURCHASE FILL Provides tracking for purchased fill and surface treatments in CY (Codes: FILL SAND
GRAVEL) .
E09 E-SITE PREPARATION Used to total the CY of earthwork for site improvements.
E10 E-TRENCHING BACKFILL Used to total the CY of trenching backfill.
E11 E-TRENCHING EXCAV Used to total the CY of trenching excavation.
STRUCTURAL STEEL SUMMARY ITEMS ON THE REPORTS

S01 S-BAR JOIST (LB) Entered as size and LF. Converted to LB by program.
S02 S-DECKING (LB) Entered as square feet and converted to LB by program - See also C-
METAL DECKING (LB) for concrete "C" or "D" decking.
S03 S-FABRICATED STEEL -- LIGHT (LB) Entered by size and LF. Converted to LB by program.
S04 S-FABRICATED STEEL -- MEDIUM (LB) Entered by size and LF. Converted to LB by program.
S05 S-FABRICATED STEEL -- HEAVY (LB) Entered by size and LF. Converted to LB by program.
S06 S-FABRICATED STEEL -- XHEAVY (LB) Entered by size and LF. Converted to LB by program.
S07 S-GRATING (LB) Entered by size and SF of grating. Program converts to LB.
S08 S-HANDRAIL SLOPPED (LB) Entered by LF and converted to LB by program.
S09 S-HANDRAIL STRAIGHT (LB) Entered by LF and converted to LB by program.
S10 S-LADDER OPEN (LB) Entered by LF and converted to LB by program.
S11 S-LADDER CAGED (LB) Entered by full height LF and converted to LB by program.
S12 S-OTHER Used to charge all other structural steel functions that don't fit other
codes.
S13 S-PLATE (LB) Entered by SF and converted to LB by program.
S14 S-STEPS (LB) Entered by width and each, then converted to LB by program.
S15 S-WELDNG (LF) Used to accumulate the LF of structural welding.
PART TWENTY-FIVE
Reserved Seek Codes
RESERVED SEEK CODE LETTERS - DO NOT USE FOR OTHER MEANINGS

H HANGERS 1ST Letter of SEEK For all pipe hangers
HS HANGER STEEL 1ST Two Letters of SEEK For all hanger structural steel ONLY
P PIPE 1ST Letter of SEEK For all pipe and non-threaded nipples
V VALVES 1ST Letter of SEEK For all hand valves
VCO CONTROL VALVES 1ST Three Letters of SEEK For all control valves
E- EARTHWORK 1ST Two Letters of SEEK For all earthwork items
C- CONCRETE 1ST Two Letters of SEEK For all concrete items
M- MECHANICAL 1ST Two Letters of SEEK For all equipment setting
S- STRUCTURAL STL 1ST Two Letters of SEEK For all structural steel (Non-Hanger Steel)
RESERVED UOM LETTERS - DO NOT USE FOR OTHER MEANINGS

LF LF of PIPE 1ST Two Letters For LF of PIPE ONLY
CY. CY of CONCRETE 1ST Three Letters Cubic Yards Of CONCRETE ONLY
* Enter in front of *Note to have the program attach that *Note to the separate Purchasing Department Description.
PART TWENTY-SIX
Concrete Seek Code Structure
The format is C- for Concrete, then the Shape, then the Detail as listed:
1ST Part C- This Indicates a Concrete takeoff

2nd Part Shape Types Provides the Shape of the concrete
3rd Part Detail Item Indicates the Detail Item being worked on
Examples of the way the code is used:
C-CNFR Reads as Concrete Work, New Curb On New Concrete, Finish Rub (Hand)
C- Concrete Work, ALWAYS C- FOR CONCRETE
CN New Curb On New Concrete, SEE SHAPE TYPES BELOW
FR Finish Rub (Hand) SEE CONCRETE DETAIL ITEMS
C-BSF1 Reads as Concrete Work, Square Base, Forms (One Use)

C- Concrete Work, ALWAYS C- FOR CONCRETE
BS Square Base, SEE SHAPE TYPES BELOW
F1 Forms (One Use) SEE CONCRETE DETAIL ITEMS
PART TWENTY-SEVEN
(C-) Concrete Seek Code Shape Types
Base: BC BASE CONTINOUS FOOTING FDN
BR BASE RECTANGLE SHAPPED FDN
BS BASE SQUARE FDN
BV BASE CURVED FDN
Curb: CE CURB ON EXISTING CONCRETE
CN CURB ON NEW CONCRETE
E.Slab: ELE ELEVATED ENCASED -WOOD FORMS
ELM ELEVATED SLAB--METAL FORMS
ELW ELEVATED SLAB--WOOD FORMS
Encase: ENC ENCASE CONDUIT
ENP ENCASE PIPING
ENSB ENCASE STEEL BEAMS
ENSC ENCASE STEEL COLUMNS
Eqp: EQC EQUIPMENT FDNS--VERY COMPLEX FORMS
EQM EQUIPMENT FDN--MEDIUM COMPLEXITY
EQS EQUIPMENT FDN--SIMPLE FORMING
Grade Beam: GB GRADE BEAM
Mat: ML MAT--LARGE (>50 CY)
MM MAT--MEDIUM (>25 CY & <50 CY)
MS MAT--SMALL (<25 CY)
Mud: MUB MUD or SEAL SLAB
Octagon: OS OCTAGON--SOLID
OT OCTAGON--TURNDOWN EDGES
Piers: PD PIER--ROUND--DRILLED
PNL(w/sono) PIER--ROUND--NOT DRILLED--LARGE
PNM PIER--ROUND--NOT DRILLED--MEDIUM
PNS PIER--ROUND--NOT DRILLED--SMALL
PRL PIER--RECTANGLE--LARGE
PRM PIER--RECTANGLE--MEDIUM
PRS PIER--RECTANGLE--SMALL
PSL PIER--SQUARE--LARGE
PSM PIER--SQUARE--MEDIUM
PSS PIER--SQUARE--SMALL
Repairs: RP REPAIR--ISOLATED PATCH OF SLAB
RS REPAIR--SMOOTH OUT THE SLAB
Site work: SC SITEWORK--CATCH BASIN
SD SITEWORK--DITCH--CONCRETE LINED
SM SITEWORK--MANHOLE
SR SITEWORK--ROADWAY
SS SITEWORK--SIDEWALK
SW SITEWORK--CULVERT WING WALL
SOG: SOGR SLAB ON GRADE --REBAR REINF
SOGRD SLAB ON GRADE --REBAR REINF W/ DOWELS
SOGRB SLAB ON GRADE --REBAR REINF W/ BEAM
SOGRT SLAB ON GRADE --REBAR REINF W/TURNDOWN
SOGW SLAB ON GRADE --WELDED WIRE REINF
SOGWD SLAB ON GRADE--WELDED WIRE REINF W/DOWELS
Steps: STEP CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE STEPS
Trench: TC TRENCH--COVERED W/STEEL&GRATING
TO TRENCH--OPEN
U-Drain: UD U-DRAIN--DEEP DEPTH W/GRTG
UM U-DRAIN--MEDIUM DEPTH W/GRTG
US U-DRAIN--SHALLOW DEPTH W/GRTG
Wall: WB WALL--BUTTRESS
WC WALL--CURVED
WS WALLSTRAIGHT
PART TWENTY-EIGHT
(C-) Concrete Seek Code Detail Item
Anchor Bolts: ABCS ANCHOR BOLT CARBON STEEL
ABSL ANCHOR BOLT SLEEVE
ABSS ANCHOR BOLT STAINLESS STEEL
Acid Clean: AC ACID CLEANING THE CONCRETE SURFACE
Man Hole Step: AS ACCESS STEP--EMBEDDED ITEM
Bond Agent: BA BONDING AGENT FOR CONCRETE
Block-out: BO BLOCK OUT IN CONCRETE FORMS
Concrete: C20 CONCRETE 2000 PSI

C30 CONCRETE 3000 PSI
Concrete Color: CA CONCRETE COLORING AGENT
Chamfer: CH WOOD OR RUBBER CHAMFER
Chairs: CHA CONCRETE WIRE TYPE CHAIRS FOR REBAR SLABS
Construction Joint: CJ6 METAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT 6 TALL

CJ8 METAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT 8 TALL
CJ10 METAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT 10 TALL
Concrete Sawing: CONCSAWING PRICE TO SAW CONC PER L.INCH OF DEPTH
Core Sawing: CORESAW1>14 CORESAWING OLD CONCRETE BY DIA AND PER INCH OF DEPTH
Demo Concrete: DEMOCONC DEMO CONCRETE AND HAULOFF

Dowels: DO INSTALL A DOWEL INTO THE OLD CONCRETE BY DRILL & EPOXY
DOS(W/O Drill) INSTALL A STANDARD DOWEL WITHOUT DRILLING INTO THE OLD CONC
Expansion Joints: EJ1 FIBER TYPE EXPANSION JOINT 1 THICK

EJ5 FIBER TYPE EXPANSION JOINT .5 THICK
Embedded Metal: EM EMBEDDED METAL
Fabric: FA FABRIC--STABILIZATION
Finish: FB FINISH--BROOM
FH FINISH--HAND TROWEL
FMT FINISH--MACHINE TROWEL
FR FINISH RUB
Form Rental FRENT FORM RENTALS
Grating: GC GRATING--2 CAST IRON

GF GRATING FIBERGLASS
GG GRATING GALVANIZED
GP GRATING 3/8 PLATE
Grout: GE GROUT EPOXY

GNS GROUT NON--SHRINK
GSC GROUT SAND/CEMENT
Keyway: KEY WOOD KEYWAY
Man Hole Cover: MCC MANHOLE COVER--CAST IRON

MCF MANHOLE COVER--FRP
Metal Deck: MD METAL C FORM DECKING
Poly: P6 POLY VAPOR BARRIER 6MIL

PIP POLY VAPOR BARRIER 6MIL--INTERNATIONAL PAPER
Pipe Sleeve: PSL PIPE SLEEVES--GALV
Rebar: RE1 REBAR GRD 60 S. FAB (<1)

RE2 REBAR GRD 60 S.FAB(1 & LARGER)
REC1 REBAR GR 60 COATED S.FAB (<1)
REC2 REBAR GR60 COATED S.FAB (1 & LARGER)
Rough-up: RBH ROUGHEN--BUSH HAMMER

RSB ROUGHEN--SPRAY SAND BLAST
Screed: SC WOODEN SCREED
Sealer: SEAL SPRAY ON SEALER
Small Load: SL SMALL LOAD CHARGE FOR DELIVERIES
Surf Hard: SH TROWEL IN SURFACE HARDNER
Sono Tube: S12 > S48 SONO TUBE FORMS ARE BY SIZES
Steel: STL MISC GALV STEEL BY THE POUND
Water Stop: WS 6 DUMBELL WATERSTOP
Wall Ties: WT FORM WALL TIES
Welded Wire: WWH 4X4 HEAVY W.WIRE

WWM 6X6 MEDIUM W.WIRE
PART TWENTY-NINE
Pipe Fitting Seek Code Formats
FITTINGS AS SHOWN ON THE HELP AT THE ENTRY SCREEN UPPER LEFT
22 (22 ell)
45 (45 ell)
45B3 (3 diameter bend)
90 (90 ell)
90S (90 short radius ell) (Note: Normal for large bore welded fittings is long radius)
==AA> AR (angle ring)
==BB> B (bushing)
BG (default B&G material)
BG1,3,6 (150,300,600# B&G material)
BOLT (drill stl&3/4"bolt)
BU1,3,6,9,15 (150,300,600,900,1500# added labor-flanges have labor included)
==CC> C (default coupling)

CH (default half coupling)
C3 (3M coupling)
C3H (3M half coupling)
C6 (6M coupling)
C6H (6M half coupling)
CAMLOCK
CAP (cap)
CB (cut & bevel)
CUT (cut off)
CORE (core drill--EA)
C&W (coat & wrap joint)
==DD> DRILL (drill steel or pipe)
==EE> EOL3 or EOL6

EX (exp joint)
EXB (drill & 3/4"exp bolt)
==FF> F (default flange)

F1, F3, F6 (150, 300, 600# flange spec type)
FB (default blind)
FB1, FB3, FB6 (150, 300, 600# blind)
FSO add to this an BU(Backup Flange) and add to this an AR (Angle Ring)
FBW (field butt-weld)
FLEX (flex hose)
FLJ1, FL3 (150,300# lap joint flange)
FO (300# orifice flange)
FSTUB1 (150# stub-in flange)
FSL1, FSL3 (150,300# field slip-on weld)
FSO1, FSO3 (150,300# slip-on Flange)
FSW (flange soc weld default)
FTHR1,3 (150,300# threaded flange)
FWN1, FWN3, FWN6 (150,300# weld neck flange)
==II> I (insert)
IN (Instrument--unknown type (.5 mh) --use note field--EA)
==MM> MISCF (misc field--use note)

MISCM (misc material--field installed
MISCS (misc shop--use note)
MITER (miter weld)
==NN> NOTE,NOTE1,NOTE2 (Used to insert a line of text into the estimate)

N (Nipple, First size=Diameter and 2nd size=Length TBE)
N45 (45 deg nozzle weld)
N45R (45 deg nozzle weld reinforced)
N90R (90 deg nozzle weld reinforced)
==PP> PN (Nipple cut from pipe, First size=Diameter and 2nd size=Length PBE)
P (default 10 or 20pipe)
P1,P2,P4 (10,20,40'pipe)
PC&W (20' coat & wrap pipe)
PLUG (plug, threaded)
PD (pipe removal--demo)
==QQ> QUICK (quick disconnect for hose)
==RR> RC (reducer concentric--enter the First and Second Sizes)

RE (reducer eccentric--enter the First and Second Sizes)
==SS> SP (spool handle--LF)

SBW (shop butt weld)
SPEC (spectacle blind)
SOL (default soc-o-let)
SOL3 (3M sol)
SOL6 (6M sol)
SSW (shop sock weld)
STHR (shop threaded connection)
SW (field socket weld)
SWGC or SWGE (swage concentric or eccentric)
==TT> T (tee)
TEST (added test)
THR field threaded connection)
TOL (default thread-o-let)
TOL3 (3M thread-o-let)
TR (tee reducing)
TAP (hot tap)
TUBE304035 or 316035(.035 tubing)
TUBE304049 or 316049(.049 tubing)
TUBE304065 or 316065(.065 tubing)
TUBE304095 or 316095(.095 tubing)
TC304 or 316 (connector adapter x national pipe thread)
T90304 or 316 (tube 90)
T90F304 or 316 (female national pipe thread x tube)
T90M304 or 316(male national pipe thread to tube)
TT304 or 316(tube tee)
TU304 or 316(tube union)
==UU> U (union-specification determined ends)
==WW> WOL (weld-o-let)
SEE THE LIST AT THE SEEK CODE TITLE BY PRESSING THE SEEK CODE TITLE BUTTON
PART THIRTY
Valve Seek Code Formats
VALVES AS SHOWN ON THE HELP AT THE ENTRY SCREEN UPPER LEFT
Some basic valve information first about the pre-loaded valves and how the program uses the SEEK CODE;
1) The program requires that all Hand Valves start with V.
2) The program also requires that Control Valves start with VC. (Example: VC3F)
3) For International Paper Co. enter a "V" then the number W/O DASH. (Example: V100)
4) For Georgia Pacific Co. enter "V-" then the number WITH DASH to the right. (Example: V-100)
5) Use V1WH (Used when valve type not known-no welding is included. Labor to handle only)
6) Build your own valves in the U (Universal) Tab;
Start out by copying a generic valve of the style/type you want and insert that copy below the one you are
duplicating. You may put it anywhere in the valves you want too. The manpower and weld count will
be about what you need if you copy the same type of valve. See the list below to be able to determine
what the valves types are. Then modify the copys description and prices to match your clients. Remove
invalid sizes so that you will not accidentally pick an in-valid valve. To the right of the V type your
choice of a clients alpha next. Do NOT use C(VC). VC is reserved for control valves. (Example:
VS-___ for Smith , VJ-___ for Jones ). It is a simple concept to set up and fast to load a new clients
valves. In a very short time you can build-using the generic valves-a new set of clients valve numbers.
Perhaps you should enter the clients short name as part of the valve description.
__________________Manpower to weld or bolt-up is included for these valves_____________________
CHAIN WHEEL OPERATOR: VCW
LEVEL CONTROL VALVE: INLCV
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE: INPRV
OTHER INSTR VALVES: INPCV

(See Also Instruments) INTCV
INTV
CONTROL: VCO1F (150# flanged)

VCO3F (300# flanged)
VCO9F, VCO15F, VCO25F (900#>2500#flanged)
VCO1W (150# weld)

VCO3W (300# weld)
VCO6W (600# weld)
VCO8W (800# weld)
VCO9W, VCO15W, VCO25W (900#>2500#weld)
BALL: VB1F (150# flanged)

VB3F (300# flanged)
VB6F (600# flanged)
VB9F, VB15F, VB25F (900#>2500# flanged)
VB1T (150# threaded)
VB9T , VB15T, VB25T (900#>2500#threaded)
VB1W (150# weld)
VB3W (300# weld)
VB6W (600# weld)
VB9W, VB15W, VB25W (900#>2500#weld)
BUTTERFLY: VBF1 (150# flanged)

VBF3 (300# flanged)
VBF6 (600# flanged)
VBF8 (800# flanged)
VBF9, VBF15, VB25F (900#>2500# flanged)
CHECK: VC1F (150# flanged)

VC3F (300# flanged)
VC6F (600# flanged)
VC8F (800# flanged)
VC9F , VC15F, VC25F (900#>2500# flanged)
DIAPHRAGM : VD1F (150# flanged)

VD1T (150# threaded)
GATE: VG1F (150# flanged)

VG3F (300# flanged)
VG6F (600# flanged)
VG8F (800# flanged)
VG9F, VG15F, VG25F (900#>2500# flanged)
VG1T (150# threaded)
VG9T, VG15T, VG25T (900#>2500# threaded)
VG1W (150# weld)
VG3W (300# weld)
VG6W (600# weld)
VG8W (800# weld)
VG9W, VG15W, VG25W (900#>2500# weld)
GLOBE: VGL1F (150# flanged)

VGL3F (300# flanged)
VGL9F,VGL15F, VGL25F (900#>2500# flanged)
VGL1T (150# threaded)
VGL9T, VGL15T, VGL25T (900#>2500# threaded)
VGL1W (150# weld)
VGL3W (300# weld)
VGL6W (600# weld)
VGL8W (800# weld)
VGL9W, VGL15W, VGL25W (900#>2500# weld)
PLUG: VP1F (150# flanged)

VP3F (300# flanged)
VP6F (600# flanged)
VP9F, VP15F, VP25F (900#>2500# flanged)
VP1T (150# threaded)
VP9T, VP15T, VP25T (900#>2500# threaded)
VP1W (150# weld)
VP3W (300# weld)
VP6W (600# weld)
VP9W (900#>2500# weld)
NEEDLE: VN3 (3000# threaded)

PART THIRTY-ONE
Piping Connection Seek Code Formats
CONNECTIONS AS SHOWN ON THE HELP AT THE ENTRY SCREEN UPPER LEFT
==BB> BG (default B&G material)
BG1 (150# B&G material)
HBOLT5/8 (drill steel & 5/8"bolt)
HBOLT3/4 (drill steel & 3/4"bolt)
HB#(diameter) and enter length in "SIZE" (Bolts w/nuts by diameter & length EXA: HB.5)
BU1 (150# bolt-up labor)
==CC> CB (cut & bevel)

CUT (cut off)
CORE (core drill-EA)
C&W (coat & wrap jt)
CAMLOCK (disconnect for hose)
==DD> DRILL (drill & tap)
==EE> EX (expansion joint)

HEXB### (drill concrete & "###=SIZE "expansion bolt)
==FF> FBW (field butt weld)

FSL1 (150# field slip-on weld)
FSL3 (300# field slip-on weld)
THR (Field Threaded Connection)
==MM> MISCF (misc field-use note)

MISCS (misc shop-use note)
MITER (miter weld)
==NN> N45 (45 deg nozzle weld)

N45R (45 deg nozzle reinforced weld)
N90R (90 deg nozzle reinforced weld)
==SS> SBW (shop butt weld)

SOL (default soc-o-let)
SOL3 (3M sol)
SOL6 (6M sol)
SSW (shop socket weld)
STHR (shop threaded connection)
==TT> TAP1, TAP 2 (TAP1 First hot tap) (TAP2 Second, third, etc hot tap)
THR (field threaded connection)
TOL (default thread-o-let)
==Q> QUICK (quick disconnect for hose)
==W> WOL (weld-o-let)

PART THIRTY-TWO
Hanger Seek Code Formats
HANGERS AS SHOWN ON THE HELP AT THE ENTRY SCREEN UPPER LEFT
==BB> HBOLT5/8(drill stl&5/8"bolt)
HBOLT3/4(drill stl&3/4"bolt)
HB# and enter length in "SIZE" (Bolts w/nuts by diameter & length)
==CC> CORE (core drill--EA)
==HH> H (misc hanger--use note field-EA)
==MM> MISCF (misc field--use note)

MISCS (misc shop--use note)
STEEL> The methods to enter the steel are:

1) Use HLB for Hanger by the LB. Enter the weight for a quantity. No shape is indicated unless you put it in the note field.
2) Use HSG for Hanger Steel Galvanized, then add steel shape. Enter the LF or SF (Plate) and the program will lookup the weight for you.
3) Use HSP for Hanger Steel Painted, then add steel shape. Enter the LF or SF (Plate) and the program will lookup the weight for you
4) Use HSS for Hanger Steel Stainless, then add steel shape. Enter the LF or SF (Plate) and the program will lookup the weight for you.
REMEMBER: Enter HSG (galv)then shape, HSP (painted) then shape , HSS (304 stainless) then shape
Enter in LF for shapes or SF of Plate It will convert to LBS
EXAMPLES: Steel Shapes: HSGL10X3.5X22.4 HSGC10X15.3 HSGCZ13X36.2

HSGFP.1875 HSGFP2 1/2 HSGG1 1/2X3/16
HSGHP10X42 HSGL1.25X1.25X1/4 HSGM10X7.5
HSGMC10X22 HSGMT3X2.2 HSGP.1875
HSGP1 1/2 or.5(plate) HSGPDA27 HSGPMA22
HSGPS28 HSGPZ27 HSGS10X25.4
HSGSGATE HSGSM11 (Galv shtmtl) HSSM11SS (SS shtmtl)
HSGST1.5X2.85 HSGSTEP24 HSGT10X5X3/8(tube)
HSGW8X67 HSGWT10.5X22 HSGZ4X8.2
Plate: HSGP then thickness
Round Bar: HSG1 1/4 or HSG1.25 HSG3/8 or HSG.375
HSG5/8 or HSG.625 HSG7/8 or HSG.875
HANGERS: NOTE: (H=Black Hangers and HG=Galv Hangers EXA: H191=Black and HG191=Galv)
HB.25 or HB1/4 (1/4" bolt and nut - use 1/4 or .25 up to 2" etc.)
HLEG (CS Dummy Leg)
HLEG4 (304 SS Dummy Leg)
HLEG6 (316 SS Dummy Leg)
H65, HG65
H70, HG70
H97, HG97
H97C, HG97C
==100> H104, HG104

H108, HG108
H131, HG131
H160, HG160 (hanger--shoe fig 160>165)
HG167 Insulation Shield
H181, HG181 (hanger--yoke roller fig181 w/5'rod)
H191, HG191 (hanger--saddle fig181 w/u-bolt)
==200> H212, HG212 or HA212, HGA212 (hanger--clamp fig 212 w/5'rod&attach)

HA212i or HGA212i(hanger--insulation clamp fig212 w/5'rod&attach)
H216, HG216
H218, HG218
H224, HG224
H225, HG225
H229, HG229
H246, HG246
H260H, HG260 (See HGA260)

HA260, HGA260 (Assembly Group: hanger--clevis fig 260 w/5'rod&attach)
H261, HG261(hanger--riser clamp fig261)
H268A, HG268A
HC268A, HGC268A
HB268A, HGB268A
HC268A, HGC268A
HB268C, HGB268C
HC268C, HGC268C
HB268D, HGB268D
HC268D, HGC268D
HB268E, HGB268E
HC268E, HGC268E
HB268F, HGB268F
HC268F, HGC268F
HC268F, HG268F
HB268F, HGB268F
HC268G, HGC268G
H269, HG269
H271, HG271(hanger--base style roller fig271)
H290, HG290
H295, HG295 (See HGA295)
HA295, HGA295 (Assembly Group: hanger-double clamp fig295 w/5'rod&attach)
HA295i, HGA295i (Assembly Group: hanger-insulated double clamp fig295 w/5'rod&att)
==300> HA300i, HGA300i(hanger--insulation clevis fig300 w/5'rod&attach)
==500> H590, HG590
==Other> HASP (Assembly Group: hanger-spring w/attach)
HU, HGU (hanger u-bolt fig137)
PART THIRTY-THREE
Instrument Seek Code Formats
INSTRUMENTS AS SHOWN ON THE HELP AT THE ENTRY SCREEN UPPER LEFT
Methods to Enter an Instrument in the Takeoff Screen:
1) When you have no details--Use IN by itself & use the Note Field (default is.5 mh)
2) Enter the size in the first size, then IN + Item in List Below, quantity, then enter instrument number in Note Field.
EXA: Enter Size, Seek Code INPI , quantity, instrument identification. This will get you the instrument "Pressure Indicator"
Control Valves: Instead of "IN" you enter;

VCO1F (flanged) & Info in Note Field
VCO1W (welded) & Info in Note Field
VCO1H (just handle time for the valve--no weld) & Info in Note Field
VCO3F (flanged) & Info in Note Field
VCO3W (welded) & Info in Note Field
VCO3H (just handle time for the valve--no weld) & Info in Note Field
For Other Valves Use IN Then One of The Following: (Example: INEV, INFCV, INFV):
EV LCV TCV
FCV PCV TV
FV PRV VV
HV SOV
For Instruments Use IN Then One of The Following (Example: INCE, INDE, INFE):
CE Conductivity Element
DE Density
FE Flow Element
FI Field Mounted Flow Indicator
FR Filter Regulator
FS Field Mounted Flow Switch
FM Flow Meter
FT Field Mounted Flow Transmitter
LE
LG Level Gauge or Sight Glass
LT Level Transmitter
LS Level Switch
PI Field Mounted Pressure Indicator
PS Field Mounted Pressure Switch (see also PSH,PSL)
PSE Pressure Rupture Disc
PSH Pressure Switch High
PSL Pressure Switch Low
PT Pressure Transmitter
RO Rotometer
TE Temperature Element (Thermowell)
TI Temperature Indicator
TT Temperature Transmitter
TW Thermowell
Instruments Normally Installed by the Electrical & Instrumentation Contractor (These are NOT in the Database);
AR LOC
AIC PAH
FI (Panel Mounted) PAL
dPT PSE
dPR PI(Panel MTD)
dPAH PIC
FAL PR
FIC REC
FT TAH
FY TAHH
HS TIC
LAH TR
TT
PART THIRTY-FOUR
Special Seek Code Formats
SPECIAL AS SHOWN ON THE HELP AT THE ENTRY SCREEN UPPER LEFT
==BB> HBOLT5/8(drill stl&5/8"bolt) .
HBOLT3/4(drill stl&3/4"bolt)
HB# and enter length in "SIZE" (Bolts w/nuts by diameter & length)
==CC> CB (cut & bevel)
CUT (cut off) CORE (core drill-EA)
C&W (coat & wrap joint) CAMLOCK
==EE> EX (exp joint)
HEXB### (drill & "###=SIZE" expansion bolt)
==FF> FIG8 (fig 8 flanged)
FLEX (flex hose default x length in second size)
FLEXT (flex hose threaded x length in second size)
FLEXF (flanged ends x length in second size)
FO (300# orifice flange)
FSTUB1 (150# stub-in flange)
FGV (flange guard -VUE, Teflon
FGS (flange guard-Saran, Polypropylene)
FGP (flange guard-polypropylene, polyvinyl)
==GG> GNS (grout non-shrink)
==HH> SEE HANGER HELP
TAP (hot tap)
HOSE (quick disconnect for hose) THIS CODE HAS CHANGED
==II> IN+ Instrument Type (See Instrument List-use note field-EA)
==MM> MISCF (misc field-use note)
MISCS (misc shop-use note)
MITER (miter weld)
==NN> NOTE (Used to insert a line of text into the estimate for a note)
==PP> PC&W (20' lengths coated & wrapped pipe)
PD (pipe removal-demolition)
==SS> SP (spool handle-LF)
SB (strainer-basket)
SR (stress relief)
SYCI (Y Strainer Cast Iron Threaded)
SYCI1 (Flanged 150)
SYCI3 (Flanged 300)
SYSS (Y Strainer SS Threaded)
SYSS1 (Flanged 150)
SYSS3 (Flanged 300)
==TT> TRAPS: TB(steam trap bucket)
TF(F&T steam trap)
TT(steam trap thermodynamic)
TAP(hot tap-EA)
TIEIN(labor to locate)
TEST(added test)
THR (field threaded connection)
TUBE304035 or 316035(.035 tubing)
TUBE304049 or 316049(.049 tubing)
TUBE304065 or 316065(.065 tubing)
TUBE304095 or 316095(.095 tubing)
TC304 or 316 (connector adapter x national pipe thread)
T90304 or 316 (tube 90)
T90F304 or 316 (female national pipe thread tube)
T90M304 or 316(male national pipe thread t to tube)
TT304 or 316(tube tee)
TU304 or 316(tube union)
==WW> WALL (Penetration Allowance)
PART THIRTY-FIVE
Crews And Craft Resources
CREW and RESOURCES: (See Setup For all Crews And Composite Makeup)
The Crews at the Setup Screen on the S Tab:
CB Crew performing Bolt-up
CC Civil Crew
CP Crew installing Pipe & Fitting
CV Crew installing Valves
CW Crew performing Welding
IL Ironworker at Low heights
L Laborer
O Operator/driver
M Mechanical Crew
I Insulation
P Painting
EI Electrical/Instrumentation/Controls
B Backhoe Operator
D Dozer Operator
CONC Concrete
RE Rebar
## Twenty-one (21) Customer Developed Crews are Available
The Resources (Craftsmen) on the S Tab:

PF Pipe Foreman
P Pipe Fitter
PW Pipe Welder
PH Pipe Helper
CF Carpenter
C Carpenter
CH Carpenter Helper
I Insulator
IF Ironworker Foreman
IL Ironworker
IH Ironworker Helper
LF Laborer Foreman
L Laborer
OF Operator Foreman
O Operator
P Painter
MF Mechanical (Millwright) Foreman
M Mechanical (Millwright)
PART THIRTY-SIX
Material Cost Code Accounts
You should code the data base with your cost codes. Because this is not possible in all cases, we
are coding the database with a set of codes so you can cross reference the numbers. This is the
beginning of a long process. Not all items are now coded.
As of 2008FEB02, the Material Cost codes will be used to switch the type of mini-schedules will
be used in the Primavera import file. See Chapter 10 for E2P6 and a discussion of the material
codes.
See the next section for Current Labor Cost Codes

Labor Cost Code Accounts

The labor codes have been posted on all items as of 2008AUG01. Reports have not been written at
this time. The estimate files will have a new tab added that incorporates the Labor Cost Codes. The
goal is to have the users codes cross reference with the default codes inside PIPEtalk. The report will
obtain the PIPEtalk code cost and also show the users code
LABOR COST
C1 C2 C3 CODE LABOR COST CODE DESCRIP
0 00 000 0000 Site Related
0 01 010 0100 Removal/Relocate
0 01 011 0110 Removal/Relocate--Site Related
0 01 011 0111 Removal/Relocate--Concrete
0 01 011 0112 Removal/Relocate--Steel
0 01 011 0113 Removal/Relocate--Buildings
0 01 011 0114 Removal/Relocate--Equipment
0 01 011 0115 Removal/Relocate--Piping/Valves
0 01 011 0116 Removal/Relocate--Electrical
0 01 011 0117 Removal/Relocate--Instrumentation
0 01 011 0118 Removal/Relocate--Insulation
0 01 011 0119 Removal/Relocate--Other
0 02 020 0200 Site Development (Include Major Earthwork)

0 02 021 0210 Site--Clear & Grub
0 03 030 0300 Roads, Parking & Area Paving

0 03 031 0310 Soil Stablization/Fabric
0 04 040 0400 Site Services & Improvements

0 04 041 0410 Seeding, Sodding, Sprigging
0 05 050 0500 Site Structures:Ponds/Lagons/Dikes/Bridge

0 05 051 0510 Pond/Dike Linings & Test Wells
0 06 060 0600 Railroad Systems

0 06 061 0610 RR Base & Ballast
0 07 070 0700 Earthwork--Pipe/Fdn/Dewater/Piling

0 07 071 0710 Fill Materials
0 07 072 0720 Excavation/Load--Machine
0 07 073 0730 Excavation--Hand
0 07 074 0740 Backfill/Compact--Machine
0 07 075 0750 Backfill/Compact--Hand
0 07 076 0760 Fine Grade--Machine
0 07 077 0770 Fine Grade--Hand
0 07 078 0780 Trenching
0 07 079 0790 Hauling
Site Support Systems (Dewater, Shoring,

0 08 080 0800 Boring)
0 08 081 0810 Dewatering System
0 08 088 0880 Borings (Under Roads, etc)
0 09 090 0900 Piling & Cassions

0 09 091 0910 Piling--Pipe
0 09 092 0920 Piling--Wood
0 09 093 0930 Piling--Concrete
0 09 094 0940 Piling--Drilled
1 10 100 1000 Concrete

1 10 101 1010 Mats/Footers
1 10 101 1011 Mats/Footers--X-Large >10 CY
1 10 101 1012 Mats/Footers--Large >4>9 CY
1 10 101 1013 Mats/Footers--Medium 2>3 CY
1 10 101 1015 Continous Fooler
1 10 101 1016 Grade Beam
1 10 101 1017
1 10 101 1018
1 10 101 1019 Mud Slab
1 10 102 1020 Area Slabs
1 10 102 1021 Area Slabs
1 10 102 1022 Area Slabs--Roadway
1 10 102 1023 Area Slabs--Sidewalk
1 10 103 1030 Slab-O-Grade
1 10 103 1031 Slab-O-Grade--Reinforced
1 10 103 1032 Slab-O-Grade--Reinforced--w/Turndown Edge
1 10 103 1033 Slab-O-Grade--Reinforced--w/Gradebeam
1 10 103 1034 Slab-O-Grade--Reinforced--w/Dowels
1 10 103 1035 Slab-O-Grade--WW Reinf
1 10 103 1036 Slab-O-Grade--WW Reinf w/Dowels
1 10 103 1037
1 10 103 1038 Slab-O-Grade--Octagon--w/Turndown Edge
1 10 103 1039 Slab-O-Grade--Octagon--Solid
1 10 104 1040 Elevated Slabs
1 10 104 1041 Elevated Slabs--Metal Forms
1 10 104 1042 Elevated Slabs--Wood Forms
1 10 105 1050 Piers/Base--Square/Rectangle
1 10 105 1051 Piers/Base--Square--Large
1 10 105 1052 Piers/Base--Square--Medium
1 10 105 1053 Piers/Base--Square--Small
1 10 105 1054 Piers/Base--Rectangle--Large
1 10 105 1055 Piers/Base--Rectangle--Medium
1 10 105 1056 Piers/Base--Rectangle--Small
1 10 105 1057 Base--Square
1 10 105 1058 Base--Rectangle
1 10 106 1060 Piers/Base--Round

1 10 106 1061 Piers/Base--Round--Drilled
1 10 106 1062 Piers/Base--Round--Not-Drilled--Large
1 10 106 1063 Piers/Base--Round--Not-Drilled--Medium
1 10 106 1064 Piers/Base--Round--Not-Drilled--Small
1 10 106 1065 Base--Round
1 10 107 1070 Tee Supports
1 10 107 1071 Tee Supports
1 10 108 1080 Curbs
1 10 108 1081 Curbs on New
1 10 108 1082 Curbs On Existing Old
1 10 109 1090 Wall
1 10 109 1091 Wall--Straight
1 10 109 1092 Wall-Buttress
1 10 109 1093
1 10 109 1094 Wall-Curved
1 11 110 1100 Drainage/Sewer/Sitework
1 11 110 1101 Manholes
1 11 110 1102 Catch Basin
1 11 110 1103
1 11 110 1104 Ditch Lining
1 11 110 1105 Culvert Wing Wall
1 11 111 1110
1 11 112 1120 U-Drains/Trench
1 11 112 1121 U-Drain--Deep
1 11 112 1122 U-Drain--Medium
1 11 112 1123 U-Drain--Shallow
1 11 112 1124 Trench--Covered
1 11 112 1125 Trench--Open
1 11 113 1130 Equipment Fdn
1 11 113 1131 Equipment Fdn--Simple
1 11 113 1132 Equipment Fdn--Medium
1 11 113 1133 Equipment Fdn--Complex
1 11 114 1140 Encasement
1 11 114 1141 Encase Electrical Conduit
1 11 114 1142 Encase Electrical Pipe
1 11 114 1143 Encase Electrical Steel
1 11 115 1150
1 11 116 1160
1 11 117 1170 Concrete--Specials
1 11 117 1171 Concrete Hole Boring/Core Drill
1 11 117 1172 Concrete Saw Cutting
1 11 118 1180 Grout
1 11 118 1181 Grout--Sand/cement
1 11 118 1182 Grout--Epoxy
1 11 119 1190 Concrete Coatings/Lining
1 11 119 1191 Hardener/Color
1 11 119 1192 Fiberglass Coating
1 11 119 1193 Abrasive Coating

1 11 119 1194 Metal Lining
1 19 190 1900 Precast
2 20 200 2000 Structural Steel

2 20 200 2001 Decking
2 20 200 2002 Fabr Stl-Light
2 20 200 2003 Fabr Stl-Medium
2 20 200 2004 Fabr Stl-Heavy
2 20 200 2005 Fabr Stl-Xheavy
2 20 200 2006 Grating
2 20 200 2007 Slopped Hr
2 20 200 2008 Straight Hr
2 20 200 2009 Open Ladder
2 20 201 2010 Caged Ladder
2 20 201 2011 Steel Other
2 20 201 2012 Plate Steel
2 20 201 2013 Sheetmetal
2 20 201 2014 Steps/Gate
2 20 201 2015 Welding/Cutting/Drilling/Bolting
2 25 250 2500 Structural Steel--Pipe Hangers
3 30 300 3000 Buildings Architectural

3 31 310 3100 Masonry
3 32 320 3200 Rough Carpentry
3 33 330 3300 Doors & Windows
3 34 340 3400 Siding, Roofing & Insulation
3 35 350 3500 Interior Finishes & Painting
3 36 360 3600 Mechanical (Excd HVAC/Duct)
3 37 370 3700 HVAC Systems w/Duct
3 38 380 3800 Furnishings, Specialties
3 39 390 3900 Pre-Fabricated Wood/Metal Bldg
4 40 400 4000 Process Equipment

4 40 400 4001 Accumulator
4 40 400 4005 Aereator
4 40 401 4010 Agitator
4 40 401 4015 Air Dryer
4 40 402 4020 Airpreheater
4 40 402 4022 Analyzer
4 40 402 4023 Arrestor
4 40 402 4025 Baghouse
4 40 403 4030 Barkdrum
4 40 403 4032 Batterycharger
4 40 403 4035 Beltconveyor
4 40 404 4040 Bin
4 40 404 4045 Blackliquorheater
4 40 405 4050 Blender
4 40 405 4052 Centrifuge

4 40 405 4055 Chainconveyor
4 40 406 4060 Chipper
4 40 406 4065 Chute
4 40 407 4070 Clarifier
4 40 407 4075 Coalescer
4 40 407 4077 Column/Tower
4 40 408 4080 Compressor
4 40 408 4082 Condenser
4 40 408 4083 Converter
4 40 409 4090 Cooler/Hvac
4 40 409 4095 Cracker
4 41 410 4100 Crane/Trolley
4 41 410 4105 Crushing
4 41 411 4110 Damper
4 41 411 4115 Decker
4 41 411 4117 Demister
4 41 412 4120 Demineralizer
4 41 412 4125 Demo
4 41 412 4127 Desuperheater
4 41 413 4130 Digester
4 41 414 4145 Dryer
4 41 414 4147 Duct
4 41 415 4150 Dump
4 41 415 4155 Dustcollector
4 41 416 4160 Ejector
4 41 416 4165 Elevator
4 41 417 4170 Evacuator
4 41 417 4175 Evaporator
4 41 418 4185 Fan/Blower
4 41 419 4190 Feeder
4 41 419 4195 Feedwaterheater
4 42 420 4200 Filter
4 42 420 4205 Flaker
4 42 421 4210 Flare
4 42 421 4212 Flowconveyor
4 42 421 4215 Flume
4 42 422 4220 Fueloilheater
4 42 422 4225 Furnance
4 42 423 4230 Gasfilterseparator
4 42 423 4235 Gate
4 42 424 4240 Gearmotor
4 42 424 4245 Generator
4 42 424 4246 Glycol Unit
4 42 424 4247 Granulator
4 42 425 4250 Grinder
4 42 425 4252 Hammermill
4 42 425 4255 Heater/Heat Exchanger
4 42 426 4260 Heatexchangerretube

4 42 426 4265 Hoist
4 42 427 4270 Hopper
4 42 427 4271 Impactor
4 42 427 4272 Incinerator
4 42 427 4275 Jib
4 42 427 4277 Kiln
4 42 428 4280 Lowerator
4 42 428 4282 Manway
4 42 428 4285 Mixer
4 42 429 4290 Motor
4 42 429 4295 Nozzle
4 42 429 4297 Packageboiler
4 42 429 4298 Packer
4 43 430 4300 Papermachine
4 43 430 4305 Pneumaticconveyorsystem
4 43 431 4310 Precipitator
4 43 431 4315 Pressurevessel
4 43 432 4320 Pulpdryer
4 43 432 4325 Pulpchest
4 43 433 4330 Pump/Mtr
4 43 433 4335 Pump/Drive/Mtr
4 43 434 4340 Reactor
4 43 434 4345 Reboiler
4 43 434 4347 Receiver
4 43 435 4350 Recoveryboiler
4 43 435 4355 Reducer
4 43 436 4360 Refiner
4 43 436 4365 Reformer
4 43 437 4370 Regenerator
4 43 437 4375 Relocate
4 43 438 4380 Repulper
4 43 438 4382 Sampler
4 43 438 4385 Saveall
4 43 439 4390 Saveall
4 43 439 4395 Sawdeck
4 44 440 4400 Scaletruck/Rail
4 44 440 4405 Scale
4 44 441 4410 Screens
4 44 441 4411 Screwconveyor
4 44 441 4412 Scrubber
4 44 441 4415 Separator
4 44 442 4420 Sewage
4 44 442 4425 Shaker
4 44 443 4430 Silencers
4 44 443 4432 Silo
4 44 443 4435 Skid
4 44 443 4437 Skimmer
4 44 444 4440 Slinger

4 44 444 4442 Sparger
4 44 444 4445 Stack
4 44 445 4450 Startup/Vendor Rep
4 44 445 4455 Steamturbinegenerator
4 44 446 4460 Sterlingboiler
4 44 446 4465 Strainer
4 44 447 4470 Strippercolumn
4 44 447 4475 Surfacecondenser
4 44 448 4480 Tank
4 44 448 4485 Turbine
4 44 448 4487 Turbinegenerator
4 44 449 4490 Unloader
4 44 449 4495 Valve
4 45 450 4500 Stockwasher
4 45 450 4505 Washer
5 51 510 5100 CS/MI/FS Piping

5 51 511 5110 CS/MI/FS PIPE & FITTINGS
5 51 511 5111 Cs/Mi/Fs Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 51 511 5112 Cs/Mi/Fs Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 51 511 5119 Cs/Mi/Fs Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 51 512 5120 Cs Tubing
5 52 520 5200 PVC/CPVC

5 52 521 5210 PVC PIPE & FITTINGS
5 52 521 5211 Pvc Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 52 521 5212 Pvc Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 52 521 5219 Pvc Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 52 522 5220 CPVC PIPE & FITTINGS

5 52 522 5221 Cpvc Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 52 522 5222 Cpvc Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"

5 52 522 5229 Cpvc Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 53 530 5300 304 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings

5 53 531 5310 304 Stainless Pipe & Fittings
5 53 531 5311 304 Stainless Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 53 531 5312 304 Stainless Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 53 531 5319 304 Stainless Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 53 532 5320 304 Stainless Tubing
5 54 540 5400 316 Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings

5 54 541 5410 316 Stainless Pipe & Fittings
5 54 541 5411 316 Stainless Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 54 541 5419 316 Stainless Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 54 542 5420 316 Stainless Tubing
5 55 550 5500 DUCTILE IRON/CAST IRON

5 55 551 5510 DI PIPE & FITTINGS
5 55 551 5511 Di Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 55 551 5512 Di Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 55 551 5513 Di Pipe & Fittings 8" > 10"
5 55 551 5514 Di Pipe & Fittings 12" > 14"
5 55 551 5515 Di Pipe & Fittings 16" > 18"
5 55 551 5516 Di Pipe & Fittings 20" > 24"
5 55 551 5517 Di Pipe & Fittings 26" > 36"
5 55 551 5518 Di Pipe & Fittings 36" > 48"
5 55 551 5519 Di Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 55 552 5520 CI PIPE & FITTINGS

5 55 552 5521 Ci Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 55 552 5522 Ci Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 55 552 5523 Ci Pipe & Fittings 8" > 10"
5 55 552 5524 Ci Pipe & Fittings 12" > 14"
5 55 552 5525 Ci Pipe & Fittings 16" > 18"
5 55 552 5526 Ci Pipe & Fittings 20" > 24"
5 55 552 5527 Ci Pipe & Fittings 26" > 36"

5 55 552 5528 Ci Pipe & Fittings 36" > 48"
5 55 552 5529 Ci Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 56 560 5600 HDPE/FRP/KYNAR/TEFLON LINED

5 56 561 5610 Hdpe Pipe & Fittings
5 56 561 5611 Hdpe Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 56 561 5612 Hdpe Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 56 561 5619 Hdpe Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 56 562 5620 FRP PIPE & FITTINGS

5 56 562 5621 Frp Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 56 562 5622 Frp Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 56 562 5629 Frp Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 56 563 5630 KYNAR PIPE & FITTINGS

5 56 563 5631 Kynar Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 56 563 5632 Kynar Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 56 563 5639 Kynar Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 56 564 5640 TEFLON LINED CS PIPE & FITTINGS

5 56 564 5641 Teflon Lined Cs Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 56 564 5642 Teflon Lined Cs Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 56 564 5649 Teflon Lined Cs Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 56 565 5650 TEFLON LINED 316 PIPE & FITTINGS

5 56 565 5651 Teflon Lined 316 Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 56 565 5652 Teflon Lined 316 Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 56 565 5659 Teflon Lined 316 Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 57 570 5700 ALLOYS

5 57 571 5710 INCONEL
5 57 571 5711 Inconel Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 57 571 5712 Inconel Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 57 571 5719 Inconel Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 57 572 5720 MONEL

5 57 572 5721 Monel Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 57 572 5722 Monel Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 57 572 5729 Monel Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 57 573 5730 OTHER/COPPER

5 57 573 5731 Other/Copper Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 57 573 5732 Other/Copper Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"
5 57 573 5739 Other/Copper Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 57 574 5740 ALLOY 11 (1 1/4 CR)

5 57 574 5741 Alloy 11 Pipe & Fittings < 3"
5 57 574 5742 Alloy 11 Pipe & Fittings 3" > 6"

5 57 574 5749 Alloy 11 Pipe & Fittings > 50"
5 57 575 5750 ALLOY 20

5 57 576 5760 ALLOY 22 (2 1/4 CR)

5 57 577 5770 ALLOY 91

5 57 578 5780 ALLOY 2205

5 57 579 5790 VALVES

5 57 579 5791 Valves < 3"
5 57 579 5792 Valves 3" > 6"
5 57 579 5793 Valves 8" > 10"
5 57 579 5794 Valves 12" > 14"
5 57 579 5795 Valves 16" > 18"
5 57 579 5796 Valves 20" > 24"
5 57 579 5797 Valves 26" > 36"
5 57 579 5798 Valves 36" > 48"
5 57 579 5799 Valves > 50"
5 58 580 5800 HANGERS/BOLTS&GASKETS

5 58 581 5810 Bolts/Gaskets
5 58 581 5811
5 58 581 5812
5 58 581 5813
5 58 581 5814
5 58 581 5815
5 58 582 5820 Hangers
5 58 582 5821
5 58 582 5822
5 58 582 5823
5 58 582 5824
5 58 582 5825
5 59 590 5900 TESTING/TIE-INS/SPECIAL

5 59 591 5910 HYDRO TESTING
5 59 591 5911 Hydro Testing < 3"
5 59 591 5912 Hydro Testing 3" > 6"
5 59 591 5913 Hydro Testing 8" > 10"
5 59 591 5914 Hydro Testing 12" > 14"
5 59 591 5915 Hydro Testing 16" > 18"
5 59 591 5916 Hydro Testing 20" > 24"
5 59 591 5917 Hydro Testing 26" > 36"
5 59 591 5918 Hydro Testing 36" > 48"
5 59 591 5919 Hydro Testing > 50"
5 59 592 5920 NON-DESTRUCTIVE/TIE-INS/SPECIAL

5 59 592 5921 Non-Destructive Testing
5 59 592 5922 Special Cleaning
5 59 592 5923 Tie-Ins
5 59 592 5924 Hot-Tap
5 59 592 5925
5 59 592 5926
5 59 592 5927
5 59 592 5928
5 59 592 5929
5 59 593 5930 Hose
5 59 594 5940 Flex
5 59 595 5950 Specialties

5 59 595 5951 Traps
5 59 595 5952 Strainers
5 59 595 5953 Quicklock,Camlock
5 59 595 5954 Flange Safety Guard
5 59 595 5955 Flame Arrestor
5 59 595 5956 Valve Operator
5 59 595 5957
5 59 595 5958
6 60 600 6000 Electrical

6 61 610 6100 Primary Transmission/Distribution
6 61 611 6110 Secondary Transmission/Distinution
6 61 612 6120 Raceways--Primary/Secondary
6 61 613 6130 Wiring & Terminations
6 61 614 6140 Lighting
6 61 615 6150 Grounding
6 61 616 6160 Heat Tracing, Other
6 61 617 6170 Loop Check
6 61 618 6180 Startup
6 65 650 6500 Instrumentation

6 65 651 6510 Wire & Termination
6 65 652 6520 Optical Cable & Terminations
6 65 653 6530 Conduit
6 65 654 6540 Cable Tray
6 65 655 6550 Field Instruments
6 65 656 6560 Control Panels
6 65 657 6570 DCS/Programimg/Computers
6 65 657 6570 Loop Check
6 65 659 6590 Startup
7 70 700 7000 Misc/Painting/Coating/Insulation

7 71 710 7100 Paint/Coating
7 71 711 7110 Paint/Coating Steel
7 71 712 7120 Paint/Coating/Labels Pipe
7 71 713 7130 Paint/Coating Equip
7 75 750 7500 Insulation

7 75 751 7510 Insulation Pipe
7 75 752 7520 Insulation Equip
8 80 800 8000 Construction Indirects
8 81 810 8100 Support Personnel
8 82 820 8200
8 83 830 8300 Small Tools & Consumables

8 84 840 8400 Temporary Construction/Field Office Expense
8 85 850 8500 Direct Hire Fringes, Burden, Per Diem
8 86 860 8600 Construction Staff & Expenses
8 87 870 8700 Taxes, Insurance, Freight
8 88 880 8800 Home Office Cost
8 89 890 8900 Margin, Contingency, Escalation, Other
9 90 900 9000 Design Engineering/Fabrication Shop
9 91 910 9100 Design Engineering
9 92 920 9200 Fabrication Design
ABOUT THE AUTHOR
The author, creator and publisher of PIPEtalk is James M. Murphy. He is married to Wen
Zhong of China. They have two daughters. The younger is a Graduate of Mathematics from the
University of Louisiana at Monroe, LA and a recent Graduate of Electrical Engineering from
Louisiana Tech at Ruston, LA. The oldest is married with four children. Wen is a CADD operator
specializing in pressure vessels.
James began work at Ford Bacon & Davis Engineering in Monroe, La. in the mid 70's as an Industrial
Estimator. He continued his career with Ford Bacon and Davis for fifteen years as an estimator, cost
analyst and scheduler. He also is a seasoned scheduler using P3, Primavera 6 and Microsoft Projects.
He is currently employed by Hunt, Guillot and Associates, LLC. In Ruston, LA. He has estimated and
scheduled many industrial project doing budgets and hard dollar proposals. Included in his resume are
many field positions for scheduling and cost control of many boiler rebuilds, paper machine rebuilds
and power plants. He programs using VBA to provide HGA engineering and capital estimating
software and automatic schedule interfaces between Excel budgets and Primavera 6.2 schedules.
What use to take hours, now take only a few minutes! He attended the School of Building
Construction at Northeast University (Now University of Louisiana at Monroe) and Louisiana Tech.
PIPEtalk was used daily to obtain lump sum mechanical projects and now for budget estimates. He is
a past member of many professional organizations.
The author can be reached at James M. Murphy, 915 Gibbs

Street, Bastrop, La., 71220 or email at pipetalk@yahoo.com . The
store site is http://store.yahoo.com/pipetalk. We hope this Excel VBA
Program helps you get the jobs with numbers you can live with.
Remember, it is copyrighted. If you want something customized,
write us. PIPEtalk will work for you, not against you -- if you let it.
A lot of time was spent it making it the right tool for the right task.
Amaze your friends and estimate as fast as they can call out what is on the drawing! It is a great tool
to take off pipe isometrics. Use it to create models for price comparison or to build your pipe typical
to give to your designers. Only your imagination limits how you can use this program.
IPEtalk
CC 2001
Registration Card
(Mail This Information or Email)
Program Name: PIPEtalk
Release Date:____________(S Tab/Right-Upper)
Expire Date:_____________(S Tab/Left-Upper)
Purchase Date: ________________
Downloaded On:_______________
Registered Individual: ___________________________________

Registered Company: ___________________________________
Email Address: ___________________________________
Mailing Address: ___________________________________
___________________________________
City_______________________________
State_______ Zip Code: ______________
Physical Address: ___________________________________

___________________________________
City_______________________________
State_______ Zip Code: ______________
Phone Number: _____________________________

Fax Number: _____________________________

James M. Murphy, 915 Gibbs Street, Bastrop, LA. 71220 U.S.A.
pipetalk@yahoo.com http://store.yahoo.com/pipetalk
INDEX
actual quantity, - 142 - -, - 151 -, - 153 -, - 162 -, - 199 -, - 202 -, - 224 -, - 247 -, -
ALLOYS, - 172 -, - 363 - 260 -
assemblies, - 93 -, - 116 -, - 117 -, - 148 -, - 333 - Entry sheet, - 246 -
ASSISTANT, - 5 -, - 256 - Entry Tab, - 169 -, - 170 -
bid breakdown, - 144 -, - 247 -, - 265 - ENTRY tab, - 15 -
Bolt & Gaskets, - 14 -, - 21 - equipment, - 14 -, - 35 -, - 104 -, - 106 -, - 126 -, - 162 -, - 163 -
bolt up, - 32 - , - 202 -, - 215 -, - 224 -, - 248 -, - 249 -, - 277 -, - 280 -, -
calculated description, - 208 -, - 210 -, - 217 -, - 219 - 335 -
calculated quantity, - 119 -, - 142 - equivalents, - 28 -, - 124 -, - 129 -, - 145 -
CALCULATION FILE, - 279 -, - 283 -, - 299 - Estimate File, 5, - 75 -, - 76 -, - 178 -, - 187 -, - 190 -
Call The Spec This Name, - 251 - estimate files, - 17 -, - 32 -, - 140 -, - 170 -, - 177 -, - 182 -, -
Carbon Steel, 5, - 171 -, - 206 -, - 207 -, - 208 -, - 209 -, - 218 -, 184 -, - 354 -
- 227 -, - 234 - EWO, - 11 -, - 13 -, - 59 -, - 70 -, - 134 -, - 135 -, - 162 -, - 163
CARBON STEEL, - 171 -, - 293 -, - 339 - -, - 176 -, - 267 -, - 272 -
Carbon Steel Tab, - 209 - Extra Work Orders, 5, - 135 -
CGEN, - 280 -, - 281 -, - 308 - field labor cost, - 121 -, - 127 -, - 130 -, - 141 -
C-GEN, - 146 -, - 275 -, - 276 -, - 277 -, - 278 - field unit man-hour, - 120 -, - 141 -
C-GEN, - 285 - field welds, - 32 -, - 125 -, - 129 -, - 145 -, - 333 -
C-GEN, - 286 - FILE, - 38 -, - 40 -, - 53 -, - 113 -, - 153 -, - 154 -, - 156 -, - 192
C-GEN, - 286 - -, - 232 -, - 256 -, - 257 -, - 281 -, - 283 -
C-GEN, - 286 - FRP, - 15 -, - 43 -, - 206 -, - 209 -, - 211 -, - 220 -, - 237 -, -
CHANGE ORDER, - 164 -, - 165 - 340 -, - 362 -
CHANGE ORDER FORM, - 164 -, - 165 - Furnished by, - 169 -
concrete, - 8 -, - 9 -, - 14 -, - 57 -, - 100 -, - 101 -, - 102 -, - 116 GET/USE, - 137 -, - 138 -
-, - 123 -, - 124 -, - 126 -, - 150 -, - 156 -, - 191 -, - 200 -, - global, - 5 -, - 16 -, - 27 -, - 227 -, - 228 -, - 308 -
212 -, - 221 -, - 234 -, - 277 -, - 334 -, - 335 -, - 336 -, - 346 Global Change, - 281 -, - 282 -, - 283 -, - 309 -, - 314 -, - 316 -
- goto, - 182 -, - 191 -
CONCRETE SHAPES REPORT, - 187 -, - 191 - GoTo Buttons, - 197 -, - 234 -
cost control, - 143 -, - 368 - Grinnell, - 91 -, - 93 -, - 117 -, - 197 -, - 232 -, - 253 -
CREATE, - 282 -, - 285 - hanger steel, - 8 -, - 26 -, - 333 -
crews, - 35 -, - 142 -, - 240 -, - 286 - hangers, - 14 -, - 26 -, - 27 -, - 33 -, - 50 -, - 52 -, - 57 -, - 64 -, -
current estimate, - 13 -, - 58 -, - 59 -, - 70 -, - 72 -, - 75 -, - 77 -, 73 -, - 82 -, - 91 -, - 94 -, - 115 -, - 117 -, - 138 -, - 144 -, -
- 135 -, - 138 -, - 158 -, - 200 -, - 256 -, - 259 -, - 262 -, - 183 -, - 202 -, - 215 -, - 224 -, - 264 -, - 333 -, - 335 -
264 -, - 270 - Hangers, - 117 -, - 197 -, - 257 -, - 260 -, - 297 -, - 298 -, - 347
default, - 15 -, - 23 -, - 26 -, - 29 -, - 51 -, - 70 -, - 79 -, - 108 -, - -, - 357 -, - 365 -
109 -, - 117 -, - 200 -, - 201 -, - 213 -, - 214 -, - 222 -, - 223 HASTELLOY, - 211 -, - 220 -, - 237 -
-, - 227 -, - 252 -, - 253 -, - 256 -, - 277 -, - 280 -, - 286 -, - heat trace, - 108 -, - 143 -
342 -, - 343 -, - 346 -, - 349 -, - 351 -, - 354 - heat traced, - 28 -
Do not, - 11 -, - 15 -, - 20 -, - 26 -, - 32 -, - 43 -, - 44 -, - 49 -, - height, - 7 -, - 16 -, - 23 -, - 77 -, - 108 -, - 109 -, - 122 -, - 143 -
52 -, - 56 -, - 113 -, - 116 -, - 117 -, - 140 -, - 145 -, - 151 -, - , - 250 -, - 251 -, - 272 -, - 334 -
152 -, - 154 -, - 198 -, - 201 -, - 202 -, - 209 -, - 210 -, - 213 height adjuster, - 23 -, - 108 -
-, - 215 -, - 219 -, - 223 -, - 225 -, - 239 -, - 242 -, - 282 -, - HELP, 5, - 12 -, - 56 -, - 57 -, - 166 -, - 167 -, - 168 -, - 169 -, -
286 -, - 311 - 170 -, - 171 -, - 172 -, - 173 -, - 174 -, - 175 -, - 176 -, - 342
Do NOT, - 15 -, - 120 -, - 140 -, - 144 -, - 197 -, - 344 - -, - 344 -, - 346 -, - 347 -, - 349 -, - 351 -
Domestic, - 146 -, - 228 -, - 231 -, - 238 - import, 1, - 29 -, - 35 -, - 146 -, - 162 -, - 227 -, - 276 -, - 279 -,
drawing, - 4 -, - 8 -, - 58 -, - 63 -, - 107 -, - 137 -, - 144 -, - 242 - 280 -, - 281 -, - 282 -, - 285 -, - 299 -, - 301 -, - 303 -, -
-, - 248 -, - 253 -, - 254 -, - 265 -, - 272 -, - 368 - 305 -, - 308 -, - 310 -, - 317 -, - 353 -
E2P6, 6, 1, - 275 -, - 279 -, - 282 -, - 283 -, - 299 -, - 311 -, - Import, 6, - 11 -, - 162 -, - 228 -, - 231 -, - 238 -, - 279 -, - 280
314 -, - 315 -, - 316 -, - 353 - -, - 281 -, - 282 -, - 283 -, - 299 -, - 300 -, - 302 -, - 306 -, -
ENTRY, 5, - 12 -, - 13 -, - 15 -, - 16 -, - 26 -, - 27 -, - 31 -, - 44 307 -, - 309 -, - 310 -, - 311 -, - 313 -, - 315 -, - 316 -, - 317
-, - 49 -, - 50 -, - 51 -, - 54 -, - 55 -, - 58 -, - 66 -, - 68 -, - 69 -
-, - 70 -, - 71 -, - 73 -, - 75 -, - 77 -, - 106 -, - 107 -, - 111 -, - IMPORT FILE, - 279 -, - 282 -, - 283 -, - 310 -, - 311 -, - 314 -,
112 -, - 123 -, - 124 -, - 125 -, - 126 -, - 127 -, - 128 -, - 131 - 315 -, - 316 -
-, - 137 -, - 147 -, - 170 -, - 182 -, - 186 -, - 200 -, - 210 -, - Index, 5, - 167 -, - 168 -, - 199 -, - 200 -, - 212 -, - 213 -, - 221 -
212 -, - 219 -, - 222 -, - 228 -, - 235 -, - 239 -, - 245 -, - 248 , - 222 -, - 232 -
-, - 249 -, - 251 -, - 256 -, - 259 -, - 261 -, - 263 -, - 264 -, - insulation, - 14 -, - 16 -, - 28 -, - 57 -, - 64 -, - 73 -, - 77 -, - 82 -
265 -, - 267 -, - 272 -, - 342 -, - 344 -, - 346 -, - 347 -, - 349 , - 107 -, - 108 -, - 124 -, - 129 -, - 143 -, - 145 -, - 197 -, -
-, - 351 - 200 -, - 201 -, - 208 -, - 213 -, - 218 -, - 222 -, - 223 -, - 249
Entry Screen, 5, 1, - 5 -, - 13 -, - 15 -, - 27 -, - 55 -, - 56 -, - 59 - -, - 250 -, - 261 -, - 265 -, - 272 -, - 347 -, - 348 -
, - 68 -, - 115 -, - 116 -, - 118 -, - 122 -, - 123 -, - 124 -, - Insulation, - 5 -, - 28 -, - 108 -, - 169 -, - 257 -, - 296 -, - 297 -,
125 -, - 126 -, - 127 -, - 137 -, - 138 -, - 146 -, - 147 -, - 149 - 298 -, - 347 -, - 352 -, - 354 -, - 357 -, - 366 -
ISO, - 9 -, - 14 -, - 23 -, - 30 -, - 31 -, - 50 -, - 52 -, - 57 -, - 73 -, Primavera, 6, 1, - 34 -, - 146 -, - 275 -, - 276 -, - 279 -, - 280 -, -

- 79 -, - 108 -, - 199 -, - 202 -, - 210 -, - 212 -, - 215 -, - 220 281 -, - 282 -, - 283 -, - 285 -, - 299 -, - 301 -, - 306 -, - 308
-, - 221 -, - 222 -, - 223 -, - 224 -, - 236 -, - 238 - -, - 310 -, - 313 -, - 316 -, - 317 -, - 353 -, - 368 -
isometric, - 241 -, - 242 - program file, 1, - 12 -, - 19 -, - 20 -, - 75 -, - 76 -, - 77 -, - 133
labor cost code, - 146 - -, - 135 -, - 149 -, - 150 -, - 177 -, - 184 -, - 186 -
Last Entry, - 267 - purchasing description, - 64 -, - 118 -, - 144 -
Layout, - 281 -, - 282 -, - 308 -, - 313 - PVC, - 15 -, - 43 -, - 211 -, - 220 -, - 237 -, - 360 -
LF, - 5 -, - 8 -, - 32 -, - 33 -, - 150 -, - 200 -, - 201 -, - 208 -, - Quick-View, - 252 -, - 253 -
212 -, - 213 -, - 214 -, - 221 -, - 223 -, - 256 -, - 260 -, - 289 raw man-hour, - 146 -
-, - 333 -, - 334 -, - 335 -, - 343 -, - 347 -, - 351 -, - 352 - renumbering, - 198 -, - 209 -, - 219 -
line number, - 16 -, - 56 -, - 64 -, - 77 -, - 107 -, - 108 -, - 137 -, Report, 6, - 145 -, - 147 -, - 187 -, - 333 -
- 144 -, - 183 -, - 194 -, - 247 -, - 248 -, - 249 -, - 272 - Reports, 5, - 12 -, - 17 -, - 140 -, - 170 -, - 178 -, - 354 -
linear feet, - 32 -, - 33 -, - 116 -, - 124 -, - 127 -, - 129 -, - 144 -, Reset UPC, - 208 -, - 210 -, - 217 -, - 218 -, - 219 -
- 145 -, - 200 -, - 212 -, - 213 -, - 221 -, - 222 - Resources, 6, - 283 -, - 315 -, - 316 -, - 319 -, - 332 -, - 352 -
M1, - 137 -, - 138 - RESOURCES, - 280 -, - 297 -, - 299 -, - 352 -
M2, - 108 -, - 117 -, - 125 -, - 129 -, - 137 -, - 138 -, - 201 - Sample, 6, - 240 -, - 241 -, - 242 -, - 272 -
M3, - 117 -, - 201 - Save, - 57 -, - 162 -, - 163 -
man-hours, 1, - 7 -, - 18 -, - 26 -, - 30 -, - 31 -, - 32 -, - 34 -, - Schedule, - 46 -, - 183 -, - 255 -, - 278 -, - 280 -, - 281 -, - 284 -
35 -, - 36 -, - 51 -, - 56 -, - 107 -, - 120 -, - 121 -, - 123 -, - , - 285 -, - 286 -
124 -, - 125 -, - 126 -, - 129 -, - 130 -, - 141 -, - 202 -, - 215 scheduling, - 143 -, - 202 -, - 215 -, - 224 -, - 368 -
-, - 224 -, - 262 - secondary size, - 31 -, - 115 -, - 142 -
mechanical, 3, 4, - 9 -, - 368 - SECURITY, - 11 -
memory, 4, - 58 -, - 64 -, - 68 -, - 69 -, - 78 -, - 118 -, - 137 -, - SEEK CODE, - 5 -, - 16 -, - 17 -, - 49 -, - 51 -, - 52 -, - 62 -, -
138 -, - 140 -, - 271 - 64 -, - 82 -, - 116 -, - 117 -, - 142 -, - 195 -, - 197 -, - 198 -, -
MEMORY, - 69 -, - 78 -, - 137 -, - 138 -, - 267 - 199 -, - 203 -, - 208 -, - 210 -, - 215 -, - 218 -, - 219 -, - 225
metric, - 50 -, - 117 -, - 201 -, - 214 -, - 223 - -, - 236 -, - 249 -, - 250 -, - 251 -, - 252 -, - 253 -, - 254 -, -
MONEL, - 211 -, - 220 -, - 237 -, - 363 - 255 -, - 256 -, - 260 -, - 335 -, - 343 -, - 344 -, - 345 -, - 348
MTL FILES, - 175 - -, - 349 -, - 351 -
multiplied, - 31 -, - 201 -, - 213 -, - 222 - SEEK CODES, - 4 -, - 16 -
multiplier, - 15 -, - 26 -, - 27 -, - 28 -, - 30 -, - 35 -, - 78 -, - 82 - Setup, 5, - 7 -, - 17 -, - 19 -, - 21 -, - 23 -, - 24 -, - 26 -, - 27 -, -
, - 122 -, - 143 -, - 145 -, - 146 -, - 227 -, - 228 -, - 232 -, - 49 -, - 73 -, - 108 -, - 111 -, - 113 -, - 122 -, - 124 -, - 125 -, -
239 -, - 250 - 129 -, - 168 -, - 169 -, - 184 -, - 200 -, - 202 -, - 206 -, - 207
multipliers, - 15 - -, - 213 -, - 216 -, - 222 -, - 224 -, - 226 -, - 228 -, - 238 -, -
Multipliers, 6, - 122 -, - 169 -, - 227 -, - 231 - 239 -, - 244 -, - 352 -
New Screen, - 16 -, - 64 -, - 140 -, - 265 - SETUP, - 20 -, - 29 -, - 122 -, - 168 -, - 228 -
notes, - 5 -, - 13 -, - 64 -, - 67 -, - 83 -, - 106 -, - 116 -, - 121 -, - Setup Screen, - 125 -, - 129 -, - 228 -
142 - shipping weight, - 129 -, - 144 -, - 145 -, - 201 -, - 214 -, - 223
NPS, - 23 -, - 30 -, - 31 -, - 50 -, - 57 -, - 73 -, - 79 -, - 108 -, - -
199 -, - 200 -, - 201 -, - 202 -, - 210 -, - 212 -, - 215 -, - 220 shop, - 9 -, - 27 -, - 30 -, - 33 -, - 36 -, - 77 -, - 107 -, - 121 -, -
-, - 221 -, - 222 -, - 223 -, - 224 -, - 236 - 125 -, - 126 -, - 127 -, - 129 -, - 130 -, - 141 -, - 143 -, - 145
paint, - 13 -, - 16 -, - 57 -, - 77 -, - 83 -, - 108 -, - 125 -, - 129 -, -, - 146 -, - 187 -, - 192 -, - 202 -, - 214 -, - 224 -, - 249 -, -
- 143 -, - 197 -, - 201 -, - 208 -, - 213 -, - 218 -, - 222 -, - 262 -, - 333 -, - 343 -, - 346 -, - 347 -, - 351 -
250 -, - 257 -, - 261 - Short Description, - 210 -, - 219 -
Panel, 5, - 13 -, - 14 -, - 71 -, - 72 -, - 74 -, - 78 -, - 132 -, - 137 SORT, - 198 -, - 209 -, - 218 -
-, - 167 -, - 182 -, - 260 -, - 349 - Spec Files, - 169 -, - 175 -
part number, - 146 -, - 234 -, - 236 -, - 239 -, - 263 - spec over-rides, - 5 -
parts, - 4 -, - 5 -, - 12 -, - 21 -, - 27 -, - 45 -, - 46 -, - 70 -, - 90 -, specification, - 3 -, - 5 -, - 7 -, - 12 -, - 13 -, - 17 -, - 37 -, - 38 -,
- 91 -, - 93 -, - 94 -, - 100 -, - 101 -, - 106 -, - 116 -, - 140 -, - 43 -, - 44 -, - 45 -, - 48 -, - 49 -, - 50 -, - 51 -, - 52 -, - 56 -,
- 142 -, - 149 -, - 150 -, - 153 -, - 192 -, - 193 -, - 198 -, - - 59 -, - 61 -, - 72 -, - 73 -, - 79 -, - 110 -, - 112 -, - 113 -, -
227 -, - 234 - 143 -, - 146 -, - 153 -, - 195 -, - 198 -, - 202 -, - 212 -, - 215
PIPE SUPPORTS, - 204 - -, - 221 -, - 224 -, - 238 -, - 245 -, - 246 -, - 247 -, - 249 -, -
PIPEtalk Program, - 11 -, - 12 -, - 240 - 251 -, - 254 -, - 255 -, - 260 -, - 272 -, - 343 -
PIPEtalk4.1, - 10 -, - 300 - specification driven, - 246 -
POLYETHYLENE, - 211 -, - 220 -, - 237 -, - 238 - Specifications, 5, - 37 -, - 72 -, - 108 -, - 206 -, - 211 -, - 212 -,
PRICE CATALOG, - 24 - - 220 -, - 221 -, - 237 -, - 238 -
Price Tab, - 172 -, - 203 -, - 226 -, - 227 -, - 228 -, - 231 -, - 234 SPECS, - 11 -, - 174 -
-, - 235 - spool, - 8 -, - 26 -, - 27 -, - 31 -, - 32 -, - 33 -, - 70 -, - 79 -, -
PRICES, 1, - 172 - 146 -, - 208 -, - 253 -, - 343 -, - 351 -
primary, - 13 -, - 15 -, - 16 -, - 31 -, - 35 -, - 115 -, - 121 -, - 142 stainless, - 13 -, - 15 -, - 52 -, - 94 -, - 108 -, - 347 -
-, - 199 -, - 210 -, - 220 -, - 236 - Storage, 5, - 13 -, - 66 -, - 70 -, - 75 -, - 135 -, - 137 -, - 139 -, -
140 -, - 144 -, - 270 -
storage area, - 13 -, - 17 -, - 27 -, - 56 -, - 58 -, - 59 -, - 60 -, - UNIVERSAL, - 14 -, - 171 -, - 204 -

64 -, - 66 -, - 67 -, - 75 -, - 77 -, - 131 -, - 136 -, - 137 -, - UNIVERSAL ITEMS, - 14 -, - 204 -
138 -, - 158 -, - 162 -, - 266 -, - 267 -, - 270 - Universal Tab, - 28 -, - 171 -, - 195 -, - 197 -, - 203 -, - 232 -
Storage Area, 5, - 13 -, - 70 -, - 75 -, - 137 -, - 139 -, - 144 -, - UPC, - 13 -, - 14 -, - 132 -, - 136 -, - 197 -, - 198 -, - 199 -, -
270 - 208 -, - 209 -, - 210 -, - 217 -, - 218 -, - 219 -, - 231 -, - 235
structural steel, - 94 -, - 116 -, - 123 -, - 124 -, - 150 -, - 154 -, - -, - 236 -, - 263 -
208 -, - 334 -, - 335 - upper entry screen, - 246 -
SUMMARY, - 202 -, - 215 -, - 225 -, - 333 -, - 334 - Validation, 5, - 45 -, - 46 -, - 195 -, - 206 -, - 211 -, - 212 -, -
SUMMARY CODES, - 215 -, - 225 - 220 -, - 221 -, - 237 -, - 238 -
Takeoff Screen, - 56 -, - 66 -, - 70 -, - 140 -, - 141 -, - 349 - VENDOR SETTINGS, - 24 -
TARGET01, - 280 -, - 305 - Visual Basic, - 4 -, - 12 -
TEMPLATE, - 9 -, - 14 -, - 113 -, - 148 -, - 153 -, - 154 -, - WBS, - 70 -, - 72 -, - 75 -, - 76 -, - 77 -, - 177 -, - 187 -, - 192 -,
156 -, - 158 -, - 173 - - 247 -, - 276 -, - 277 -, - 280 -, - 281 -, - 283 -, - 299 -, -
TEXT CONVERT, - 118 - 308 -, - 316 -, - 317 -, - 318 -
traced, - 28 -, - 108 -, - 143 -, - 249 - weights, - 15 -, - 30 -, - 31 -, - 33 -, - 112 -, - 129 -, - 144 -, -
Type 1, - 117 -, - 201 -, - 214 -, - 223 - 145 -
Type 2, - 201 -, - 214 -, - 223 - weld count, - 31 -, - 201 -, - 207 -, - 214 -, - 223 -, - 253 -, -
Type 3, - 117 -, - 201 -, - 214 -, - 223 - 261 -, - 277 -, - 344 -
UNDO, - 118 - welds, - 31 -, - 32 -, - 73 -, - 79 -, - 82 -, - 125 -, - 129 -, - 145 -,
unit material cost, - 141 - - 197 -, - 201 -, - 207 -, - 208 -, - 214 -, - 218 -, - 223 -, -
Universal, 5, - 17 -, - 28 -, - 46 -, - 171 -, - 195 -, - 196 -, - 197 253 -, - 261 -, - 273 -, - 333 -
-, - 198 -, - 199 -, - 203 -, - 232 -, - 344 -

James M. Murphy, 915 Gibbs Street, Bastrop, LA. 71220 U.S.A.
pipetalk@yahoo.com http://store.yahoo.com/pipetalk

Pipe Talk Instruction Manual Rev 1 Single Sided

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Pipe Talk Instruction Manual Rev 1 Single Sided

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

F

All Rights Reserved. U.S. Copyright No. TX 5-367-631

WORLDS LARGEST EXCEL

Made in the U.S.A.

Software Copyright 2001 by James M. Murphy

PROUDLY MADE IN THE U.S.A.

Thank you goes to the School Of Construction at Northeast University in

Un-forgettable memories like these should be shared.

Chapter 1. The S (Setup) Tab..... 19

Chapter 2. The ENTRY Tab and Estimate Files. 54

Chapter 3. HELP .. 166

Chapter 4. The Estimate File... 177

Chapter 5. The U (Universal) Tab.. 195

Chapter 6. The C (Carbon Steel) Tab. 206

Chapter 7. The A (Alloy/Other) Tab.. 216

Chapter 9. Sample Practice Estimate.... 240

Chapter 10. E2P6 (Excel to Primavera)..................... 275

Chapter 11. Complete Estimator 319

Chapter 12. Codes and Craft Resources.................... 332

About The Author 368

Registration Card 369

PIPEtalk 915 GIBBS STREET BASTROP, LA. 71220 pipetalk@yahoo.com

ACTUAL COMMENT FROM A USER

*Microsoft Excel is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.

IMPORTANT QUICK START INFORMATION

IF YOU ALREADY HAVE A COPY OF PIPETALK AND HAVE A FOLDER NAMED

and a new PIPEtalk Titles file and many others.

Disclaimer and Terms

The S (Setup) Tab

Setting Up (SU) PIPEtalk

4) Who furnishes the materials?

1b) Height Multipliers

2) Update File After Changes

6) Multipliers on labor mhrs and materials.

7) Error check settings.

8) Multiplier on labor rates.

9) Adjust insulation equivalents.

S TAB SETUP SCREEN

USE WHOLE NUMBERS, NO FRACTIONS FOR THE HEIGHT

ON THE SETUP TAB ON THE ENTRY TAB

12) Price catalog vendor settings setup.

13) Material price adders.

14) Split field from shop labor.

15) Auto count welds.

23) Labor rates.

17) Special setup-Boltups.

18) Special setup-Spools LF or Each.

19) Special setup-Hanger Calculation.

20) Special setup-Spool weights.

24) Shop rate.

16) NPS or ISO

S TAB SETUP SCREEN

10) Not Used

23a) Craft Labor rates

23b) Craft total hours

22a) Crew names.

22b) Crew total hours

File Control For Specifications and Materials

33) GoTo Spec Files

35) Open Current Specification File

36f) Delete the Spec

36g) Save & Close TITLES

36h) Rename The Spec File

36j) Current Spec 36i) Copy The Spec File